
Cfass 
Book 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 



THE MODERN 
ELECTROPLATER 



A complete book considering fully the elementary 
principles of Electro Deposition of Metals, their 
practical application and industrial use. 
Includes 
A discussion of the essential fundamentals of Chemistry, 
Magnetism and Electricity, written with special refer- 
ence to the needs of the practical man; considers 
the equipment and supplies required for a suc- 
cessful plating plant and describes all the latest 
processes of cleaning, plating and finishing 
metals on a commercial scale. 



BY 

KENNETH M. COGGESHALL 

Electrical Engineer 




Including Valuable Tables and Tested Formulas 



NEW fORK 

THE NORMA^" W. HENLEY PUBLISHING CO. 

2 West 45th Street 
1920 






Copyrighted, 1920 

By 

THE NORMAN W. HENLEY PUBLISHING COMPANY 



Printed in U. S. A. 



Yc? 22 1920 



PUBLISHERS PRINTING COMPANY, NEW YORK 



©CI.A597488 



PREFACE 

The aim of this book is not scientific, but practical. 
An attempt has been made to describe the equipment 
and to explain the practical methods of modern elec- 
troplating in the simplest possible terms. No material 
has been put into the book which does not bear di- 
rectly upon the subject of electro-deposition. For 
example, only the essential fundamentals of magnet- 
ism, electricity, and chemistry have been considered. 

Chapter VIII, which deals with electrolytic solu- 
ions and plating methods, is presented with the co- 
operation of Mr. Harry Duebelbeis, president of the 
American Electroplaters' Society, St. Louis Branch. 

The author takes this opportunity of expressing his 
idebtedness to his father and to Mr. Mark Moody for 
iany valuable suggestions and friendly criticisms. 

The writer is also under obligations to several 

anufacturers and suppliers for cuts and illustrations 
of plating and polishing room equipment. Acknowl- 
edgment is given with the title for the illustrations 
furnished by the Mott Sand Blast Co., the L. S. Star- 
rett Co., Crown Rheostat & Supply Co., General 
Platers' Supply Co., A. P. Munning & Co., The Baird 
Machine Co., Sangamo Electric Co., and Bennett 
O'Connell Co. 

August, 1920. Kenneth M. Coggeshale. 



COXTEXTS 



CHAPTER I 

THE ADVANCE OF THE ELECTROPLATING 
INDUSTRY 

Electroplating: a Definition — Development of the Industry — 
Metal Deposition for Protection — Electrotyping — Depo- 
sition of Precious Metals — Research Work — An Essen- 
tial Industry — Future Development .... Page 11 



CHAPTER II 

ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY AND ELECTRICITY 

Chemical Affinity — Elements — Compounds — Chemical Sym- 
bols — Tabulation of Elements — Atomic Theory — Atoms 
— Molecules — Law of Multiple Proportions — Acids — 
Bases — Salts — Chemical Equations — Common and Tech- 
nical Names — Solids and Solutions — Electro-Chemical 
Action — Electrolysis — Electro-Deposition of Metals — 
Faraday's Laws — Electrical Conductors — The Electric 
Circuit — The Ampere — The Yolt — Potential Difference 
— The Ohm — Resistance Factors — Series Circuits — Paral- 
lel Circuits— The Coulomb— The Joule— The Watt— The 

Watt-Hour— The Horse Power Page 16 

5 



Contents 



CHAPTER III 

THE LOCATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE 
PLATING ROOM 

Three Factors — The Individual Shop — The Factory Depart- 
ment — General Requirements — Floor Plan — Generator 
Location — Floor Drainage — Wooden Floor Construction 
— Acid Proof Walls — Ventilation — Illumination — Heat- 
ing Page 40 



CHAPTER IV 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR THE PLATING ROOM 

Current Supply — The Generator — The Electro-Magnet — The 
Field Magnet — Four Types — Series Generator — Shunt 
Generator — Compound Generator — The Separately Ex- 
cited Shunt Generator — The Armature — The Commuta- 
tor — The Armature Winding — The Brushes — The Bear- 
ings — Capacity — Location — Driving Unit — Motor Ca- 
pacity — Motor Speed — Generator Voltage Regulation — 
Generator Field Rheostat — The Ammeter — The Volt- 
meter — The Amperehour Meter — Tank — Rheostat — Two- 
Wire System — Three-Wire System .... Page 52 

CHAPTER V 

ELECTROPLATING TANK EQUIPMENT 

Tank Capacity — Three-Types of Plating Tanks — Still Tanks 
— Earthenware Tanks — Steel Tanks — Wooden Tanks — 
Tank Construction — Advantage of Warm Plating Baths 



Contents 7 

— Steam Coil Heater — Insulating Joint — Regulating 
Valve — Solution Agitation — Agitation with Air — Tank 
Rods — Plumbing — Rotating Plating Barrels — Automatic 
Plating Machinery — Automatic Moving Tank — Principal 
Advantages — General Design — Other Types — Tanks for 
Preparatory Processes — Pickling Tanks — Bright Dip- 
ping Tanks — Special Ventilating Hoods — Lye and Potash 
Tanks — Hot Water Tanks — Scouring Tanks . Page 82 



CHAPTER VI 

MISCELLANEOUS PLATING ROOM EQUIPMENT 

The Steam Generator — The Drying Oven — Hot Sawdust 
Box — Air Compressor — Time Dial — Plating Anodes — 
Flat Anodes — Corrugated Anodes — Elliptic Anodes 
— Curved Anodes — Slinging Wire — Plating Baskets — 
Plating Hooks — Plating Racks — Special Racks — Dipping 
Baskets — The Respirator — The Hydrometer — The Ther- 
mometer — Litmus Paper — Acid Pump — Carboy Inclina- 
tor — Speed Indicator — Clothing .... Page 116 

CHAPTER VII 

THE PREPARATION OF WORK FOR ELECTRO- 
PLATING 

Cleansing — Removal of Burrs — Oblique Tumbler — Horizontal 
Tumbler — Charging the Tumbler — Sand Blasting — Two- 
Hose Sand Blast — Single-Hose Sand Blast — Sand Blast 
Room — Automatic Sand Blast — Sand Blast Rolling Bar- 
rel — Rotating Table Sand Blast — Compressed Air Sup- 
ply — Sand Blast Sand — Cleansing by Pickling — Rinsing 
— Electrolytic Cleaning — Copper Striking — Polishing — 
Hot Lye Dipping — Scratch Brushing — Scouring — Remov- 
ing Oxides — Stripping — Non-Metallic Work — Bright 
Dipping Page 139 



Contents 



CHAPTER VIII 

PLATING SOLUTIONS AND THE ELECTRO- 
DEPOSITION OF METALS 

Brass — Brass Plating Solution — Brass Anodes — Voltage 
Regulation for Brass Plating — Brass Coloring — Bronze — 
Bronze Plating Solution — Brass Anodes — Voltage Regu- 
lation for Bronze Plating — Copper — Copper Plating 
Solutions for Still Tank — Catalytic Agents — Copper 
Anodes — Voltage Regulation for Copper Plating — Copper 
Deposition — Copper Striking — Copper Coloring — Gold- 
Gold Plating Solution — Gold Anodes — Voltage Regula- 
tions for Gold Plating — Gold Deposition — Stop-Off Var- 
nish — Iron — Iron Plating Solution — Iron Anodes — Volt- 
age Regulation for Iron Plating — Lead — Lead Plating 
Solution — Lead Anodes — Voltage Regulation for Lead 
Plating — Nickel — Solutions for Still Tank Nickel Plat- 
ing — Solution for Barrel Nickel Plating — Black Nickel- 
ing — Nickel Anodes — Voltage Regulation for Nickel 
Plating — Preparation of Work for Nickel Plating — 
Nickel Deposition — Silver — Silver Plating Solution — 
Silver Anodes — Voltage Regulation for Silver Plating 
— Silver Deposition — Silver Coloring — Tin — Tin Plating 
Solution — Tin Anodes — Voltage Regulation for Tin 
Plating — Tin Deposition — Zinc — Electro-Galvanizing — 
Solutions for Still Tank Zinc Plating— Solution for 
Barrel Zinc Plating — Zinc Anodes — Voltage Regulation 
for Zinc Plating — Zinc Deposition — Mechanical Ma- 
chinery for Electro-Galvanizing .... Page 162 

CHAPTER IX 

POLISHING, BUFFING, AND LACQUERING 

The Polishing Room— The Motor Driven Lathe — The Belt- 
Driven Lathe — Overhanging Lathes — Belt Strapping 



Contents 9 

— Grinding Lathes — Surface Grinders — Portable Grind- 
ers — Dust Collector Hoods — Polishing — Polishing Wheels 
— Gluing the Wheels — Cleaning the Wheels — Emery 
Applications — The Glue Heater — Emery Trough — Buf- 
fing — Buffing Wheels — Buffing Compositions — Speed of 
Buffs — Scratch Brushes — Burnishing Barrel — Lacquer- 
ing — The Lacquer Boom — Lacquer Application — Colored 
Lacquer Page 194 



CHAPTER X 

USEFUL REFERENCE DATA 

(A) The Maintenance and Bepair of a Plating Generator — 
Building Up — Low Voltage — Reversal of Current Direc- 
tion — Commutator Sparking — Armature Troubles — Test- 
ing for Open Circuit — Testing for Short Circuit — Test- 
ing for Grounds — Field Troubles — Bearing Troubles — 
Unusual Noises — (B) The Transmission of Power — Shaft 
Drive — Pulleys — Belts — Rules for Speed — (C) Resuscita- 
tion from Electric Shock or Asphyxiation — Quick Action 
— Preliminary Treatment — Loosen Clothing — Resuscita- 
tion — Warmth — Patience — (D) Antidote for Poisons — 
(E) Conductivity of Common Metals — (F) Comparison 
of Thermometers — (G) Miscellaneous Data — (H) Fluxes 
for Soldering or Welding — Amperes Required to Plate 
One Square Foot of Surface — Weight of Metal Deposited 
per Amperehour — Round Copper Conductors for Plating 
Currents — Decimal Equivalents .... Page 231 



The Modern Electroplater 



CHAPTER I 

THE ADVANCE OF THE ELECTROPLATING 
INDUSTRY 

Electroplating: a Definition — Development of the Industry — 
Metal Depobition for Protection — Electrotyping — Depo- 
sition of Precious Metals — Kesearch Work — An Essen- 
tial Industry — Future Development. 

ELECTROPLATING 

Electroplating consists in the deposition of a layer 
of metal upon an object through the action of elec- 
trolysis. 

DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDUSTRY 

Although the discovery of electro-deposition was 
made in 1805, it was not until 1837 that Spencer and 
Jacobi made use of the phenomenon for practical 
purposes. Scientific investigation, continued in the 
laboratories, developed and broadened the scope of 
the subject. Gradually the possibilities of the art of 
electroplating became apparent to manufacturers 
who adapted the process to electrotyping, as well as 
to the coating of small articles. Only recently has 
the chemist considered electroplating as an important 
industry well worthy of his serious study. Careful 

11 



12 The Modern Electroplater 

laboratory investigations, concentrated istudy of 
chemical and electrical phenomena, combined with 
practical experience, have evolved processes and 
formulae designed to produce definite results and 
perfect deposition at a minimum cost. Moreover, 
manufacturers of electroplating machinery, stimu- 
lated perhaps by competition, have year by year im- 
proved their apparatus in an effort to gain the 
highest degree of efficiency. The modern electro- 
plater is quick to grasp and employ to his advantage 
every new process as well as every improvement in 
labor saving machinery. 

METAL DEPOSITION FOR PROTECTION 

It is well known that iron and steel products 
corrode or rust quickly if exposed directly to the 
atmosphere. Yet because the metals are available in 
large quantities, are comparatively inexpensive, and 
since they are strong and durable, commercial prac- 
tice demands their use. Thus, some protective coat- 
ing must be used, whether it be paint, varnish, or a 
layer of non-corrosive metal. In some instances paint 
or varnish may be used, but greater satisfaction re- 
sults if a thin deposit of zinc, nickel, tin, or copper 
is applied. These metals not only afford the neces- 
sary protection but greatly improve the appearance 
of the treated product. Zinc, unlike tin or nickel, 
is electro-positive to iron and is, therefore, an ex- 
cellent protective agent. Moreover, its cost is less 
than the other metals mentioned. Nickel, however, 
because of the high polish it takes on the buffing 
wheel, is usually employed as a coating for hardware 
and other parts requiring a beautiful, finished sur- 



Scope of Electro-De position 13 

face. Tin is not used to as great an extent as the 
others, but copper is often employed. Undoubtedly 
the deposition of protective metals is at present the 
most important phase of the electroplating industry. 
Indeed, electro-galvanizing or zinc plating is of such 
importance that entire plants are equipped solely 
for that work. 

ELECTROTYPING 

Type and other objects may be reproduced by the 
electro deposition of copper upon a mould of the orig- 
inal. Thus, any number of exact metallic reproduc- 
tions may be made from the original type or cut. 
Perhaps no other art has assisted to so great a degree 
the progress of the printing industry as has electro- 
plating. 

DEPOSITION OF PRECIOUS METALS 

Although the greatest volume of work passing 
through most plating rooms at the present time calls 
for the deposition of protective metals, gold and 
silver plating, particularly the latter, have a wide 
application. Usually the deposition of these metals 
is done for ornamental purposes. Jewelry, cutlery, 
table ware, and similar articles made from baser 
metals, are coated with gold and silver to improve 
their appearance as well as to increase their value. 

RESEARCH WORK 

The applications of the art of electroplating just 
mentioned arc only the most important. The field is 
continually growing broader. In a great measure the 
future development of this industry depends upon the 



14 The Modern Electro plater 

interchanging of experiences and opinions of electro- 
platers through the channels of the various trade pa- 
pers and societies. The United States Bureau of 
Standards is carrying on research work with the ex- 
pectation of solving many of the existing plating 
problems as well as presenting new processes, solu- 
tions, and other interesting data. 

AN ESSENTIAL INDUSTRY 

The World War, to a certain degree, assisted in 
placing electroplating among the essential industries. 
Manufacturers accustomed to the use of brass or cop- 
per suddenly found those metals listed as necessary 
for the production of munitions. Thus other metals 
were employed and electroplated to secure the desired 
finish. Quantities of rejected underweight steel ex- 
plosive shells were salvaged by the electro-deposition 
of lead upon their interior walls. Countless steel 
parts were zinc plated as a protection against expo- 
sure to the atmosphere. The writer, for instance, was 
interested in the production of thousands of "depth 
bombs," practically every part of which passed 
through the plating room. Under the pressure of 
war work many plating establishments, of necessity, 
applied the rules of efficiency, purchased new ma- 
chinery, and, using the same floor space, increased 
production to a previously unthought-of extent. 
These lessons cannot soon be forgotten. 

FUTURE DEVELOPMENT 

Automatic machinery is appearing to lessen the 
labor of plating, as well as to reduce its cost. The 
modern plating room is equipped with plating bar- 



The Modern Plating Room 15 

rels, automatic conveyors for still tanks, steel ball 
burnishers, and similar apparatus. The plating room 
of the future will be equipped entirely with such 
labor-saving machinery; operations will be standard- 
ized; work will move in a definite path through the 
room ; the quality of the deposit will be uniform, and 
quantity production will be demanded. 



CHAPTER II 

ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY AND 
ELECTRICITY 

Chemical Affinity — Elements — Compounds — Chemical Sym- 
bols—Tabulation of Elements — Atomic Theory — Atoms 
— Molecules — Law of Multiple Proportions — Acids — 
Bases — Salts — Chemical Equations — Common and Tech- 
nical Names — Solids and Solutions — Electro-Chemical 
Action — Electrolysis — Electro-Deposition of Metals — 
Faraday 's Laws — Electrical Conductors — The Electric 
Circuit — The Ampere — The Volt — Potential Difference 
— The Ohm — Resistance Factors — Series Circuits — Paral- 
lel Circuits— The Coulomb— The Joule— The Watt— The 
Watt-Hour — The Horse Power. 

It is not necessary that an electro-plater be a care- 
ful student of either electricity or chemistry. A tech- 
nical discussion of the laws relating to electro-chem- 
istry would, undoubtedly, have but little interest for 
even an expert plater. His attention is usually di- 
rected first and chiefly to the how rather than the 
why of electro-deposition. Progress is stimulated, 
however, by taking advantage of the experience of 
co-workers in the art of plating, and proceeding with 
the work from the point to which others have ad- 
vanced it. Much of such useful information is found 
in current magazines of the trade expressed in the 
form of chemical equations or written in terms of 

16 



Elements and Compounds 17 

electrical units. Thus, a brief review of the funda- 
mental facts and principles of these subjects should 
prove helpful to the electroplater. 

CHEMICAL AFFINITY 

It was discovered, some few years ago, that most 
substances can, by chemical action, be converted into 
more simple substances. At present about eighty 
substances are known which cannot be further de- 
composed; these the scientists term elements. As yet 
it is not fully understood what power holds the ele- 
ments together in the many combinations. This phe- 
nomenon, causing various substances to form in com- 
binations of two to six or more elements, is termed 
chemical affinity. Fortunately, but few elements are 
of concern to the electroplater. 

ELEMENTS 

Elements are those substances incapable of separa- 
tion into other kinds of matter. Metals, such as iron, 
lead, zinc, gold and silver, are elements, as are also 
gases, like hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen and chlorine. 
Not all elements are conductors of electricity; some 
are not even good conductors of heat. 

COMPOUNDS 

Compounds, as the name implies, are composed of 
several substances. It is therefore true that a com- 
pound may be broken up into the elements of which 
it is composed. Water, H 2 0, the most bountiful of 
all compounds, is composed of two familiar elements, 
hydrogen and oxygen. As a further . example, silver 



18 The Modern Electroplater 

nitrate, AgN0 3 , can be separated into the elements 
silver, nitrogen, and oxygen, of which it is com- 
pounded. 

CHEMICAL SYMBOLS 

It would not be an easy matter to express a chem- 
ical substance or reaction by writing out in full the 
name of each element involved. To save time, there- 
fore, as well as to express a letter picture of the com- 
bination of elements, a kind of shorthand has been 
evolved to represent the names of substances. 

In a number of instances the first letter of the 
Latin name is the symbol. Thus, the Latin name for 
potassium is Kalium, and K is the symbol for that 
element. Other symbols take the first letter and some 
other letter in the word. For instance, tin is Stan- 
num in Latin, and Sn is the chemical symbol. As 
will be noticed, however, from the following list of 
elements, most of the symbols have their origin in 
the English name; as H for hydrogen and CI for 
chlorine. 



TABULATION OF ELEMENTS 

ATOMIC 

ELEMENT SYMBOL WEIGHT 

Aluminum Al 27.1 

Antimony Sb 120.2 

Argon A 39.9 

Arsenic As 75. 

Barium Ba 137.4 

Bismuth Bi 208. 

Boron B 11. 

Bromine Br 79.96 

Cadmium Cd 112.4 

Caesium Cs 132.9 

Calcium Ca 40.1 

Carbon C 12. 

Cerium Ce 140.25 



The Elements 19 

ATOMIC 

ELEMENT SYMBOL WEIGHT 

Chlorine CI 35.45 

Chromium „ Cr 52.1 

Cobalt Co 59. 

Columbium Cb 94. 

Copper Cu 63.6 

Erbium E 166. 

Europium Eu 152. 

Fluorine F 19. 

Gadolinium Gd 156. 

Gallium Ga 70. 

Germanium Ge 72.5 

Glucinum Gl v 9.1 

Gold Au 197.2 

Helium He 4. 

Hydrogen H 1.008 

Indium In 115. 

Iodine I 126.97 

Iridium Ir 193. 

Iron Fe 55.9 

Krypton Kr 81.8 

Lanthanum La 138.9 

Lead Pb 206.9 

Lithium Li 7.03 

Magnesium , Mg 24.36 

Manganese Mn 55. 

Mercury Hg 200. 

Molybdenum Mo 96. 

Neodymium Nd 143.6 

Neon Ne 20. 

Nickel Ni' 58.7 

Nitrogen N 14.01 

Osmium Os 191. 

Oxygen O 16. 

Palladium Pd 106.5 

Phosphorous P 31. 

Platinum Pt 194.8 

Potassium K 39.15 

Praseodynium Pr. 140.5 

Eadium Ea 225. 

Rhodium Eh 103. 

Eubidium '. . Eb 85.5 

Euthenium Eu 101.7 

Samarium Sm 150.3 

Scandium Sc 44.1 

Selenium Se 79.2 

Silicon Si 28.4 

Silver Ag 107.93 



20 The Modem Electroplater 

ATOMIC 

ELEMENT SYMBOL WEIGHT 

Sodium Na 23.05 

Strontium Sr 87.6 

Sulphur S 32.06 

Tantalum Ta 181. 

Tellurium Te 127.6 

Terbium Tb 159.2 

Thallium Tl ,204.1 

Thorium Th 232.5 

Thulium Tu 171. 

Tin Sn 119. 

Titanium Ti 48.1 

Tungsten W 184. 

Uranium U 238.5 

Vanadium V 51.2 

Xenon X 128. 

Ytterbium Yb 173. 

Yttrium Y 89. 

Zinc Zn 65.4 

Zirconium Zr 90.6 



ATOMIC THEORY 

In order that the combinations of elements as ex- 
pressed in chemical formulas may be comprehended, 
the reader must understand something of the atomic 
theory. It is known that elements combine in definite 
proportions. Moreover, when elements combine with 
others in different ways, the relative quantities that 
make up the combination, in the several instances, 
follow out definite laws. 

ATOMS 

Every simple substance or element is supposed to 
be made up of atoms, all of which are alike and of 
the same weight. Chemical combination of different 
substances takes place between these particles or 
atoms. The atoms of one element have a different 
weight from those of other elements. It is not nee- 



Atoms and Molecules 21 

essary to know the absolute weight of the atoms, but 
the relative weight is most important. The atomic 
weight of hydrogen is taken as the unit for the sys- 
tem, and for all practical purposes may be considered 
as unity. By reference to the tabulation it is seen 
that the atomic weight of chlorine is 35.45. Thus, the 
familiar hydrochloric acid, HC1, is a compound com- 
posed of 35.45 parts by weight of chlorine to 1 part 
of hydrogen. Common table salt, NaCl, is a combina- 
tion of 23.05 parts by weight of sodium to 35.45 parts 
of chlorine. In practice the symbols shown in the 
table are used to express the relative weights. Hence, 
Al stands for 27.1 parts by weight of aluminum, C 
for 12 parts by weight of carbon, Sn for the atomic 
weight of tin, and so on. 

MOLECULES 

We have now seen that the atom is the smallest 
particle of an element considered in chemical action. 
Atoms of several elements, however, may combine to 
form particles of a larger degree, called molecules. 
Thus, HC1 denotes a molecule of hydrochloric acid, 
which is composed of an atom of hydrogen and one 
of chlorine. 

When two or more atoms of one element combine 
with those of other elements, the total number of each 
above one entering into the combination is indicated 
by a numeral placed at the lower right hand corner 
of the letter symbol. Take, for example, the formula 
for water, H 2 0. The numeral 2 appearing after the 
H denotes that two hydrogen atoms have combined 
with one of oxygen. Sulphuric acid, H 2 S0 4 , is so 
written that the combination is apparent : two hydro- 



22 The Modern Electroplater 

gen atoms, one sulphur, and four oxygen atoms. 
Often the molecular composition is more complex, as 
is indicated in the formula for ferric sulphate, 
Fe2(S0 4 ) 3 . As is at once seen, the molecule is com- 
posed of: iron, two atoms; sulphur, three atoms, and 
oxygen, twelve atoms, or a total of seventeen atoms. 
Some molecules are combinations of a large number 
of atoms. Note, for example, the formula for the 
familiar substance sugar: C 12 H 2 20n. 

The number of molecules is expressed by a large 
numeral preceding the symbol. Hence, if 6 molecules 
of sulphuric acid are to be used, it is apparent that 
they would be grouped together and written 6H2SO4. 

LAW OF MULTIPLE PROPORTIONS 

From the preceding brief discussion of atoms and 
molecules it is seen that the atoms always combine in 
definite proportions. But a glance at the formulas 
given as examples undoubtedly shows that there must 
be some law causing the elements to combine in more 
than one proportion. The law of multiple propor- 
tions, first conceived by Dalton, states that the com- 
bining weights of elements are always multiples of 
each other. This law may be more clearly illustrated 
by the usual example of two elements, A and B. If 
A combines with a certain weight of B in more than 
one proportion, then the different combining weights 
of A with B always show some definite ratio or mul- 
tiples of each other, such as 1 : 2, 2 : 3. There are 
many elements that combine in several different ways, 
but the following tabulation of the multiple propor- 
tions of two abundant substances, lead and oxygen, 
gives a fair example. 



Acids, Bases, and Salts 23 

Name Formula Parts by Weight Eatio of 

Pb O Pb to O 

Lead Suboxide Pb 2 414 16 207 8 

Lead Oxide PbO 207 16 207 16 

Lead Sesquioxide . . . Pb 2 3 414 48 207 24 

Lead Peroxide Pb0 2 207 32 207 32 

ACIDS 

Before going further, a distinction should be made 
between acids, bases, and salts that are formed by 
combination of several elements. By studying the 
symbols of various acids and their reactions with other 
substances, it Avill be noticed that an acid always 
contains hydrogen which it will exchange for a metal, 
when a metal or its compound is added. Hydro- 
chloric acid, HC1, is an example. 

BASES 

On the other hand, substances containing a metal 
in combination with oxygen and hydrogen, which will 
exchange the metal for hydrogen Avhen an acid is 
added, are termed bases. Sodium hydroxide, XaOH, 
is a base. 

SALTS 

When an acid acts upon a base, water and another 
substance called a salt are formed. Zinc sulphate, 
ZnS0 4 , is known as a salt. 

CHEMICAL EQUATIONS 

To express chemical action, equations are used, simi- 
lar to those employed in algebra. The action of any 
substance upon another is indicated by coupling them 
with a plus sign. The factors in the transformation 



24 The Modern Electroplater 

precede an equality sign and the result of the reac- 
tion follows. The sum of the atomic weight, in other 
words, on one side of the equation must equal the 
sum of those written on the opposite side. Nothing is 
lost during a chemical transformation ; new substances 
may be formed, but the same weight of matter is 
present after the action as before. 

It may be interesting to note a few simple changes 
as represented by an equation. Zinc, when acted upon 
by sulphuric acid, produces a salt, zinc sulphate, and 
a gas hydrogen. The story of the chemical trans- 
formation may be written in the form of an equation. 

Zn+H 2 S0 4 =ZnS0 4 +2H 

The base, ammonium hydroxide, when treated with 
hydrochloric acid, reacts to give water and ammonium 
chloride, or what is commercially known as sal am- 
moniac : 

NH 4 ( OH ) +HC1=H 2 0+NH 4 C1 

A few other simple. chemical reactions, expressed in 
the form of equations, are given to illustrate further 
similar transformations : 

Zn+2HCl=ZnCl 2 +2H 

ZnCl 2 +2KCN=2KCl+Zn(CN) 2 

Cu+H 2 S0 4 =CuO+S0 2 +H 2 

CuO+H 2 S0 4 =CuS0 4 +H 2 

NiCl 2 +6NH 3 =Ni(NH 3 ) 6 Cl 2 

Ag 2 0+2HN0 3 =2AgN0 3 +H 2 

NH 3 +HC1=NH 4 C1 

NaN0 3 +H 2 S0 4 =NaHS0 4 +HN0 3 

Pb0 2 +4HCl==PbCl 2 +2H 2 0+2Cl 



Two-Name Substances 



25 



COMMON AND TECHNICAL NAMES 

One confusing factor in the study of chemistry is 
the designation of a given substance by two or more 
names. For illustration, the familiar blue vitriol or 
blue stone is technically termed copper sulphate. In 
like manner, muriatic and hydrochloric acid are iden- 
tical, although one unfamiliar with the terms might 
assume them to be two distinct substances. For con- 
venience, a reference tabulation is given, containing 
the common and technical names of substances often 
used in the plating room: 



Common Name 
Baking Soda 
Blue Stone 
Blue Vitriol 
Common Salt 
Copperas 

Corrosive Sublimate 
Glaubers Salts 
Iron Chloride 
Iron Oxide 
Muriatic Acid 
Oil of Vitriol 
Prussic Acid 
Sal Ammoniac 
Sal Soda 
Saltpetre 
Sugar of Lead 
Tartar Salts 
Tin Chloride 
White Lead 
White Vitriol 



Technical Name 
Sodium Bicarbonate 
Copper Sulphate 
Copper Sulphate 
Sodium Chloride 
Ferrous Sulphate 
Mercuric Chloride 
Sodium Sulphate 
Ferric Chloride 
Ferric Oxide 
Hydrochloric Acid 
Sulphuric Acid 
Hydrocyanic Acid 
Ammonium Chloride 
Sodium Carbonate 
Potassium Nitrate 
Lead Acetate 
Potassium Carbonate 
Stannous Chloride 
Lead Carbonate 
Zinc Sulphate 



26 The Modern Electroplater 

SOLIDS AND SOLUTIONS 

Chemical action does not readily take place between 
solid substances, and it is, therefore, often necessary 
to dissolve them in water. No matter how finely the 
substances may be divided by pulverizing, the par- 
\ tides are not in as intimate contact with each other 
j as when they are in the liquid state. For this reason, 
aside from the question of cost and convenience, solu- 
tions only are employed in electroplating. 

ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ACTION 

It was discovered many years ago that chemical 
and electrical phenomena are often coexistent, or at 
least closely related. Chemical action between certain 
metals, or carbon and a metal, when impressed in an 
acid, for instance, produces an electro-motive force 
between the two. This is the action of the ordinary 
primary battery. Water, when an electric current is 
passed through it, breaks up into its chemical com- 
ponents — hydrogen and oxygen. These are two sim- 
ple examples of decomposition by electro-chemical 
action. 

ELECTROLYSIS 

Electrolysis is the term applied to the decomposi- 
tion of substances by an electric current. To explain 
this decomposition, the molecule must be considered 
as disintegrating into smaller particles, each of which 
may consist of one or more atoms. These particles, 
called ions, may be assumed to have positive or nega- 
tive electrical charges. These differently charged ions 
move in opposite directions. The ions moving toward 
the negative electrode or cathode are termed cations; 






The Electroplating Process 



27 



those moving toward the positive electrode or anode 
are called anions. The cations of bases and salts are, 
in general, the metals, while hydrogen is the cation 
of acids. 

ELECTRO-DEPOSITION OF METALS 

We now come to the application of the foregoing 
theory. Suppose an electrolyte is formed by dissolv- 




Fig. 1. — Simple Apparatus for Electroplating 



ing copper sulphate in water. Into this solution is 
suspended, as shown in Fig. 1, a copper plate anode 
and any article of another metal — brass, for example. 
To the copper plate is connected the positive terminal 
of a direct current generator or of a battery; to the 
brass article, the negative terminal. The former plate 
is the anode, the latter the cathode. In a few mo- 
ments a light coating of copper is deposited on the 



28 The Modern Electro plater 

brass article, the deposit increasing in thickness as 
long as the current flow continues and the anode 
remains. The explanation of this phenomenon is clear 
from the discussion in the preceding paragraph. The 
copper, Cu, in the copper sulphate solution is the 
cation and moves toward the cathode, depositing the 
copper as it gives up its charge. The S0 4 is the anion 
and moves to the anode to which it is attracted, where 
it chemically combines with the copper plate to form 
copper sulphate, CuS0 4 . Thus, while the electrolyte 
is continually replaced, the anode disintegrates as it 
gives up the copper to the solution. 

FARADAY'S LAWS 

Two fundamental laws, set forth by Faraday, are 
of interest to the electroplater, and must be men- 
tioned before passing on to another subject. 

The first law states that the weight of any substance 
discharged at the electrodes in a given time is directly 
proportional to the quantity of electricity passing 
through the electrolyte. Thus, in the illustration just 
given of copper plating, if a certain amount of metal 
is deposited with one ampere flowing through the 
electrolyte, twice the deposit might be expected in the 
same time interval if the current were two amperes. 

The second law may be summarized as stating that 
the amounts of the different substances deposited by 
a given quantity of electricity bear the same relation 
to each other as their respective chemical equivalents. 
The equivalent of any element in chemistry is the 
amount by weight which may replace or combine with 
one part by weight of hydrogen. Using again the 
simple illustration of water, H 2 might be expressed 



The Electric Circuit 



29 



hydrogen 2, oxygen 16. Thus the ratio is eight to one 
and eight is the chemical equivalent of oxygen. The 
equivalents of other elements are determined in like 
manner. The atomic weight, when divided by the 
equivalent weight, gives a number termed the valency 
of that element. 

ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS 

The effect of the passage of electricity through an 
electrolyte is to decompose it. Quite different is the 
result of current flow through a metal conductor. 
Aside from an increase in temperature, there is no 
chemical or physical change in the metal. 

THE ELECTRIC CIRCUIT 

Before there can be a flow of electricity a complete 
circuit must be established. Such a circuit is indi- 
cated in Fig. 2, where it is compared with a simple 





Generator 
Ele. c trie Circ u/'f 



Switch 




Centrit~vga/ Pump 
Hydraulic Circuit 



Fig. 2. — Comparison of Electric and Hydraulic Circuits 



30 The Modern Electroplater 

hydraulic circuit. The switch and stop-cock serve 
identical purposes ; they control the flow of electricity 
and water respectively. The plating tank offers re- 
sistance to the flow of current in the electrical cir- 
cuit, while a series of cooling coils, perhaps, retards 
the flow in the hydraulic circuit. 

THE AMPERE 

As an aid in defining the various units of electrical 
measurement, this analogy of the passage of an elec- 
tric current through a wire and the flow of water in 
a pipe may again be cited. The quantity of water 
flowing through a pipe in a specified time is usually 
measured in gallons. In like manner the quantity of 
electricity flowing through a wire in a given period 
is expressed in amperes. The gallon and the ampere, 
then, are both units of quantity measurement. A 
more technical definition of the ampere is: "the prac- 
tical equivalent of the unvarying current which, when 
passed through a solution of nitrate of silver in water 
(in accordance with standard specifications), deposits 
silver at the rate of 0.001118 gram per second," It 
is also interesting to- note that in accordance with the 
second law of Faraday, this same current would de- 
posit approximately 0.0003287 gram of copper in one 
second. 

THE VOLT 

Again referring to the water pipe illustration, the 
difference in hydrostatic pressure between two points 
in the system is expressed in pounds per square inch. 
In the electric circuit the difference in pressure, or 
potential, between two points is measured in volts. 



The Electric Circuit 



31 



POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE 

Refer to Fig. 3, illustrating analogously the simi- 
larity between pressure drop and potential difference 
at various points in the system. When the stop-cock 




Switch 



Electric Circuit 




Hydraulic Circuit 



Fig. 3.— Fall of Potential and Fall of Pressure 



is closed so that no water flows, the pressure gages all 
indicate the same reading. In like manner, the volt- 
meters in the electric circuit all show the generator 
terminal voltage when the switch is thrown, so that 
no current flows. Open the stop-cock, and a uniform 
drop in pressure is noted on the gages, A showing the 
highest reading and D the lowest. The same condi- 



32 The Modem Electroplater 

tions exist in the electric circuit ; when the current is 
flowing, the voltmeter, F, indicates a lower reading 
than the meter E, G lower than F, and H the lowest 
of all. The difference between the readings at E and 
H is termed the difference of potential. 

THE OHM 

Because no substance is a perfect conductor of elec- 
tricity, a percentage of the electric energy is changed 
during transmission to some other form, usually heat. 
This transformation is caused by the resistance the 
substance presents to the passage of the electric cur- 
rent. This resistance of any substance is expressed 
in units termed ohms and is definitely known by com- 
parison with the standard measure of resistance. This 
standard unit or ohm is the resistance, at 0° Centi- 
grade, of a column of mercury 106.3 cm. long, having 
a cross-section of 1 sq. mm. 

RESISTANCE FACTORS 

There are several conditions that influence the re- 
sistance of a conductor, such as material, cross-section 
area, length, and temperature. It is readily under- 
stood that the amount of resistance varies with the 
nature of the substance. Copper, for instance, is an 
excellent conductor of electricity. On the other hand, 
iron shows a resistance six times that of copper, while 
the resistance of mercury measures about sixty-four 
times as great. Electrical resistance also varies in- 
versely as the area of the cross-section of the conduc- 
tor. In the case of a round wire, the resistance varies 
inversely as the square of the diameter. This is seen 
at a glance by referring to tables showing wire sizes 



Resistance 33 

and the corresponding resistances per unit length. 
Further, provided the material and cross-section of 
a conductor remain constant, the resistance varies 
directly as the length. This means that all other 
values being equal, a wire 50 feet long has twice the 
resistance of a section 25 feet in length. The fact 
that the resistance of a conductor changes as its tem- 
perature varies is of especial interest to the electro- 
plater. Metals show an increase in electrical resist- 
ance when their temperature is raised. As exceptions 
to this law, carbon and electrolytes show a decrease 
in resistance to the passage of an electric current 
when the temperature is increased. This is why it is 
so essential to keep the plating bath at a compara- 
tively -high temperature by artificial heating. 

There is a definite relationship between the resist- 
ance, current strength, and potential difference or 
electro-motive force, known as Ohm's Law. Expressed 
in the form of an equation, I=E/R, where I is the 
current strength in amperes, E is the resistance in 
ohms, and E is the electro-motive force in volts. Thus, 
it is readily seen that to increase the flow of current 
in an electric circuit, either the voltage must be in- 
creased or the resistance decreased. In plating work, 
the current is usually regulated by controlling the 
resistance of the circuit by a rheostat. This method 
is discussed in another chapter. 

Other convenient forms of the first equation are: 
E=IR, i.e., the electro-motive force, is equivalent to 
the product of the current value in amperes and the 
resistance expressed in ohms. 

E 

Or, again, R= — 



34 The Modern Electroplate?' 

If any two of the three values are known, the third is 
easily computed through the use of the foregoing 
equations. 

SERIES CIRCUITS 

When several resistance units, such as R 1? R2, and 
R 3 , are connected in series as indicated in Fig. 4, the 
total resistance of the three units is the arithmetical 
sum, or R x 4-1^2+^3- Obviously, the current has the 
same value at any part of the circuit, since there is 



■»/ 



( ^Generator 

f<— E,— >| p— -E z — >( |<— -f 3 -->| 

Switch^ I R, R 2 I R 3 



Fig. 4. — Three Resistances in Series 

but one path to follow. Moreover, since the current 
flowing through all units is identical, then the dif- 
ference of potential across each unit is directly pro- 
portional to its resistance. For example, E 1 =R 1 I, or 
E 3 =R 3 I. Note that if a break occurs at any point 
in the circuit, the current flow through all units 
ceases. 

PARALLEL CIRCUITS 

On the other hand, if the resistance units are con- 
nected in parallel or multiple, as shown in Fig. 5, 
the total resistance is not the sum of the three, nor 
do the currents flowing through the different units 
have the same value. Parallel circuits are of espe- 



Resistance 



35 



cial interest to the electroplater, since the tanks he 
uses are in reality resistance units connected in the 
circuit as indicated in Fig. 6. 




Fig. 5. — Three Resistances in Parallel 

Let us consider the subject through the assistance 
of equations. I is the total current generated and 
E is the line . voltage. By referring to the diagram 




Anode 
Rod— A 



\ ** 



Caihode': 
Rod-' 



\>, 



\'. 



Switch 



F*g. 6. — Three Plating Tanks Connected in Parallel 



again, it is noted that the potential difference across 
any unit is E, regardless of the resistance. The value 
of E, then, is the constant in all of the following 



36 The Modern Electroplater 

equations. The resistance of the three units may be 
considered as R 1? R 2 , and R 3 , while the value of the 
current flowing in each is I l9 I 2 , and I 3 , respectively. 
R is the total resistance, which is, of course, less than 
that of any of the individual units. 

Then 1= 

R 

But E/R=E/R 1 +E/R 2 +E/R 3 

Eliminating E, we find the reciprocal of the resist- 
ance, termed the conductance, is 

1/R=1/R 1 +1/R 2 +1/R 3 

The equation may be used in this form, but it is 
usually more convenient to complete it. Thus, 

R1+R2+R3 



R 1 R 2 +R 2 R 3 RiH- 3 

Should it so happen that all of the units had the 
same resistance as R 1? for instance, then 

7? = ~?i- = — ^ 
SR\ 3 

Knowing the resistance of any unit, it is a simple 
problem to determine the current flowing in that 
branch : 

E 

Again, using a voltmeter and an ammeter, the value 



Units of Measure 37 

of E and I 3 , for example, are quickly found. And 

E 

1*3=1- 

Note that disconnecting any one or two of the re- 
sistance units in parallel or multiple does not open 
the complete circuit ; only the current value increases 
in the remaining branch or branches. 

THE COULOMB 

That quantity of electricity which, when passed 
through a silver nitrate solution, deposits 0.001118 
gram of silver, is termed one coulomb. This definition 
is, perhaps, more easily understood when it is stated: 
a coulomb is the quantity of electricity produced by 
one ampere flowing for one second. 

THE JOULE 

The unit of work is the joule. It is the work done 
per second by one ampere flowing through a circuit 
under a pressure of one volt. In other words, the 
product of the current in amperes, potential differ- 
ence in volts, and the time in seconds, is expressed 
in joules. 

THE WATT 

The watt is the power developed by one joule per 
second, i.e., one volt-ampere. The kilowatt, or 1,000 
watts, is usually employed in commercial measurement 
of power. 

It is interesting to note the several methods of 



38 The Modern Electroplater 

determining the power developed in a circuit. If W 
is taken as the symbol for the watt, then 





W=EI 


But in a 


preceding paragraph it was learned that 




E 




1= 

R 


Hence, 


E E 2 

W=EX- — = 

^ R R 


Or again 


E=IR 


Thus, 


W=IXIR=I 2 R 



This last equation is quite important and is often 
used to determine the power lost in the form of heat 
in a circuit whose resistance is known. 

THE WATT HOUR 

Because the joule is too small a measure of elec- 
trical energy, a larger unit, the watt hour, is em- 
ployed. The kilowatt hour is used commercially in 
the measurement of electric power. The term is self- 
explanatory and requires no definition. 

THE HORSE-POWER 

Power-producing engines or motors are usually 
rated by their horse-power capacity. Mechanically 
the horse-power is equivalent to lifting 550 pounds a 
distance of one foot in one second, or 33,000 foot- 



Units of Measure 39 

pounds per minute. One horse-power is equivalent 
to 746 watts. This conversion factor, 746, is impor- 
tant, since generator capacity is usually expressed in 
kilowatts, and to determine the horse-power of the 
driving unit the conversion factor is employed. 



CHAPTER III 

THE LOCATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF 
THE PLATING ROOM 

Three Factors — The Individual Shop — The Factory Depart- 
ment — General Eequirements — Floor Plan — Generator 
Location — Floor Drainage — Wooden Floor Construction 
— Acid Proof Walls — Ventilation — Illumination — Heat- 
ing. 

THREE FACTORS 

In these days of keen business competition, the 
success of any enterprise depends, in a large measure, 
upon the site of operations, upon efficient equipment, 
and upon contented, loyal employees. The electro- 
plating industry is no exception ; efficient management 
will demand these as prerequisites. The first two 
factors may be discussed here, but the third is a per- 
sonal issue, and therefore not within the province 
of this book. 

THE INDIVIDUAL SHOP 

If an electroplating business is to be successful, the 
shop must be so located that prospective customers 
can reach it without undue effort or expense. It is 
not necessary to secure a site in the congested busi- 
ness section where high rents prevail, but a location 
approximately equidistant from all of the sources 
of trade is advisable. Facilities for handling large 
quantities of commercial work should include, aside 

40 



Analysis of Requirements 41 

from the plating and polishing operations, adequate 
space for storage, packing, and shipping. Again, pro- 
viding for the future, sufficient floor area for business 
expansion should be secured. 

THE FACTORY DEPARTMENT 

Even though the plating room be but a department 
in a large factory, the same attention to its location 
in relation to the other divisions is necessary. Study 
the machining operations which precede the plating 
work; consider the routing of each part that must 
pass through the plating and polishing rooms. For 
instance, if it is observed that the final machining 
operations on the major portion of the factory output 
is that of drilling or counter-sinking holes, endeavor 
to locate the plating and drill-press departments in 
close proximity. Perhaps, on the other hand, it is 
found that most of the small punch press parts pass 
through the plating room before being sent to the 
assembly floor or finished parts storeroom. Should 
these punched parts outnumber the articles coming 
from other departments, then the obvious location for 
the plating division is in the direct path from the 
punch shop to the assembly floor or storeroom. Such 
elimination of trucking saves both expense and pro- 
duction time. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Since it is often quite difficult to prevent leaks in 
the floor, even though it is carefully waterproofed, a 
ground level location is suggested. Good natural 
lighting increases the efficiency of the workmen and 
incidentally prevents eye-strain. A further factor 



42 The Modern Electroplater 

pertaining to the welfare and health of the operator 
is fresh air. If it is not possible to utilize large roof 
ventilators, resort must be had to motor-driven fans 
for the removal of poisonous fumes from the atmos- 
phere. A water, steam, and compressed-air supply- 
should be available, if possible. Further discussion 
of this last point will appear later. 

FLOOR PLAN 

Obviously, it is not possible to present a definite 
floor plan of a plating room equipped to meet all the 
varied requirements of the trade. The plater must 
study his business needs and outline the equipment 
accordingly. A suggested plan, however, is shown in 
Fig. 7. This indicates two nickel tanks, one zinc 
tank, a copper and a brass tank, as well as two plating 
barrels. These latter are used to advantage for plat- 
ing small articles, such as screws, nuts, and washers. 
The tanks are, of course, adapted to larger work. 
Vats for gold and silver plating may replace any of 
those mentioned, or, if necessary, may be added to 
the group. The cleaning and scouring boards are 
centrally located to minimize walking distance. The 
dips are situated across the room from the tanks, so 
what fumes may escape from the ventilating hood 
will not affect the men working at plating. Articles 
removed from the dip may be plunged in the hot 
water, dried in the sawdust, and placed in the oven 
without retracing steps. 

GENERATOR LOCATION 

The generator should be placed as near as con- 
venient to the plating tanks. The essential reason 



intP 










1-1 













! 

o 

M 
S3 

a 



o 
P4 

3 

bo 
a 






\ 







1$ 



43 



44 The Modern Electroplater 

for this is to prevent a drop in potential or voltage 
between the generator and the tank rods. A further 
result of this will be the saving in the cost of the 
heavy copper conductors. Under no circumstances 
should the machine be located in the grinding or 
polishing rooms, unless the bearings and commutator 
are fully protected from the gritty dust which is 
usually floating in the air. Indeed, if space will per- 
mit,, it is advisable to install the generator outside the 
plating room. The acid fumes, even though the wind- 
ings are impregnated, often attack the insulation. It 
must be remembered that the generator requires a 
certain amount of attention if satisfactory results are 
to be obtained; an inaccessible location, such as the 
ceiling, should not be chosen. 



FLOOR DRAINAGE 

Upon the floor construction depends the health of 
the employees; a damp, poorly drained walking sur- 
face is the cause of much discomfort. If possible, a 
concrete surface should be laid with a slight slope 
toward a central tile drain. This concrete surface 
need not be more than five inches thick at the heaviest 
point, nor more than two inches at the drain. If it 
is essential that no moisture leak through any possible 
cracks that may form, further precautions are neces- 
sary. Two layers of a good roofing paper should 
first be laid, the strips of the first layer at right 
angles with those of the second. Several coats of 
asphaltum paint between the layers, as well as upon 
the top surface, are required to make an acid and 
moisture proof seal. 



Floor Construction 



45 



WOODEN FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 

While the concrete work just described may serve 
as a floor surface, much greater satisfaction results 
from the use of an additional wooden platform, such 
as is shown in Fig. 8. Since the tank and vat founda- 
tions rest directly upon the concrete base, it is only 
necessary to provide the superstructure for the spaces 




■^z: 



^^M^^^ 



Sewer 



.Concrete 



-Floor 



Fig. 8. — Cross Section, Showing Floor Construction of Plating 

Room 



between them. These small platforms, such as A, B, 
C, are approximately 5 feet square. The small di- 
mensions are suggested, since the sections may then 
be quickly and easily removed at any time for clean- 
ing or repairing work. The platform is not solid, 
but is constructed of heavy slats, thus allowing spilled 
water or acid to pass through to the concrete base 
where it flows to the drain. The advantage of this 
type of floor is apparent ; it gives the electroplater the 
driest possible walking surface. 



ACID PROOF WALLS 



If it is desired to protect the lower walls of the 
plating room from acid and water stains, a protection 



46 



The Modern Electro plater 



similar to that indicated in Fig. 9 is suggested. This 
consists of a wooden frame-work standing four or five 
feet high and about two inches from the wall. It is 
covered with roofing paper, the lower edge turned with 
the slope of the floor as shown, to throw the acid or 




Fig. 9. — Cross Section, Showing Framework for Protecting 
Wall of Plating Room from Damage by Acid 



water toward the drain. If the framework and the 
dipping or pickling tanks adjoin each other, several 
coats of asphaltum paint are required to serve as a 
further protection against acid. It is a good plan to 
install the air, steam and water pipes behind this 
structure. On the other hand, it is not advisable to 
pass any electrical circuits through the space thus 
provided, since they should be as accessible as possible, 



The Ventilation System 



47 



VENTILATION 

Undoubtedly, there is nothing quite so priceless as 
good health, and the electroplater is cautioned against 
endangering this asset by working in a room filled 
Avith poisonous fumes. Advantage should, of course, 
be taken of natural ventilation through windows and 
roof openings. If possible, the movement of the air 




Fig. 10. — Natural and Forced Ventilation. Hoods are Placed 
Over Tanks A, B, and C. Refer to Fig. 7 



should be accelerated by the use of power-driven fans. 
Over all tanks or vats whose contents give off objec- 
tionable vapors, hoods should be suspended and the 
fumes collected by these hoods drawn off through 
sheet-metal pipes by a ventilating fan. The hoods 
are usually constructed of sheet iron, but wood can 
be used. Several coats of asphaltum or other acid- 
resisting paint should be. applied as a protection from 
chemical action. In the ventilating system shown in 



48 



The Modern Electroplater 



Fig. 10, a hood, A, is placed over the dipping vats, 
one, B, over the copper and brass tanks, and another, 
C, above the plating barrels. The fan and the driving 




Fig. 11. — Exhaust Fan for Forced Ventilation 

(Mott Sand Blast Mfg. Co.) 

motor should be located as near to the outlet as pos- 
sible. Either or both can be suspended from the 
ceiling or secured to wall supports. 



ILLUMINATION 

The electroplater is often so interested in studying 
modern plating methods and so intent upon improv- 
ing the electrical and tank equipment, that a very 
important item escapes his attention. This item is 
proper illumination, without which efficient and per- 
fect work cannot be accomplished. During the sum- 
mer months it is seldom necessary to supplement 
daylight with artificial illumination. For winter, or 
on a foggy, cloudy day, there are many hours when 



Illumination 



49 



the electric light is required. At night, of course, 
artificial illumination is a necessity. 

There is, perhaps, but one suggestion to be made 
on the use of daylight. If the tanks be located so 




Fig. 12. 



-Natural Lighting. Note the Relative Location of 
Tank and Window 



that the cathode rods lie at right angles with the 
plane of the window, it follows that the plater, while 
working, will never stand in a position to cast his 
shadow over the tank. Furthermore, no equipment 



50 



The Modern Electroplater 



should be placed in such position as to screen the 
light or throw a shadow on the plating work. Note, 
in Fig. 12, the correct relative position of tank and 
window. 

With artificial lighting the tank location is not as 
important as the position of the lamps. A quantity 
of correctly spaced lamps of low candle power is 



M 

/ \ 

/A X|/ 



Tank 



Tank 



Fig. 13. — Artificial Lighting, Showing Correct and Incorrect 
Lamp Spacing 



much to be preferred to a single large unit. The latter 
prevents concentration, since the eyes involuntarily 
fix themselves on the bright spot ; moreover, with a 
high candle power lamp, the shadows are denser and, 
therefore, misleading. If it is not possible to suspend 
a light above each tank or bench, the units should 
be equally spaced and hung above the working plane. 
By referring to Fig. 13, the meaning of this will be 
apparent. While the lamp B, hung just above the 
head of the Avorkman, provides little illumination 
for the tanks, C allows light for both tank and floor, 
and also eliminates distracting shadows. A height of 



Heating 51 

12 to 14 feet above the floor is usually found to 
be best. 

HEATING 

Because of the presence of acid vapors in the plat- 
ing room, the air is changed many times a day through 
the use of some type of ventilating system. During 
the cold winter months the heating problem, because 
of the need for the excessive ventilation, is a serious 
one. Obviously the best solution is to add more heat- 
ing units, whether they be steam radiators or stoves. 
Again, if arrangements are made so that the incoming 
cold air is admitted where the fumes are heaviest and 
the exhaust strongest, the remaining part of the room 
is then comparatively free from draughts. 



CHAPTER IV 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR THE 
PLATING ROOM 

Current Supply — The Generator — The Electro-Magnet — The 
Field Magnet — Four Types — Seri es Generator — Shunt 
Generator — Compound Generator — The Separately Ex- 
cited Shunt Generator — The Armature — The Commuta- 
tor — The Armature Winding — The Brushes — The Bear- 
ings — Capacity — Location — Driving Unit — Motor Ca- 
pacity — Motor Speed — Generator Voltage Regulation — ■ 
Generator Field Rheostat — The Ammeter — The Volt- 
meter — The Amperehour Meter — Tank — Rheostat — Two- 
Wire System — Three-Wire System. 

CURRENT SUPPLY 

Modern plating methods do not include the nse of 
the primary battery as the chief source of the electric 




Fig. 14.— 1500 Ampere, 6 Volt Plating Generator 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 
52 



Current Supply 53 

current suppiy ; the more reliable and efficient power- 
driven generator has replaced it. The chemical bat- 
tery, except for quite small shops or for experimental 
work, is no longer considered in the planning of 
plating equipment, and therefore no space will be 
given here to a discussion of the existing types. 

THE GENERATOR 

A well-designed and carefully constructed gener- 
ator is, perhaps, expensive, yet the plater can ill 
afford to purchase a machine which, though cheap, 





■§% " - 


M 




i^, ■ ,-;:^: i ;,- . 




» 1 




*toh1 M 


fe5~-HW 




1 WF 




MESSS£ 







Fig. 15. — Direct Connected 300 Ampere, 6 Volt Plating 
Generator 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 



is fabricated from inferior material and by question- 
able mechanics. Careful consideration should be 
made of the requirements, and these then compared 
with the advertised characteristics of the generators 
on the market. Too much caution cannot be exer- 
cised in making the selection, for upon the uninter- 
rupted service of the machine depends the success of 



54 The Modern Electroplater 

the output. Should the generator fail every plating 
operation must necessarily cease, while the overhead 
expense of the shop continues. It is advisable, there- 
fore, to consider carefully the construction, char- 




Fig. 16. — Double Commutator Generator. Capacity: 750 
Amperes at 6 Volts or 375 Amperes at 12 Volts. 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 



acteristics, and operations of the several types of 
generators. The illustration in Fig. 15 shows a direct 
connected 300 ampere plating generator and that in 
Fig. 16 outlines a double commutator generator for 
large current output. 

THE ELECTRO-MAGNET 

Undoubtedly the best method of approaching a 
description of the generator is to briefly review the 
elementary principles of the electro-magnet. The 
hardened steel horseshoe magnet is a familiar toy to 
all of us. Similar magnetic properties are given to 



The Magnetic Circuit 55 

a soft iron rod, around which a wire, carrying an 
electric current, is w r ound. The polarity of the sole- 
noid or electro-magnet is dependent upon the direc- 
tion of current, and is determined by so grasping the 



> - Conducfoi 









f - ~- 







\N l l l l l l l l l S 



; 4 



Fig. 17. — Electro Magnet, Showing Direction of Current Flow 
in Winding and Resultant Polarity 



coil of wire with the right hand, that the fingers point 
in the direction the current is passing. The north 
pole of the solenoid is then at that end of the rod 
toward which the outstretched thumb, at right angles 
to the fingers, is pointed. This method is known as 
the " right hand rule." Note Fig. 17. 

THE FIELD MAGNET 

The field magnet of a dynamo is quite similar to 
the solenoid just described. A four-pole generator, 
for instance, might be constructed from four electro 
bar magnets, the ends of which have been formed as 
in Fig. 18. The adjacent placing of the like poles 



56 



The Modern Electro plat er 



produces four poles instead of eight. A more con- 
venient and less costly method of construction is em- 
ployed, however, in commercial practice. A circular 




Fig, 18. — Four Solenoids Bent and Placed Together to Form 
a Four Pole -Dynamo Field 



or rectangular iron yoke is provided with poles, the 
wire being wound on the latter, as indicated diagram- 




Fig. 19. — Field Winding and Magnetic Circuit of Dynamo 



matically in Fig. 19. Any number of poles in mul- 
tiple of two may, of course, be provided to agree with 
the design. 



The Generator 57 

FOUR TYPES 

In 'general, there are four types of direct current 
producing dynamos, or more exactly termed gener- 
ators, and these take their names from the method 
of field winding or excitation. These types are: 
Series, shunt, compound, and separately excited 
shunt. 

SERIES GENERATOR 

The stator or field of a series generator has a low 
resistance winding, since the full line current passes 
through it. It is, therefore, usually wound with a 
few turns of heavy copper wire or strip. Since the 



Series Field 




Mai 



Armature 



Main 



Fig. 20. — Connections for Series Generator 

current regulation of a generator is mainly dependent 
upon its field excitation, a variable resistance is placed 
in parallel with the field winding, as shown in the 
conventional diagram, Fig. 20. However, on account 
of the very large current required for plating work, 
the series type generator is seldom specified for such 
use. 



58 The Modern Electroplater 

SHUNT GENERATOR 

As the name implies, the field winding of the 
self-excited shunt type generator is shunted or paral- 
leled with the line circuit. Of necessity, this winding 
must have comparatively high resistance, and there- 
fore a large number of turns of fine wire is wound 



Main 



jArmaiure 




Main 



Fig. 21. — Connections for Shunt Generator 

on the field magnets. To adjust the field current, a 
variable rheostat is connected as indicated in Fig. 21. 
Since so small a percentage of the current output of 
the generator is required to excite the field, the rheo- 
stat need not have the capacity required for the 
series type machine. The shunt generator, when the 
driving speed does not vary, maintains an almost 
constant voltage. It is, therefore, used- for plating 
when the output required is small. 

COMPOUND GENERATOR 

Where plating currents of 2,000 amperes or less 
are required, the compound wound generator usually 
proves most efficient. It retains the desirable features 
of both the shunt and series winding. A shunt wind- 
ing is employed and its terminals connected, through 



The Generator 



59 



a rheostat, to the brushes. Over this is wound a few 
turns of heavy wire or metallic strips, which are 




Series Field 



Armatur 



-> 



Main 



Main 



Fig. 22.— Connections for Compound Generator 

connected in series with the line circuit. Fig. 22 
shows this in conventional form. The voltage regu- 




Fig. 23. — Generator Frame, Showing Field Coils and Position 
of Brush Holders. Compound Wound 



(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 



60 The Modem Electroplater 

lation of this machine is accomplished with less diffi- 
culty than is that of the shunt type. Even though 
the current output varies, as is often the case when 
work is placed in or removed from the tanks, an 
approximately constant voltage is obtained, provided 
the driving speed does not vary. 

THE SEPARATELY EXCITED SHUNT GENERATOR 

Generators, designed and built to deliver a current 
output in excess of 2,000 amperes, are usually of the 
shunt type, the field coils being connected to a sepa- 
rate source of direct current supply. Quite often a 



Main 



Fr om Outsid e Field 
Source 



Rheostat 



\Armature 



nrneosiar 



Main 



Fig. 24. — Connections for Separately Excited Generator 

small generator, driven by the same unit that turns 
the larger machine, is employed. The field excitation 
is regulated in much the same manner as that pre- 
viously described for the shunt generator. Note 
Fig. 24. 

THE ARMATURE 

The armature is that part of the generator which 
rotates within the magnetic area produced by the 
field magnets. No space can be given here to all of 
the interesting fundamental principles involved in 
the production of an e.m.f. Briefly, when a wire is 



The Generator 



61 



passed through a magnetic field so that it cuts the 
lines of force at right angles, an e.m.f. is set up 
between the ends of the wire. Thus, if a wire is 
mounted on a drum, as indicated in Fig. 25, and the 
latter revolved between the field magnets, a current 
flows in the wire or circuit each time it passes a pole 




"-Collector Rings, 
rmature Core 



Voltmeter 

Fig. 25. — Single Conductor, Each End Connected to Individ- 
ual, Insulated Metal Collector Ring 



where it cuts the magnetic flux. If the ends of the 
wire are connected to two simple metallic rings, which 
are insulated from each other and from the shaft, so 
that connections may be made through brushes to a 
two-way voltmeter, a strange thing is noticed. When 
the armature wire passes the north field pole, the 
voltmeter pointer swings in one direction, but quickly 
reverses, passes the zero point, and swings an equal 
distance in the opposite direction as the south pole 
magnet is approached and passed. This voltmeter 
movement clearly indicates that the direction of cur- 
rent flow in the armature coil is dependent upon the 



62 The Modern Electroplater 

polarity of the pole past which the wire is rotated. 
If current pressure readings could be taken for each 
degree of the complete cycle, as indeed they may be 
with special experimental apparatus, the plotted 
e.m.f. curve might appear similar to that shown in 























g 




+■ 








+ 










A 








/ 


\ 








t- A 


/ 








/ 


\ 








>4- 4 
5F 3 


TZ 








IZ 


\ 








<j 
Q- 2 


zz 








zz 


\ 










/ 










\ 








; 


fe— 


10 




































s 




s 




s 




s 








n 


Is 


In 1 


hi 




><* 


Po/e 


\ Po/e / 


Po/e 


\ Po/e / 












/ 






\ 


/ 




0) * 
2 5 








/ 






\ 


/ 












/ 






V 


/ 




















~" 

























Four Po/e 6enerafor 
I-Cycfe -- 



Fig. 26. — No Commutation: Alternating Current 



Fig. 26. For electroplating work, alternating cur- 
rents cannot be employed, since a uni-direction cur- 
rent is necessary to carry the metal ions toward the 
cathode only. A later paragraph will discuss a 
method of securing positive current values. 

In general, the generator armature is constructed 
from an assembly of three units : the shaft, the spider, 
and the core iron. The shaft is, of course, turned 



Commutation 



63 



from high grade steel. Its length and other dimen- 
sions are determined by the design of the generator. 
The core iron is punched from thin sheets of iron 
having special magnetic characteristics. The thin 
laminae are slotted to receive the armature coils, and 
insulated to a certain degree by painting to prevent 
eddy currents in the assembled core. The core iron 
is placed over the machined cast-iron spider, where it 
is bolted tightly in position. In this assembly pre- 
cautions are taken to provide for ventilating ducts 
whose function it is to prevent overheating. The 
spider and core assembly are finally pressed on the 
shaft. 

THE COMMUTATOR 

In plating work, alternating current, such as that 
just described, cannot be used; the current must flow 




VolimzHr 

Fig. 27. — Single Conductor, Each End Connected to Separate, 
Insulated Commutator Segment 



64 



The Modern Electroplater 



in one direction only. Thus, instead of slip rings 
for collecting the current, a device to commutate or 
change the current direction at the moment it is about 
to become negative in value is employed. A commu- 




Fig. 28. — The Effect of Commutation is to Produce Direct 
Current 



tator for a single circuit, as shown in Fig. 27, would 
be in but two sections, thus allowing the brushes to 
interchange their connections with the rings at the 
points where reversals of current are about to take 
place. The addition of a commutator changes the 
e.m.f. curve of Fig. 26, so that only positive values 
are given as in Fig. 28. 

Obviously, the e.m.f. generated by a single wire is 
insufficient for practical purposes. Hence, the mod- 
ern dynamo has an armature wound with a great 
many wires. A large number of such active wires 



Commutation 



65 



are so connected that their voltages are accumulative. 
Again, since the wires are evenly distributed about 
the drum, or armature core, the commutator is con- 
structed of many segments which are connected to 
the winding at regular intervals. This allows an 




Fig. 29. — Commutator Assembly 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 



almost constant voltage across the brushes, ironing 
out, so to speak, the humps in the curve of Fig. 28, 
and giving an approximately straight, horizontal 
voltage line. 

The commutator is usually built up of especially 
formed copper segments, insulated from each other 
by mica pieces. The mica and copper segments are 
held rigidly together by heavy iron flanges pressed 
in position. This construction is shown in Fig. 29. 



66 The Modem Electroplater 

THE ARMATURE WINDING 

The armature conductors are usually formed of 
heavy copper strip insulated with a cotton covering. 
There are several types of windings used for gen- 
erators, and for a further discussion the reader is 




Fig. 30. — Brush Rigging and Armature Assembly 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

referred to the many available texts on dynamo de- 
sign. Before the windings are placed in the slots, 
the latter are usually insulated with cloth and paper 
vof high electric strength. Often wooden or fiber 
slot wedges are used to securely lock the coils, pre- 
venting their movement when the armature revolves. 



Brush Mechanism 



67 



THE BRUSHES 



There are as many brushes as poles, and in prac- 
tice they are usually set slightly in advance of the 




Fig. 31.— Brush Holder and Brush 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

latter. Specially designed brush holders, similar to 
that shown in Fig. 31 are provided. Because of the 
low voltage required in plating work, low resistance 




Fig. 32. — Woven Wire Brush for Plating Generators. 
(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

brushes are essential. Carbon has a high resistance, 
and is therefore not a suitable material for such 
brushes. Metallic composition brushes, however, of 



68 



The Modern Electroplater 



which there are several types on the market, appear 
to give excellent results. A typical woven wire brush 
for plating generators is shown in Fig. 32. 

THE BEARINGS 

Most modern generators are equipped with bronze 
or other non-frictional metal bearings. Lubrication 
is effected by means of oil rings revolving on the 
shaft, the lower section of the rings being suspended 
in oil. Ball bearings are often used on small ma- 
chines with success. 

CAPACITY 

Generator manufacturers are usually glad to con- 
sider the particular requirements of the plater, and 
to offer suggestions concerning the capacity and type 
of machine required to meet his needs. It, of course, 

HP %Eff. 
50 100 

45 90 

40 80 

35 70 

30 60 

25 50 

20 40 

15 30 

10 20 

5 10 











-ft 
ft 

to 








■X3 








■53 








"■a 

§ 






y 


tfS 


1 






















l 










7 


# 


















































„»- 


TuTenoj 












A 


5 
























s' 


V 


i <■• 






\>/ 


K 
























/ 


















n« 


vy* 


r 






















/ 


















ti 




4' 


* 
























/ 




Line- 


Voltaqe 




























/ 




















/ 




























1 














































1 
















































/ 














































1 
















































/ 
















































/ 
















































/ 
















































































































































/ 

































































































Amp 


Volt 


5000 


- 


4500 


- 


4000 


- 


3500 


7 


3000 


6 


2500 


5 


2000 


4 


1500 


3 


1000 


2 


500 


1 









12 



24 



30 



Output in Kilowatts 

Fig. 33. — Performance Curve of 24K.W. Generator: 6 Volts, 
4000 Amperes, 700 r.p.m. 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 



Generator Location 69 

must be remembered that there is no economy in pur- 
chasing a generator to care for only the present de- 
mand. An extra tank or two may be required in 
the near future to meet business expansion, and the 
increase in first cost for the larger machine capacity 
will then be fully repaid. A performance curve of 
a 24K.W. generator is given in Fig. 33 to show effi- 
ciency at various outputs. 

LOCATION" 

As soon as the new generator is uncrated, a detailed 
examination should be made to discover what damage, 
if any, was caused during transit. Should all parts 
prove to be in perfect mechanical condition, place the 
generator upon the foundation previously prepared 
for it, bolting it down securely. If the machine is 
large, the foundation should be of concrete. Small 
generators may be supported on bridge work above 
the heads of the workmen. As has been previously 
stated, it is best to locate the generator and driving 
unit outside the plating and polishing rooms. Quite 
often a convenient space is found in a store room, 
office, or passageway adjoining the plating room. 
Because of the low potential and the cost of copper 
conductors, the generator should not be located more 
than fifteen or twenty feet from the tanks. All mo- 
tors and generators installed in the plating room 
should have their windings protected from the acid 
fumes by treatment with an impregnating compound. 

DRIVING UNIT 

The generator may be belted to an engine, a power 
line shaft driving other machines, or an individual 



70 The Modem Electroplater 

motor. Except in isolated shops, electric power is 
now available, and engine drive requiring additional 
attention is becoming unpopular. There are many 
occasions when the generator is the only machine re- 
quiring power. At such times the long line shafting 
and belting to other machines must be in motion, 




Fig. 34. — A Three Phase Alternating Current Motor. 

(Wagner Electric Mfg. Co.) 

with resulting friction losses and waste of power. 
The modern electric motor requires little attention, 
is efficient, easily controlled, and may be maintained 
at slight cost. Obviously, then, individual motor drive 
should be chosen by the electroplater. A three phase 
alternating current motor, suitable for plating shop 
power, is illustrated in Fig. 34. 

MOTOR CAPACITY 

The size and speed of the driving motor for any 
generator may be quickly calculated. It is remem- 



The Driving Unit 71 

bered, from an earlier discussion, that the output of 
a direct current generator is measured in watts, the 
product of amperes and volts. Should this product 
in watts be divided by the conversion factor 746, the 
result is then expressed in horse-power. Suppose, for 
instance, it is desired to ascertain the motor capacity 
required to drive a generator whose name-plate indi- 
cates it is capable of a delivery of 1,500 amperes at 
6 volts pressure. Thus the generator output is 9,000 
watts, or, divided by 746, 12.06 h.p. But to choose 
the driving unit some account must be taken of the 
electrical and mechanical losses in the generator, 
counter shaft, and belts. A very safe estimate of 
the losses would be 25% of the generator capacity. 
Thus the driving unit must develop 15.07 h.p. A 
standard 15 h.p. motor would, accordingly, be 
specified. 

MOTOR SPEED 

Any motor speed can be selected, provided the 
pulleys on the counter shaft and generator are of 
such diameter as to drive the latter at the speed 
marked on the name-plate. It must be well under- 
stood that the generator speed cannot vary. Should 
speed indicator readings show any considerable vari- 
ations, efficient plating work cannot be expected. If 
the driving unit is to be a direct current machine, 
it should be a shunt wound, as this type operates at 
a constant speed. Before starting up the motor, ex- 
amination should be made to insure that the connec- 
tions are such that the generator armature revolves 
in the correct direction ; that is, the commutator turn- 
ing away from the brushes. 



72 The Modern Electroplater 

GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATION 

Voltage regulation is of the utmost importance in 
electro-deposition; an unchanging current flow of 
known value allows the plater to correctly determine 
the length of time required to produce a given de- 
posit before the work is placed in the tanks. While 
the current flow is regulated at each tank by indi- 
vidual rheostats, it is nevertheless advisable to main- 
tain a constant and normal line pressure. The ter- 
minal voltage of a generator depends upon the speed 
at which it is driven as well as the field excitation. 
Since the speed seldom varies, the true voltage must 
be held constant by increasing or decreasing the gen- 
erator field excitation. This is easily accomplished 
by decreasing or increasing the resistance of the field 
circuit through the aid of a rheostat. The usual rheo- 
stat connections can be seen in the conventional 
diagrams, Figs. 20, 21, 22 and 24. 

GENERATOR FIELD RHEOSTAT 

A rheostat is a simple device so arranged that, by 
manipulating a handle, electrical contact is made 
with any division of a number of series-connected 
resistance units. These resistance units may be spe- 
cial alloy metal ribbons, or of wire wound on bobbins. 
A field rheostat is often subjected to heat from the 
resistance units, and the insulation is therefore usually 
of fireproof material. 

THE AMMETER 

Efficient work of any nature can only be accom- 
plished when the workman is dealing with known 



Measuring Instru m e n ts 



73 



quantities. For this reason the plater produces better 
results when he knows definitely the current passing 
through any tank. An ammeter is used for this pur- 
pose. There are several types available for use with 
direct current, but the so-called D'Arsonval galva- 
nometer construction is most generally employed. A 
pivoted bobbin of wire is held between the poles of 




Fig. 35. — Ammeter 



a permanent magnet. A light pointer is fastened to 
the bobbin in such manner that, when the latter is 
deflected by the magnet, the free end of the former 
swings over a divided scale. The scale divisions are 
calibrated to represent amperes, and the value of the 
current flowing in the bobbin winding is indicated by 
the deflection of the needle. An instrument of this 
nature is shown in Fig. 35. 

The windings of the ammeter coils cannot carry the 
heavy line current required for plating work. An 



74 The Modern Electro plater 

ammeter shunt, of known resistance, is therefore used ; 
this allows only a known small percentage of the line 
current to pass through the meter. The ammeter 
scale is, however, calibrated to show the total amperes 
flowing through the external shunt and meter coil 
combined. When the meter has once been calibrated, 
the same shunt must always be used ; otherwise a new 




Fig. 36. — External Shunt for Ammeter 

, (Wagner Electric Mfg. Co.) 

calibration must be made with another accurate in- 
strument as a standard. Ammeter shunts and leads 
are furnished with the instrument, the latter being 
considered as a part of the meter circuit. External 
shunts are furnished only where large currents are 
to be measured; instruments for currents of small 
value are equipped with a shunt in the ammeter 
case. A typical ammeter shunt for use in the external 
circuit is shown in Fig. 36. 

THE VOLTMETER 

A voltmeter is an instrument employed to indicate 
the current pressure. In construction it is quite 
similar to the ammeter with the exception that the 



Measuring Instruments 



75 



internal resistence is high instead of low. Hence the 
voltmeter may be connected directly across the line 
yet the current passing through it is practically negli- 
gible. A single voltmeter may be employed to indi- 




Fig. 37. — Voltmeter with Connections for Serving Six Tanks 

cate the potential difference of several tanks provided 
the required connections are made by the aid of 
switches. Such an arrangement is shown in Fig. 42, 
where one voltmeter is connected to serve six tanks. 



THE AMPEREHOUR METER 

In the past, the usual method of determining the 
weight of metal deposited on the articles undergoing 
electroplating was to note the lapse of time and the 



76 The Modern Electroplater 

average current flow. The product of these two, or 
the ampere hours, might then be used to calculate the 
quantity of metal deposited. Competition and the 
rising cost of materials have made it necessary to 




Tig. 38.— Amperehour Meter for Controlling Electroplating 
Operations 

(Sangarao Electric Co.) 



eliminate waste in the deposition of metals. The use 
of the amperehour meter allows the plater to deposit 
only the predetermined amount of metal. The con- 
trol of plating operations, with an instrument such 
as that illustrated in Fig. 38, is briefly explained 
lay the manufacturer as follows : 



Measuring Instruments 



77 



"The standard meter has a dial reading in airy 
desired unit weights of the metal with which the 
meter is to be used; for example, dwt. of silver, 
grains of gold, pounds of copper, etc. The meter is 
equipped with a movable pointer, operated by a knob 
in the middle of the glass window over the dial, so 
that the pointer can be set at the amount of metal 
desired for any particular plating operation. For 



m 



O Signal Bell 



I Generator 



Negative 



Cathode 



Anode 



Positive 



Plating Tanl> 



Fig. 39. — Connections for Amperehour Meter 



example, if twelve dozen spoons were to be silver- 
plated and required 100 dwt. of silver, the indicating 
pointer would be set at 100 on the dial, after which 
the large moving hand, operated by the mechanism 
of the meter, would be set at the zero point. As the 
current passes through the meter, the large hand 
moves in a clockwise direction around the dial until 
it reaches the pointer, in this case set at 100 dwt., 
when contact is made against a pin in the adjustable 
pointer, thus operating through auxiliary leads to an 
electric light or bell, as a signal." The external con- 
nections for the amperehour meter are shown in 
Fig. 39 and can be easily understood. 



78 



The Modem Electroplater 



TANK RHEOSTAT 

As was explained in Chapter II, the quantity of 
current flowing in any one of a number of parallel 
circuits is dependent upon the resistance of that 




Fig. 40. — Tank Rheostat: Knife Switch Type 

branch. This condition is duplicated in the case of 
a number of multiple-connected plating tanks pre- 




Fig. 41. — Twelve Spring Dial Type Rheostat 





1 



^ 



m 







11 



bo 



79 



80 The Modem Electroplater 

senting various resistances to the flow of current. It 
is obviously impossible to place equal quantities of 
work in each tank to balance the resistances. A 
rheostat may be furnished, however, for each tank 
which, being connected in series with it, serves to 
regulate the voltage and thereby the current. Figs. 
40 and 41 indicate types of tank rheostats so arranged 
that the e.m.f. can be regulated to a fraction of a 
volt. 

TWO WIRE SYSTEM 

The most simple method of forming connections 
for the plating tank is indicated in Fig 42. This 
might be termed a two- wire system. Only two supply 
wires, or bus bars, positive and negative, are pro- 
vided. 

THREE WIRE SYSTEM 

In recent years the three wire, or multiple voltage, 
system of distribution has come into favor. The 
standard plating dynamo is usually wound to produce 
a current pressure of six volts. There are many 
classes of work, however, which require voltages some- 
what above six. In response to the demand for 
greater flexibility, specially designed, two commuta- 
tor, double voltage generators are available. When 
wired, as shown in the diagram, Fig. 43, with neu- 
tral, positive, and negative supply lines, any voltages 
up to 12 are obtainable. For the usual run of work 
the 6-volt current is employed; when higher voltages 
are desired, the switch is thrown to the 12-volt supply 
line. Tank rheostats regulate the intermediate volt- 
ages. This system is particularly useful where high 
voltage barrel plating is employed part of the time. 




ft 

S3 

O 

9 



SI 



CHAPTER V 
ELECTROPLATING TANK EQUIPMENT 

Tank Capacity — Three-Types of Plating Tanks — Still Tanks 
— Earthenware Tanks — Steel Tanks — Wooden Tanks* — 
Tank Construction — Advantage of Warm Plating Baths 
— Steam Coil Heater — Insulating Joint — Eegulating 
Valve — Solution Agitation — Agitation with Air — Tank 
Eods — Plumbing — Eotating Plating Barrels — Automatic 
Plating Machinery — Automatic Moving Tank — Principal 
Advantages — General Design — Other Types — Tanks for 
Preparatory Processes — Pickling Tanks — Bright Dip- 
ping Tanks — Special Ventilating Hoods — Lye and Potash 
Tanks — Hot Water Tanks — ScouriDg Tanks. 

TANK CAPACITY 

Plating-room efficiency is, in a large measure^ de- 
pendent upon the size, type, and location of the solu- 
tion tanks. A study of the type of work required and 
the daily production necessary to maintain the de- 
sired schedule, Avill provide a basis for an estimate 
of the necessary tank capacity. It is better to have 
a portion of an extra tank idle than to crowd a few 
with work. A safety margin providing for equip- 
ment breakdowns is well worth the added investment. 

THREE TYPES OF PLATING TANKS 

There are three main types of plating tanks. The 
most important and generally used type is the still 
tank which is merely a steel, earthenware, or wood 
vat in which neither the solution, anodes, or cathodes 

82 



The Still Tank 83 

move during the plating process. Small articles in 
quantities may be quickly plated in the second type, 
a rotating barrel. There are several kinds of these 
mechanical plating tanks, but in all cases the articles 
tumble over each other as the deposition process con- 
tinues. The third general type is the automatic plat- 
ing machine. Usually, with this device, the work is 
cleaned, plated, washed and dried without any as- 
sistance from the operator. A more detailed descrip- 
tion of these general types will be considered in the 
following paragraphs. 

STILL TANKS 

Vats or tanks for electrolytic or other solutions, 
are constructed of earthenware, metal, or wood. In 
capacity they usually range from four <?allons up- 
ward. 

EARTHENWARE TANKS 

Because earthenware tanks are somewhat fragile, 
they are not often used where another type can be 
substituted. They are, however, especially useful for 
holding acid and cyanide solutions. Hydrofluoric 
acid, since it attacks clay compositions, cannot be 
used in an earthenware tank. Stoneware vats may 
be used with all solutions except hot sulphuric acid 
and hydrofluoric acid. If proper care is exercised 
to see that they do not crack, these tanks will last 
indefinitely, there being no appreciable disintegra- 
tion. 

STEEL TANKS 

Steel tanks are available in many forms. The 
welded steel container presents the besl appearance, 



84 The Modern Electroplater 

since there are no seams or rivets visible. Usually 
the seams are closed by oxy- acetylene welding, the 
material thus added increasing the strength of the 
metal bond. Riveted and caulked joints also give 
good service but the possibility of leakage is always 
present. Boiler steel, approximately % 6 inch in 
thickness, is used in the construction of the average 
steel vat. Unlined, they make excellent containers 
for hot water, lye, potash, and cyanide solutions. 







Fig. 44. — Electric Welded or Steel Riveted Tank 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

When the inside surface is prepared with an acid- 
proof paint or asphaltum, they may be utilized for 
plating tanks. Enamel-lined iron containers are es- 
pecially recommended for cyanide solutions, gold and 
silver electrolytes, lacquers, and other non-acid solu- 
tions. The enamel lining, however, chips easily if 
struck a sharp blow. An electrically welded tank with 
riveted top is shown in Fig. 44 and a chemically 
enamelled iron tank is depicted in Fig. 45. 



The Still Tank 



85 



WOODEN TANKS 

Most popular of all type?, is the wooden tank. In- 
expensive and easily constructed, it always finds 
favor in the plating room. Such containers may be 
purchased, made to dimensions desired by the electro- 
plater. When an asphaltum or other lining is speci- 




Fig. 45. — Chemically Enameled Iron Tank for Gold, Silver, 
Cyanide Solutions, and Lacquers 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

tied, it is usually applied after the delivery of the 
tank, since the continuous jarring during transit 
cracks a lining applied at the factory. Lead-lined 
tanks are more serviceable; but the added expense 
often causes the prospective purchaser to choose the 
cheaper painted coating. 

The wooden tank is by no means difficult to con- 
struct, although a certain knowledge of wood working 
is, of course, essential. There is a satisfaction in 
building one's own equipment, aside from the ma- 
terial saving in the cost. 



86 



The Modern Electroplater 



TANK CONSTRUCTION 



Although the tank may be built in any desired di- 
mensions, in general it should be about twice as long 
and nearly as high as it is wide. For instance, 7 




Fig. 46. — To Obtain a Tight Fit the Edges of the Boards 
Should Be Grooved 



feet long, Sy 2 feet wide and 3 feet high gives a well- 
proportioned tank for fairly large work. 

If possible, kiln-dried cypress lumber should be 
secured, 2 inches thick and 10 to 12 inches wide. 
After deciding what are to be the dimensions, the 



j 1 
! i 

i i 
1 i 






FVH 





Section 
A A-A. 

Fig. 47. — End Boards Assembled, Showing Grooving for 
Bottom Pieces 



The Still Tank 



87 



two end-board assemblies should be constructed, the 
edges of the boards being grooved, as shown in Fig. 
46, so that they fit together tightly. Temporary 
cleats may be nailed across the boards to hold them 
together until the final set up. Two inches from the 
bottom edge of each of the end-board assemblies, a 
groove, % inch deep and as wide as the thickness of 
the lumber to be used for the tank bottom, is cut, 



B— 



,1 



sMUl Cross Section 
B-B 

Fig. 48. — Side Boards Assembled and Grooved to Match 
Bottom and End Pieces 



as indicated in Fig. 47. In cutting all the grooves 
necessary in constructing this tank, the greatest care 
must be exercised to produce a neat, tight fit. A 
loose joint necessarily causes leaks. 

In a similar manner two side-board assemblies are 
made ready. By referring to Fig. 48, it is seen that 
three grooves are cut, one for each end piece, and one 
for the bottom boards. Each groove is cut 2 inches 



88 



The Modern Electroplater 



from the end or edge of the boards, as the case may 
be. 

As soon as the bottom boards are cut to correct 
length and matched together, the general assembly 
is made. Thoroughly treat all grooves with the acid- 
proof paint prior to this final operation. If the sev- 
eral pieces match perfectly, arrange to hold them 
securely in place with several steel tie rods. 

For a tank of average size, four tie bolts at each 
end and seven along the bottom are sufficient. If the 



■#■ 



,T 



U 



i 



Fig. 49. — Front and Side Views of Wooden Plating Tank. 

Note That the Bottom and Sides are Matched Into 

Each Other 



tank is to be lead-lined, the number may be decreased. 
The bolts are made of % inch diameter steel rods cut 
to the correct length and threaded at each end. For 
the bottom bolts, iron washers may be placed next to 
the wood, but for the end rods iron plates are pro- 
vided, one inch wide, % inch thick, and of sufficient 
length to span all of the side boards. Holes are 
drilled in these plates through which the tie rods or 
bolts may pass. Tighten all the nuts to the greatest 
possible extent without stripping the threads. This 
will draw all joints together. If it is seen that the 



The Still Tank 



89 



several boards, when assembled for the side and end 
pieces, do not match perfectly, or have a tendency to 
separate, further precautions must be taken. Bore 
i^-inch holes through the several boards at right 
angles to their length and parallel to their width. 
Tie bolts passed through the boards can then be used 
to draw them together. The letter T denotes these 
special bolts in the illustrations in Fig. 49, which 




- Wood Si rip used fo re fair 
the lining while if is soft 



Fig. 50. — Method of Pouring Tank Lining 



shows front and side views of a conventional wooden 
plating tank. 

Lining the tank with lead sheeting is difficult, and 
an inexperienced workman will not find it easy work 
to fuse together the seams. An asphaltum, or other 
prepared tank lining, can be applied with much 
greater success and at less expense. First paint the 



90 The Modern Electroplater 

inside tank surface with a thin coating of the pre- 
pared lining. As soon as it is dry, spread over this 
painted portion a coarse grade of cheese cloth, tack- 
ing it down at several points to insure a smooth sur- 
face. Several heavy coats of the lining material are 
then painted over the cloth, the latter acting as a 
reinforcement to prevent cracking or flaking of the 
prepared surface after it is dry. Time should, of 
course, be given between paint applications to allow 
the previous coating to harden. 

Another method of lining the tank which is quite 
satisfactory might also be suggested. Lay the tank 
on its side. Tack a strip of wood along the outer 
edge of the downward side, as is indicated in 
Fig. 50. Using a carpenter's level, adjust the tank 
with great care so that the downward side is 
perfectly level. When all is thus prepared, pour 
in the lining material until it settles over the surface 
to the desired depth. As soon as the poured surface 
is hard, turn the tank to the opposite side and repeat 
the process. When all four sides are treated, turn 
the tank right side up and pour in a slightly heavier 
layer for the bottom. Prepared tank lining material 
is often inflammable, and it is therefore best to heat 
or mix it in the open air or where there is no fire 
hazard. 

ADVANTAGE OF WARM PLATING BATHS 

One of the many puzzling phenomena is that the 
resistance to the flow of current through a metallic 
conductor increases with the rise in temperature of 
that conductor, while just the opposite is true in the 
action of plating solutions. An increase in the tern- 



Heating Devices 



91 



perature of the electrolyte results in a decrease in 
electrical resistance. It is therefore seen that it is 
to the advantage of the plater to use warm solutions. 
During' the summer months artificial heat is not re- 
quired, but on cold winter days the temperature of 
the plating bath must be maintained constant and 
above 50° F., if satisfactory work is to be expected. 

STEAM COIL HEATER 

A steam coil laid on the bottom of the tank or, as 
indicated in Fig. 51, at one end, is sufficient to heat 
the solution. The last mentioned U-shaped coil is 
perhaps the most simple to construct. A one-inch 



Sham 
Supply 




Fig. 51. — Steam, Passing Through a Lead Pipe Submerged in 
the Electrolyte, Supplies the Required Heat 



lead pipe is cut to the correct length and formed to 
fit the tank. Each end is connected with an insulat- 
ing steam joint or coupling. 



92 



The Modern Electroplater 



INSULATING JOINT 



Insulating joints are required to prevent the leak- 
age of electric current from the tank circuit through 



:Mttah- 




Fig. 52. — Insulating Joint or Coupling for Steam or Air 

Pipes. Used to Prevent Leakage of Electric Current 

Through Piping System 

the piping system. A cross section of such a joint is 
shown in Fig. 52. They can be purchased in sizes 
ranging from % to 1% inch with standard threads. 

REGULATING VALVE 

For convenience in regulating the temperature, a 
steam pressure adjusting valve should be inserted on 
the inlet side of the steam coil. 



SOLUTION AGITATION 

During the process of plating, tiny gas bubbles 
form on the anodes. The effect of these bubbles is 
to decrease the active area of the positive plate, 
thereby increasing the resistance to the flow of cur- 
rent to the electrolyte. Unless the bubbles are re- 
moved by some exterior means, a more concentrated 
plating solution must be used to counteract the detri- 
mental effect of the small anode area. Solution a°*i- 



Agitation Devices 



93 



tation is, therefore, often employed, with the result 
that a fine, close-grained deposit is obtained with a 
low current density. 

AGITATION WITH AIR 

While mechanical agitation is, perhaps, the most 
effective method available for tank work, the special 
machinery is not only expensive but it often utilizes 
valuable space. On the other hand, compressed air 
agitation is simple and the system may be constructed 



iVcr/ve 



AirSupply 



^-Insulating Coupling 




Fig. 53. — Cross Section of Plating Tank, Showing Agitation 

of Solution by Bubbles of Compressed Air Released 

From Perforations in Lead Pipe Laying 

on Bottom of Tank 



and installed in a few hours time. Compressed air 
is available in most shops of average size, and cer- 
tainly if the plating room is a department of an 
industrial plant. It is only necessary to drill a large 
number of small holes in a length of one-inch lead 
pipe, sealed at one end. This pipe is then laid along 
the center line of the bottom of the tank, as shown 
in Fig. 53, the free end passing up over the tank edge 
where it is connected, through an insulating joint and 



94 The Modem Electroplater 

regulating valve, to the air supply. The tiny bubbles 
of escaped air pass upward through the solution, 
effectively agitating it. 

TANK RODS 

While installing the heating coils and agitation 
system, it is well to keep in mind the location of the 
bus bars or tank rods for the anodes and the plating 
work. When the tank is used almost exclusively for 
plating large articles, one cathode rod is placed along 



Centra/ 

Wood Support 



Anode Rods- 
Cathode Rod 




Fig. 54.— Wood Insulators for Anode and Cathode Rods Used 
With Metal Tank 

the center line of the tank with an anode rod on 
either side. The cathode should always be provided 
with an anode on each side to equalize the plating 
action. Thus, if two cathode bars are placed to a 
tank, there should be three anode rods, and so on. 
If the plating tanks are constructed of metal or of 
wood lined with lead, it is necessary to provide an 
insulator, such as a block of wood, to prevent the rods 



Tank Connections 95 

coming in contact with the metal. Such a provision 
is shown in Fig. 54. The anode and cathode rods 
must not only be of sufficient size to carry the heavy 
plating current, but to support as well the weight 
hung upon them. A copper rod can safely carry the 




Fig. 55. — End of Anode or Cathode Tube Flattened and 

Drilled to Make Electrical Connection by Bolting 

to Supply Bus Bar 

current but not the weight; a thin brass tube may 
carry the weight, but its capacity as an electrical con- 
ductor may be below the particular requirements. As 
a general rule, a brass or copper tube with a wall of 
liberal thickness answers most requirements. The 
plater should, of course, consult a table of values and 
sizes before making the installation. 

Since low voltage is necessary for plating work, 
the greatest care must always be exercised to see that 
every electrical connection is perfect. There are few 
such connections which can be soldered, and bolting 
is, therefore, relied upon to make a tight contact. 
To assist in making these connections, each anode and 
cathode rod or tube is flattened at the connector end, 
and drilled to match the bolt hole in the bus bar. 



96 The Modern Electroplater 

Note Fig. 55. The electrical connections and dis- 
tributing systems are described in another chapter. 

PLUMBING 

As soon as the various plating tanks are placed 
in a permanent position, the plumbing should be so 
arranged that each container is provided with a 
faucet directly over it, thus allowing the plater to 
fill the tank with water without effort or inconven- 
ience. 




Fig. 56. — Stringing the Work for the Still Tank. This Method 
is Slow and Tedious 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

ROTATING PLATING BARRELS 

As has already been intimated, the quickest and 
cheapest method of plating large quantities of small 



The Plating Barrel 97 

articles is the mechanical rotating barrel. In appear- 
ance it is not nnlike the familiar tumbler used in 
cleaning metal castings or tarnished punchings. A 
metal plate, fastened to the inside bottom of the 



Fig. 57. — Modern Methods Permit Quantity Production. 

Loading a Plating Barrel With Small Work. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

barrel, is connected, through a collector ring on the 
outside bottom, to a brush contact with the negative 
bus bar. The anode is suspended from a steel arm 
and is stationary, while the barrel rotates. Articles 
placed in the barrel make electrical contact with the 
negative base plate and, as they tumble over each 



98 



The Modern Electroplate?' 



other, the plating process continues. This tumbling 
action insures a uniform deposit of metal upon each 
article. One of the great advantages of this type of 




Fig. 58. — Tilting Type Rotary Plating Barrel Showing 
Position of Anode 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 



plating tank is that any piece of work can be con- 
veniently removed for inspection without stopping 
the machine. The entire batch of work is removed 



The Rotating Tank 



99 




Fig. 59.— Rotating Plating Tank: Container Raised for 

Refilling 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 



100 The Modern Electroplater 

by scooping or by dumping. Fig. 58 illustrates this 
modern plating barrel. 




Fig. 60. — View of Rotating Plating Tank Showing Position 
of Anodes and Container During the Deposition Process 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

Another type of rotary plating tank is so designed 
that the articles are "tumbled" in a horizontal per- 
forated cylinder revolving beneath the surface of 
the electrolyte. To load or unload the cylinder, it 



The Rotating Tank 101 

is necessary to hoist it above the surface of the solu- 
tion, when the cover plate can he removed. Better 
results can usually be obtained if curved anodes are 
used, thus providing an anode surface below the cyl- 
inder as well as at the sides. The cathode connection 
to the article is formed by a contact with metal pen- 




Tig. 61. — Oblique Plating Barrel. This Type Is Quite as 

Efficient as the Horizontal Machine and May Be 

Employed for Smaller Quantities of Work. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

dants suspended from the metal axis of the cylinder. 
This axis is, of course, connected to the negative bus 
bar. The cylinder is constructed of a non-metallie 
substance, such as bakelite, and is thus not affected 
by the plating currents. The barrel type machine 
is also designed as shown in Fig. 61. 

In operating any of these barrel-type plating ma- 



102 The Modern Electro plater 

chines it must be remembered that they are quite 
similar to the still tank as far as the deposition pro- 
cess is concerned. The speed of rotation must be 
slow, fifteen to twenty r.p.m. being sufficient. No 
good and much harm will result if the barrel is op- 
erated at a higher speed. 

AUTOMATIC PLATING MACHINERY 

The trend of the industrial world is toward the 
use of automatic machinery. While electroplating 
requires, perhaps, more of the human element than 
most forms of industry, progressive manufacturers 
have placed upon the market machinery designed to 
increase production with a corresponding decrease in 
labor and time. Various types of plating machines are 
illustrated ; a typical automatic installation is outlined 
in Fig. 62. 

Perhaps the most simple type operates as a con- 
veyer, the article passing through the solution in a 
definite time at a rate of speed determined by the 
length of time required to deposit the metal coating. 
So important is the use of the automatic-moving tank 
in modern electroplating, that a detailed description 
is necessary. Through the courtesy of the Crown 
Rheostat and Supply Company, it is possible to give 
the following excellent comparison between still and 
automatic-moving tank methods. 

AUTOMATIC MOVING TANK 

"In considering the electrical deposition of metal 
in the old style plating tank, it is found necessary 
to use a comparatively low ampere per square foot 
of cathode surface and a low voltage. This is due 



Automatic Plating Machinery 103 

to the fact that in the act of electroplating, hydrogen 
gas bubbles form on the cathode and if a higher cur- 
rent were used, the work would burn or become rough. 
This necessity for a low current therefore causes a 
much slower deposit to take place than could be ob- 
tained if the hydrogen bubbles could be eliminated 
in some way. 

By the use of a moving apparatus to convey the 
articles through the tank as they are being plated, 




Fig. 62. — General View of Automatic Moving Plating Tank 

this and many other defects can not only be removed, 
but new and favorable conditions created. 

The act of moving the cathode through the solu- 
tion, frees the hydrogen bubbles from the material 
and a higher current can therefore be used without 
burning the surface. The result is a much quicker 
and denser deposit. 

Another condition encountered in still tank prac- 
tice, is that it requires a good deal of judgment and 
care on the part of the plater, in order to leave all 
of the material in the tank the same length of time, 



104 The Modem Electroplater 

and to secure uniform work, even under favorable 
condil tons. 

Aiter the proper length of time is determined for 
plating, it will require no careful watching or judg- 
ment as to how long cadi piece is left in the moving 
tank as the pieces musl remain in the same length of 
time. They are placed on racks which are hung on 
the conveyor chain, and when they have made the 
circuit of the tank and come back to the starting-point, 
they are removed by the operator. This results in a 
deposit of uniform thickness on all the articles. 

In the still tank, it is seldom found that all the 
conditions in the tank are perfect. Some of the 
anodes, for instance, will secure a better electrical 
conlact owing to the condition of tin 4 surface of the 
anode hook or to dirty contacts on some of them, or 
to corrosion or dirt on the anode-contact bar. Other 
anodes become foul and must be frequently cleaned 
or they will wear away unevenly. Under these con- 
ditions, no matter how skillful the plater is, it is 
almost impossible to secure uniform, even work, be- 
cause material placed near the active anodes will 
plate faster than that which is placed near sluggish 
or inactive anodes. 

On the other hand, with the automatic-moving 
apparatus tank, the anodes cannot get foul owing 
to the agitation of the solution, and if some of them 
dissolve or wear away, more than others, due to poor 
contacts, it will not affect tin 1 uniformity of the work 
because each article will pass all of the anodes, both 
good and bad. and each piece will have the same 
exposure as all the other pieces. 

Another point with the still tank which is seldom 



Automatic Plat i tig Machinery 105 

realized, is the fact that the solution in immediate 
contad with the cathode (article being plated) be- 
comes impoverished of metal after a very few min- 
utes, and the molecules of metal having to be carried 
from an increasing distance as the plating progresses, 
the amount of deposit taking place is diminishing on 




Fig. 63.— View of Automatic Plating Tank, Showing Driving 
Worm Gear and Copper Hooks 



an increasing scale. On articles having recesses, this 
is particularly noticeable as the solution in the re- 
cesses soon becomes impoverished, and after that the 
molecules of metal are only deposited on the high 
spots or places nearest their line of travel. 

"With the moving apparatus tank, however, rich 
solution high in metal content, is always in contact 



106 



The Modern Electroplater 



with the cathode, because as fast as the metal is taken 
from the solution, the articles are passing on to new 
solution. This condition aids materially in quicken- 
ing the deposit, and its beneficial results are particu- 
larly noticeable in deep recesses which are impos- 
sible to plate or electrogalvanize in a still tank. The 




Fig. 64. — View of Automatic Plating Tank Showing Arrange- 
ment for Taking up Slack in Chain 



action set up by the material passing through the 
tank is also sufficient to stir or agitate the fluid 
enough, for the dense solution is always found near 
the anodes, to become mixed with the poorer solution 
impoverished by the cathode and the latter solution 
to be moved toward the anode. This in turn aids and 
quickens the dissolving of the anodes. 



Automatic Plating Machinery 107 

The moving apparatus tank goes beyond the mere 
correcting of certain defects of the still tank and sets 
up new and attractive conditions. For instance, the 
racks above referred to are hung on copper hooks 
which are fastened to the link-belt conveyor chain. 
These hooks slide on a flat copper conductor bar, and 
this sliding operation is just enough to keep the con- 
nections bright and clean. 

The automatic moving tank, for two reasons, re- 
quires less floor space than the still tank. In the first 
place, these tanks can be set close together. They are 
loaded from the end and do not require the wide 
passageway between them that still tanks do. In 
the second place, they plate the work quicker than 
still tanks and fewer of them are required. If your 
plating department is crowded and congested the 
automatic-moving tank will solve your problem. 

PRINCIPAL ADVANTAGES 

It can readily be seen then, that with a moving 
apparatus we can use a higher current, resulting in 
a quicker deposit; employ unskilled labor owing to 
fixed length of time of articles in the plating bath; 
secure uniform deposit on all work because of equal 
exposure to all anodes ; quicken the deposit and plate 
in recesses because articles are always in contact with 
rich solution; save each of your platers from walk- 
ing needlessly a long distance each day; prevent a 
big loss of current which you are now losing by being 
able to use only about one-half of the voltage gener- 
ated; and aid the above-created efficiency by auto- 
matically keeping the cathode conductor bar clean 
and bright. 



108 The Modern Electro plater 

GENERAL DESIGN 

The apparatus is so laid out that it can be installed 
on any tank which is 2 feet 6 inches wide. There are 
two main yokes and two or more conductor sup- 
porters which are bolted to the top of the tank. The 
moving apparatus, anode conductor bars, cathode 
conductors, etc., are supported by these yokes and 
supports. There is no part of the apparatus in the 
solution except the agitator." 

OTHER TYPES 

Automatic machines are also in use for producing 
plated surfaces on hoop-iron, wire, strip copper and 
brass, and wire mesh. These machines are distinctly 
automatic in that they provide for pickling and clean- 





~ v _ 












: A -; 




IE 


■■■■ ■ '■■■■' ■■■■■■■ 


...... ....,., ..-,...-„ ,-- :',,■" 











Tig. 65. — Machinery for Electroplating Wire, Hoop Iron, and 
Similar Work by the Continuous Process Method. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

ing operations prior to that of plating. Although 
the work is usually dried and wound on reels at the 
completion of the process, a lacquering operation may 
be added, when it is necessary to provide a drying 
oven. Machinery for electroplating metal wire and 
strips is shown in Fig. 65. The automatic plating ap- 
paratus for handling wire mesh is shown in Fig. 66. 



Automatic Plating Machinery 109 

A mechanical plating tank for chains, automobile 
wheel irms, etc., is shown in Fig. 67. 




Tig. 66.— Special Automatic Machinery for the Electro- 
Deposition of Protective Metals on Wire Mesh. Note 
the Arrangement for the Preparatory Processes, 
Plating, Washing, Drying, and Lacquering. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 

Other machines are on the market which are de- 
signed for special work, such as plating chains, bar- 




Fig. 67.— Mechanical Plating Tank for Chains, Automobile 
Tire Rims, and Work of a Similar Character. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 



110 The Modern Electroplater 

rel hoops, automobile tire rims, metal tubing and the 
like. Automatic plating machinery will undoubtedly 
be further developed to provide methods of handling 
many of the more tedious operations now requiring 
human effort. 

TANKS FOR PREPARATORY PROCESSES 

Equally important to the plating tank equipment 
are the several containers used for the preparatory 
processes. Tanks for pickling, acid dipping, potash 
solutions, hot water, and scouring are all necessary 
in the production of efficient work. 

PICKLING TANKS 

Foundry work, drop forging, drawn-steel work 
which has been annealed several times, and other 
heat-treated articles are usually delivered to the plat- 
ing room with a surface coating of hard scale. While 
this scale may be removed by mechanical means, such 
as tumbling and sand blasting, a chemical process 
termed pickling, is often employed. The work to be 
cleaned is immersed in a weak acid solution until the 
scale or sand flakes off, or is dissolved. When it is 
not intended to pickle, large quantities of work, or 
if the articles are small in size, a very suitable vat 
may be prepared from one-half , of, an oil or vinegar 
barrel. Usually, however, woodem tanks, such as de- 
scribed earlier in this chapter for plating work, are 
constructed especially for this chemical process. For 
cold pickling, an asphaltum lining is given to the 
tank. As is the case with most chemical solutions, 
action is quickened by heating. It is therefore ad- 
visable to heat the pickle bath by means of lead pipe 



Pickling Tanks 



111 



steam coils placed in the bottom of the tank. Suf- 
ficient coil capacity should be provided to raise the 
temperature of the bath to approximately 200° F. 
The acid tanks may be lead lined for hot pickling, 
but this is not essential. It is best, though, to line 
the interior of the tank with light boards to protect 
the steam coils or, in the case of cold pickle tanks, 
the asphaltum. Regardless of the care exercised, 
castings will drop or baskets will strike the sides of 
the tank, causing damage unless the board protection 
is provided. 

BRIGHT DIPPING TANKS 

As will be explained later, tarnish and other light 
foreign matter may be quickly removed from the sur- 
face of metals by dipping in undiluted acid. This 




Fig. 68. — Bright Dipping Tank Showing Acid Containers and 
Water Bath 



process is usually termed acid or bright dipping. 
Large tanks are seldom employed for this work on 
account of the cost of the acid. Stoneware contain- 
ers, set under a hood and in a vat of warm water 
are provided. The plan view of such an arrangement 



112 



The Modern Electroplater 



is shown in Fig. 68. One or more acid containers 
may be used, according to the shop requirements. 
The wooden rinsing vat is of construction identical 
to the plating and pickling tanks, with the exception 
of the water overflow. This device is merely a pipe 
passing through the bottom of the tank and with a 
height inside equal to the desired depth of water. 

SPECIAL VENTILATING HOODS 

During the bright dipping process, heavy poison- 
ous fumes arise from the acid. A special ventilating 



y--=£----^-_-_-_& . 



ri ; 



t ' 




Fig. 69. — Acid Dipping Tank With Ventilating Hood 



hood is a necessity, therefore, to keep the air in the 
plating room free from these vapors. Fig. 69 shows 
a hood designed to be placed over the dipping tank 



Cleaning Tanks 113 

just described. It is constructed entirely of wood, 
preserved with asphaltum paint. It must be remem- 
bered that the acid fumes from the dips are much 
more concentrated than those collected from the 
plating tanks. The exhaust pipe, therefore, should 
not be constructed of metal but of wood or of glazed 
tile pipe. Wood is employed throughout in the hood 
shown here. The dimensions are dependent upon the 
available space ; the plater can easily follow the gen- 
eral design, assigning such dimensions as are required. 

LYE AND POTASH TANKS 

Perhaps the most suitable tanks for lye and potash 
dips are of steel. Since the solution must be main- 
tained at nearly the boiling point, steam coils should 
be provided. Jacketed tanks or kettles are even more 
satisfactory. No hood is provided for such dips. 

HOT WATER TANKS 

An unlined-wooden tank serves quite well for hot 
water, although a more expensive steel or iron con- 
tainer may, of course, be used. The hot-water tem- 
perature is maintained by the use of steam coils. 
Jacketed steel kettles are also excellent for such pur- 
poses. It is best, for the convenience of the plater, 
that an overflow pipe as well as a faucet connected 
to the fresh-water supply, be a part of the tank equip- 
ment. 

SCOURING TANKS 

The scouring and rinsing tank is always in con- 
stant use ; practically every article to be plated must 
receive some degree of scrubbing or scouring. It is 



114 The Modem Electroplater 

best, then, to place it centrally with respect to the 
plating tanks, and to so construct it that work can 
be done with little inconvenience. One suggestion 
is to raise the tank and scouring board to such a 
height that the plater can clean the work without 
stooping over. The tank is usually made of sound 




Driving Belt 
Rotating Brush 

'■> c ourmg and Drain Board 




Fig. 70. — Scouring Board and Rinsing Tank 






two-inch cypress boards and, with the exception of 
the lining, which is unnecessary in this instance, the 
construction is in general similar to the plating tank 
described in this chapter. The scrub board is located 
at one end of the tank and is so inclined that the 
surplus water drains back into the container. It is 
often advantageous to divide the tank by a wooden 
partition slightly higher than the excess water out- 
let, as shown in Fig. 70. A hole in the bottom sec- 
tion of the partition allows free flow of water from 
one side to the other. The work is first scoured on 
the board, then washed in the outlet compartment A, 
and finally rinsed in the fresh- water section B. 



Cleaning Tanks 115 

While most of the scouring is done with hand brushes, 
greater speed may be obtained if a small polishing 
head equipped with a rotating wire-scratch brush is 
mounted on the board. The increase in production 
will soon compensate for the additional fixture. 



I 



CHAPTER VI 

MISCELLANEOUS PLATING ROOM 
EQUIPMENT 

The Steam Generator — The Drying Oven — Hot Sawdust 
Box — Air Compressor — Time Dial — Plating Anodes — 
Flat Anodes — Corrugated Anodes — Elliptic Anodes 
— Curved Anodes — Slinging Wire — Plating Baskets — 
Plating Hooks — Plating Eacks — Special Eacks — Dipping 
Baskets — The Eespirator — The Hydrometer — The Ther- 
mometer — Litmus Paper — Acid Pump — Carboy Inclina- 
tor — Speed Indicator — Clothing. 

THE STEAM GENERATOR 

The more important plating room equipment has 
already been described, but there are several miscel- 




Fig. 71. — Modern Coal-Burning Steam Generator 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 
116 



Drying Apparatus 



117 



laneous fixtures that should be considered before tak- 
ing- up the subject of the deposition process. Steam, 
for instance, plays an important part in plating-room 
operations. For the heating of electrolytes, pickles, 
lye dips, and water baths, as well as drying ovens and 
the hot sawdust box, steam is almost a necessity. 
Thus, where there is no source of steam supply, a low 
pressure boiler should be installed. The market af- 
fords a wide selection of such steam generators. A 
modern, automatic type, Fig. 71, uses coal as a fuel. 

THE DRYING OVEN 

Some types of work cannot be dried in sawdust and 
must therefore be hung in a drying oven until all 
traces of moisture have disappeared. Such ovens are 




^r^rlXHX 



•Angle Iron Frame ■ ' 

Fig. 72. — Steam Heated Drying Oven 



manufactured, but since their construction is not dif- 
ficult, it is suggested that the plater build one best 
suited to his particular requirements. The source 



118 The Modern Electroplater 

of heat may be either gas or steam, though the latter 
is preferable. Fig. 72 presents a general outline of 
a steam-heated drying oven. The framework is of 
light angle iron, the adjoining pieces being bolted 
together. The walls, bottom, and top are of galvan- 
ized sheet iron, riveted to the angle iron framework. 
The doors are of slightly heavier sheet iron and are 
reinforced on the inside with angle-iron braces. 
They are hinged to the frame supports, as shown. 
Steam coils are placed in the bottom to furnish the 
necessary heat. The interior may be equipped with 
shelves or hooks, depending upon the character of 
work to be placed therein. 

HOT SAWDUST BOX 

One of the most convenient methods of drying 
quantities of small bright dipped or plated articles 
is to surround them with hot sawdust. The pieces 




PS 



Regu/af/ng? 
valves - 



Fig. 73. — Side and End Views of Hot Sawdust Box, Showing 
Simple Construction 



are placed in a riddle, the meshes of which are smaller 
than the articles, and the sawdust poured over them. 
Shaking the riddle allows the sawdust, which has 



Drying Apparatus 119 

absorbed the moisture retained by the pieces, to fall 
through, leaving the work behind thoroughly dry. 
Box- wood sawdust is usually used for this operation 
because of its absorbent qualities. 

As may be seen from Fig. 73, a hot sawdust box 
is easily constructed. Like the drying oven, the 



Tig. 74. — Hot Sawdust Box as Manufactured 

framework is of angle iron and the sides and bottom 
of galvanized sheet iron. Steam coils placed in the 
bottom supply the required heat. It must be ad- 
mitted, however, that a manufactured box will be 
more substantially built and certainly more pleasing 
in appearance. There are several styles of these 
boxes on the market, the one shown in Fig. 74 being 
a good type. 

AIR COMPRESSOR 

As was stated in Chapter V, compressed air is used 
to advantage in the agitation of electrolytic solutions. 
The sand-blast machine, the lacquer spray, and sev- 



120 The Modern Electroplater 

eral other devices also require air under pressure. 
Factories usually operate a large compressor which 
furnishes air to the plating room as well as other 
departments. Individual shops will, in many in- 
stances, have to supply their own compressed air. 
Before purchasing a compressor, a summation of all 
work requiring such service should be made to insure 
the selection of a machine of the correct capacity. 
The most economical method of driving the compres- 
sor is by an individual motor, thus eliminating all 
line shaft losses when the machine is idle. 

TIME DIAL 

A convenient method of denoting the time at which 
work should be removed from the plating tank is 




Fig. 75. — Time Dial 
(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 



Plating Anodes 121 

furnished through the use of a time dial, such as is 
shown in Fig. 75. A thumbpiece connects through 
the glass with the hands, allowing the latter to be 
set to indicate the hour and minute. If possible, a 
time dial should be placed above or on each active 
tank. 

PLATING ANODES 

There are several shapes and kinds of plating 
anodes on the market. Many of these are especially 
designed for certain classes of work. For this reason 
a brief discussion of the more important types is 
necessary. 

FLAT ANODE 

The flat anode was for many years the standard 
type used for all classes of work. While still popu- 
lar, other shapes can now be adapted to greater ad- 
vantage in many instances. For nickel plating cast 
anodes may be employed. A good point featured by 
several manufacturers is the use of either the sepa- 
rate or cast — in nickel hook. Other metals will, if 
allowed to stand in the nickel solution, act with a 
detrimental effect on the bath, preventing a clean, 
white electro-deposit. Furthermore, if the hook and 
the anode are of the same metal, the full surface may 
be immersed, thereby allowing an economy in ma- 
terial. 

Copper and bronze anodes may also be plate cast- 
ings. While brass anodes may be of rolled metal, 
castings are often preferred because of their solu- 
bility in the solution. Tin plates are also usually 
furnished in the cast form. Experience shows that 
the anode surface in the solution should be the equiva- 
lent of the area to be plated. On the other hand, 



: 



122 The Modern Electroplater 

silver and gold anodes need not present a surface 
area identical with the work. Of course, only anodes 
of pure metal should be used if good work is expected. 







Fig. 76. — Characteristic Disintegration of Flat Anode. Note 

the Waste. The New Anode Weighed 22y 2 Pounds; 

the Stub Weighed 2 Pounds, 10 Ounces: Waste, 11.7 

Per Cent. Compare this with the Two-Bar Type, 

Fig. 78 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 



The characteristic disintegration of a flat anode is 
shown in Fig. 76 and shows amount to be considered 
as waste. 

CORRUGATED ANODES 

Quite similar to the flat-plate anode is that pre- 
senting a corrugated surface. The advantage of this 



Plating Anodes 



123 



type is the large exposed surface in comparison to 
the flat anode of equal width. This is a valuable 
feature in nickel plating, for since this metal does 




Fig. 77. — Corrugated Anode 

not readily dissolve, the large exposed area aids in 
maintaining the metallic strength of the solution 
without the addition of nickel salts. A corrugated 
anode is shown in Fig. 77. 



ELLIPTIC ANODES 

Anodes whose cross sections are round or elliptical 
in shape are finding favor in the plating room. The 
elliptical anode is especially featured by the pro- 
ducers for its economy and perfect plating character- 
istics. When there is poor, or no agitation of the 
electrolyte, it is noticed that the edge of a flat anode 
disintegrates more quickly than the center portion, 



124 The Modern Electroplater 

and that the effect on the cathode is noticeable. The 
section of the cathode nearest the edges of the anode 
receives the heaviest deposit. The round or elliptic 




Fig. 78.— Characteristic Stages in the Disintegration of 2- 
Bar Anodes. Note the Uniform Wearing Qualities. The 
Nickel Anode on the Left Weighed 14 Pounds, that 
on the Right, in the Last Stage of Disintegra- 
tion, Weighed sy 2 Ounces. Waste 3.8 Per Cent 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 



type of anode, however, allows an even disintegra- 
tion with the resulting even deposit on the cathode. 
Thus, this type of anode can be left in the electro- 
lyte until entirely consumed, this again showing a 
saving over the flat variety. Such a round section 
anode, in the two-bar form, is shown in Fig. 78. 



Plating Anodes 

CURVED ANODES 



125 



Special work or mechanical plating machinery may 
require anodes which are curved. For instance, re- 
volving, horizontal plating barrels, such as described 




Fig. 79. — Curved Anode, Circular Cross Section 



in Chapter V, produce a more uniform deposit on 
their contents when a row of curved anodes is placed 
on either side, allowing an equidistant anode surface 
on the bottom as well as on the sides of the work. 



126 The Modern Electroplater 

Other forms of anodes are available and may, no 
doubt, be used with satisfactory results. In selecting" 
an anode, regardless of shape, special attention must 




Fig. 80.— Curved Anode, Rectangular Cross Section 



be given to the actual active surface that will be 
available. It is the active or submerged surface that 
is valuable; all else is a useless and needless expense. 
The curved anodes in Figs. 79 and 80 are the types 
used with plating barrels. 

SLINGING WIRE 

The usual agent employed in suspending light- 
weight work in the electrolytic solutions is copper 
wire. Each article is securely fastened with a length 
of copper wire, the latter then being wrapped several 
times around the cathode rod to form an electrical 



Plating Baskets 



127 



mnection when the cluster is hung in the tank. Sev- 
eral times during the plating process the point of 
fastening of the wire to the article should be changed. 
The danger of an uneven deposit on the surface cov- 
ered by the wife is then avoided. 

PLATING BASKETS 

Small articles may be plated in quantities in a wire 
tray or basket. The result obtained by this method 




Fig. 81. — Cylindrical Shaped Wire Plating Backet 



will not, of course, compare favorably with that se- 
cured on the individual wire slung pieces. But, be- 
cause of the convenience and time saved, the basket 



128 Trie Modern Electroplater 

process is sometimes resorted to where the only pur- 
pose is protection from rust or tarnish, and not 
improvement of appearance. Even in this case, it 
is necessary to occasionally shake the basket, when it 
is suspended in the plating tank, so that the contents 
may so change their relative positions that a fairly 
even deposit is assured. A typical plating basket 
suited for a variety of work is depicted in Fig. 81. 



PLATING HOOKS 



Large or heavy articles are often suspended in the 
plating bath with copper hooks; one loop is attached 
to the work, while the other loop is placed over the 




Fig. 82. — Plating Rack 



cathode bar. The design of the hooks, as well as the 
gauge of the material used in their construction, 
depends upon the class of work handled. It is well 
to have an assortment of hooks on hand so that any 



Plating Racks 



129 



size of article may be placed in the tank on short 
notice, if necessary, without the delay of forming the 
proper hook for it. 



PLATING RACKS 



A plating rack affords the most convenient method 
of individually suspending quantities of small parts 




Fig. 83. — Rack for Plating Large Quantities of Small Parts, 
a Number of Which are Strung on Each Horizontal Wire 



in a still tank. Such racks are not difficult to con- 
struct, and they eliminate the necessity of employing 
wire or a separate hook for each piece of work. In 
general, a rack consists of a copper rod to which cross- 



130 



The Modern Electroplater 



pieces of the same material are riveted and soldered. 
The crosspieces are provided with hooks to hold the 
articles while the supporting rod has one end so 
formed that it may hang over the cathode rod. Often 
two supporting rods are furnished, thereby increasing 




Fig. 84. — Double Support Plating Rack for Small Articles 



the rigidity of the rack. Note the illustrations in 
Figs. 82 and 83, which show simple plating racks, and 
that in Fig. 84, which shows a special type having a 
double support. 

SPECIAL RACKS 

The electroplater is often called upon to finish 
castings of unusual shapes, drawn metal parts, or 



Dipping Baskets 



131 



pipes. If a deposit on the interior surface is ex- 
pected, special racks providing a separate anode 




Fig. 85. — Rectangular Shaped Wire Dipping Basket 

must be used. The plater must exercise his ingenuity 
in designing such racks, keeping always in mind that 
quickness in adjusting the work in the rack or remov- 




Fig. 86. — Stoneware Dipping Basket. Straight Type 

ing it is as essential as is the securing of a good de- 
posit. This is particularly important in the handling 
of large quantities of, commercial work. 



132 



The Modern Electroplater 



DIPPING BASKETS 

While wire hooks may be employed in acid-dipping 
work, greater convenience is found in the use of 
stoneware or wire dipping baskets. Stoneware bas- 
kets are heavy and subject to breakage, but they can 
be used without the danger of disintegration in acids 




Fig. 87. — Respirator 
(Mott Sand Blast Mfg. Co.) 






or potash. Wire baskets, on the other hand, are 
light in weight as well as durable, but cannot be 
subjected to acids for any great length of time. 
Aluminum wire baskets or trays, for example, are 
affected to some extent by both potash and muriatic 
acid, but are nevertheless quite popular on account 
of their exceedingly light weight. Brass and steel 
wire baskets are also manufactured for dipping op- 
erations. A rectangular shaped wire dipping basket 



The Hydrometer 133 

is outlined in Fig. 85, and a straight type stoneware 
dipping basket is shown in Fig. 86. 



THE RESPIRATOR 

As a protection against inhaling poisonous fumes 
or injurious abrasive dust, a filter mask or respirator 
is often used. This device is worn strapped in such 
a position that it effectively covers the nose and 
mouth, allowing no air to enter except that which 
passes through a filter, such as a wet sponge. Ex- 
haled air escapes through an automatic valve in the 
side. It is, of course, understood that if suitable 
ventilating equipment is provided for the plating 
and polishing rooms, there is little necessity for wear- 
ing a respirator. A respirator, as it looks when worn 
by the operator, is shown in Fig. 87. 

THE HYDROMETER 

A hydrometer is a device for measuring the spe- 
cific gravity, the relative density, of solutions. In 



Fig. 88. — A Hydrometer For Testing the Density of Plating 
Solutions 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

appearance it is similar to a thermometer glass with 
the exception of the bulb which is filled with lead 
shot instead of liquid. The scale markings are, of 
course, laid off to a different standard. By allowing 
the hydrometer to float, bulb downward, in a test 
tube or other container of any solution, the density 



134 The Modern Electroplater 

of the latter is found by noting the scale reading at 
the solution surface level. An acid Baume hydrome- 
ter with a scale of 0°-20° is adequate for most plating 
solutions, although a scale of 0°-70° is necessary for 
acid and acid dips. Undoubtedly the hydrometer is 
most valuable in testing nickel electrolytes. A regis- 
tration at 6° to 8°, for instance, indicates a good solu- 
tion, while any point showing below 6° warns that the 
bath is becoming weak in metal and requires ihe im- 
mediate addition of nickel salts. The simplicity of the 
hydrometer for testing the density of the plating solu- 
tions is shown in Fig. 88. 

THE THERMOMETER 

For determining the temperature of hot solutions, 
a thermometer having a scale reading up to 212° F., 
or higher, is often useful. Again, a thermometer is 



Fig 89. — Glass Thermometer for Hot Solutions 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

of assistance to the plater in maintaining an even 
temperature in the drying oven or lacquer room. The 
glass thermometer, shown in Fig. 89, is for hot solu- 
tions. 

LITMUS PAPER 

Certain vegetable substances have the property of 
changing color when acted upon by acids or alkalies. 
One of these is litmus, which in acid solutions is red, 
and in alkaline, blue. The plater will find it to his 
advantage to provide himself with filter paper treated 



Acid Handling Devices 135 

with litmus, known commercially as litmus paper. If 
a drop of the solution, w T hose reaction is unknown, is 
placed on a sheet of blue litmus paper, that portion 
affected will turn light red, if the solution is even 
slightly acid. 

ACID PUMP 

Among the daily duties of an electroplater is the 
handling of concentrated acids. This is a dangerous 
task, particularly the emptying of heavy carboys, 




Fig. 90. — Non-Corrosive Acid Lift for Carboys 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

unless some device is available to mechanically remove 
the acids from their containers. One of these devices 
is the acid pump. A rubber plug, through which a 
long and short tube passes, is substituted for the 
commercial stopper. By the use of a small hand- 



136 The Modern Electroplater 

pump connected to the short tube, the air pressure on 
the interior of the carboy is increased. The acid is 




Fig. 91. — Carboy Inclinator 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 



thus forced up the long tube and passes out into a 
pitcher or other container. Note Fig. 90. 



CARBOY INCLINATORS 



Another apparatus, which is, perhaps, more ex- 
tensively used than the acid pump, is the carboy in- 



Speed Measuring Devices 



137 



clinator. There are many designs on the market, but 
the essential principle is the same for all ; the carboy 
is rocked forward to the necessary angle on a portable 
adjustable frame, the acid pouring from the neck 




Fig. 92. — Speed Indicator 

(L. S. Starrett Co.) 



mouth into the provided container. Fig. 91 illustrates 
this device. 

SPEED INDICATOR 

The plating generator should always be driven at 
the speed specified on its name-plate. The only sure 
method of determining whether this speed is main- 
tained is through the use of an indicator. There are 
many designs available, ranging from the simple 
revolution counter to the carefully adjusted electrical 
speed indicator. For plating and polishing room use 



138 The Modem Electro plater 

in determining the speed of motors, generators, shaft- 
ing, buffing and polishing wheels, and the like, the 
most simple and inexpensive type of speed indicator 
will suffice. A very simple yet accurate instrument 
is shown in Fig. 92. 

CLOTHING 

"While it is almost impossible to fully safeguard the 
clothing from acid burns, some protection is provided 
when rubber aprons, rubber gloves, and heavy shoes 
are worn. If the plating room floor is constructed as 
suggested in Chapter III, much relief from dampness 
will be enjoyed. Shoes with wooden soles may be 
obtained for use in rooms where water and acid are 
not drained from the floor. 



CHAPTER VII 

THE PREPARATION OF WORK FOR 
ELECTROPLATING 

Cleansing — Eemoval of Burrs — Oblique Tumbler — Horizontal 
Tumbler — Charging the Tumbler — Sand Blasting — Two- 
Hose Sand Blast — Single-Hose Sand Blast — Sand Blast 
Boom — Automatic Sand Blast — Sand Blast Rolling Bar- 
rel — Rotating Table Sand Blast — Compressed Air Sup- 
ply — Sand Blast Sand — Cleansing by Pickling — Rinsing 
— Electrolytic Cleaning — Copper Striking — Polishing — 
Hot Lye Dipping — Scratch Brushing — Scouring — Remov- 
ing Oxides — Stripping — Non-Metallic Work — Bright 
Dipping. 

CLEANSING 

The preparation of an article for electroplating 
requires more hard work than skill, yet the succeed- 
ing plating operations cannot be successful if the 
first cleansing process is slighted. Grease, scale, or 
rust on the surface of an article acts as an insulator 
against the passage of electricity and causes, at the 
best, a faulty deposit of metal. Under no circum- 
stances should even the fingers touch the prepared 
work in placing it in the tank. 

An electro-deposit will not efface scratches or flaws 
in the metal; the original surface must be smooth if 
the plated finish is to show no imperfections. All 
metals cannot be treated exactly alike, as experience 
shows, yet the essential operations are somewhat 
similar. 

139 



140 The Modern Electroplater 

REMOVAL OF BURRS 

Rough castings or other articles must, of course, 
be ground on an emery wheel to remove the heavy 
"burrs. If the burrs are quite small and sharp, the 
castings may be shaken in a tumbling barrel. This 
operation not only removes the burrs but quite often 
the scale, sand, and rust. Obviously, no work having 
sharp corneri that are to be preserved should be put 
in the barrel. One important advantage of tumbling 
is the amount of time and labor saved. After the 
work is placed in the barrel, no further attention need 
be given to it until the articles are completely burred 
and cleaned. 

OBLIQUE TUMBLER 

Small articles, not of a fragile nature, may be per- 
fectly cleaned in an oblique tilting tumbler, such as 
that shown in Fig. 93. Metal barrels of sheet steel, 
cast iron, or brass are usually preferred to the less 
durable wooden type. As may be noted, the barrel 
can be tilted while revolving — backward when tum- 
bling work and forward to eject it. The objects being 
tumbled may be inspected at any time without stop- 
ping the machine. 

HORIZONTAL TUMBLER 

The horizontal tumbling barrel is designed for 
larger work than that handled by the tilting type. 
Often there are two compartments, each furnished 
with a door which is bolted firmly in place. There 
are several types of horizontal tumblers on the 
market but all operate on the same basic principle. 






Mechanical Cleaning Devices 141 




Fig. 93.- -Oblique Tilting Tumbler 

(The Baird Machine Co.) 



142 The Modern Electroplater 

Tumbling barrels are, of course, power-driven, con- 
trol being secured through the use of tight and 



RING OILING 




Tig. 94. — Horizontal Grinding Barrel for Tumbling Heavy 

Pieces 

(The Baird Machine Co.) 

loose pulleys. The horizontal tumbling barrel shown 
in Fig. 94 is well adapted for handling heavy pieces. 

CHARGING THE TUMBLER 

Sawdust is perhaps the cheapest absorbent agent 
available for the tumbling process. The barrel, re- 
gardless of type, is generally charged with an equal 
quantity each of work and sawdust. Under no 
circumstances should the drum be run more than 
two-thirds full. The sawdust absorbs the grease and 
moisture, while the rubbing action of the pieces re- 
moves the dirt, rust, and sharp edges. 

In some cases it may be necessary to employ 



Mechanical Cleaning Devices 143 

abrasives such as gravel, broken glass, metal chips, 
sand, or pumice. The choice of the abrasive must, 
of course, depend upon the softness of the metal 
articles to be tumbled. Steel ball burnishing, which 
is another form of tumbling, will be described later. 

SAND BLASTING 

Light, fragile articles, which might be broken if 
tumbled, may be quickly cleaned by sand blasting. 
While tumbling or pickling processes require a cer- 
tain amount of time, sand blasting produces a sur- 
face free from all grease or scale in a few minutes, 
regardless of the size or shape of the article. 

Sand blasting, as the term implies, is the clean- 
ing of any object with a stream of sharp sand 
driven from a nozzle by air pressure. The sand, 
striking the surface of the object with great force, 
produces a cutting action which effectively removes 
all foreign matter. 

TWO-HOSE SAND BLAST 

Perhaps the most simple type of sand blasting 
device consists of a Y-shaped nozzle, an air hose 
and valve, a sand hose, and the necessary helmet 
for the operator. The nozzle tip, which is the 
bottom part of the Y, is hardened to reduce ex- 
cessive wear and may be quickly removed and re- 
placed. One of the upper branches of the Y is 
connected through a hose to an air supply of 50 to 
60 pounds. The nozzle air pressure is regulated 
through a conveniently placed valve. The opposite 
branch of the Y is connected through a rubber hose 
to a sand container, such as a box or pail. When 



144 



The Modern Electroplater 



the air is allowed to flow, a stream of sand is drawn 
into it, the mixture passing from the nozzle as a 
sand blast. While the reference is made to the 
letter Y for descriptive purposes, manufactured 
nozzles are, of course, constructed more compactly. 



SINGLE-HOSE SAND BLAST 






Two-hose sand blast nozzles are cumbersome and 
difficult to handle. Accordingly, a single-hose ap- 
paratus is available where the sand and air are 
mixed in a compartment before entering the single 




Fig. 95. — Single-Hose Direct-Pressure Sand Blast Machine. 
(Mott Sand Blast Mfg. Co.) 



Mechanical Cleaning Devices 145 

1 inch hose provided for the operator. This hose 
is specially constructed to resist the wear of the 
sand and for most work a y^ inch single nozzle with 
a hard tip is provided. A single hose direct pressure 
sand blast machine is shown in Fig. 95. 

SAND BLAST ROOM 

The use of the sand blast apparatus just de- 
scribed requires a special work room. If possible, 
the location should be such that the fine sand par- 
ticles, which escape from the room in spite of pre- 
cautions, do not settle on machinery, plating solu- 
tions, or recently lacquered articles. The bench, on 
which the work to be cleaned is placed, may be 
made of iron bars, thus allowing the escaped sand 
to pass through and into a container beneath. The 
walls on each side of the bench where the sand 
particles are apt to strike, should be protected with 
sheets of iron. Directly above the bench a hood 
should be placed, connected to a ventilating blower. 

It is quite difficult to obtain men who will operate 
the foregoing apparatus. The sand blast clothing 
equipment is uncomfortable, especially during hot 
weather when the confinement in a closed room, 
with hot, heavy gloves on the hands, and stuffy 
helmet over the head, imposes severe hardship on the 
workman. The present-day tendency is toward the 
use of self-contained dust proof, automatic sand blast- 
ing machines. 

AUTOMATIC SAND BLAST 

One type of such a machine is shown in Fig. 96. 
It has a sand blast compartment of heavy sheet iron 



146 The Modern Electroplater 

in which are glass windows to enable the operator to 
view the work. Large articles undergoing sand blast- 
ing are placed in or removed from the compartment 
through a side-door. Small articles may be thrust 




Fig. 96. — Sand Blast Cabinet 
(Mott Sand Blast Mfg. Co.) 

through the front hand holes. It is seen that these 
openings have cloth protectors to prevent injury to 
the workman's arms while the blast is in operation. 
Upon pressing the foot lever, the air valve is opened, 
allowing a blast of sand to be expelled against the 
work, which is held in the necessary positions until 



Mechanical Cleaning Devices 147 

a clean, matt finish on all surfaces is assured. The 
used sand drops back into the lower container where 
it is again drawn upward through the sand pipe on 
another cycle of work. Often a wire mesh is provided 
at the top of the sand container to catch any articles 
accidentally dropped from the hands. 

SAND BLAST ROLLING BARREL 

Another device manufactured for automatically 
sand blasting small work is the rolling barrel. This 




Fig. 97. — Sand Blast Tumbling Barrel 
(Mott Sand Blast Mfg. Co.) 

apparatus, when filled with castings, forgings, or 
other metallic articles, effectively cleans all surfaces 
without the supervision of an operator. 



148 The Modern Electroplater 

The machine is not unlike a horizontal tumbling 
barrel in appearance and action, but with the addi- 
tion of the sand blasting features. An end opening is 
provided in the barrel in place of the usual side-door 
found on tumblers. Inside of the main barrel is a 
cylinder, several inches smaller in diameter, and con- 
structed of perforated steel. Fixed in a position near 
the top of the inner cylinder are the sand blast noz- 
zles. Work is placed in the steel cylinder, the end 
cover put in position, and the machine started. While 
it revolves at approximattely 2 r.p.m., thereby slowly 
rolling the articles in the barrel, the blast reaches 
every section of their surfaces, removing foreign mat- 
ter. The used sand falls through the perforations in 
the cylinder to the space between it and the barrel. 
Buckets similar to those used on the old type water 
wheels, attached to the revolving barrel, carry the 
sand around the circle until it is emptied into the sand 
container above the nozzle. A typical sand blast 
rolling barrel is shown in Fig. 97. 

ROTATING TABLE SAND BLAST 

A third type of sand blast machine is shown in Fig. 
98. As is indicated, the table revolves, carrying work 
placed upon it beneath a sand blast. The work passes 
through split curtains, these latter preventing the 
escape of abrasive material to the outside of the blast- 
ing chamber. The natural advantage of this machine 
over other types is that the operation is continuous, 
the work being loaded onto and removed from the ex- 
posed half of the moving table. 



Mechanical Cleaning Devices 149 

COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 

If compressed air is available, as is the case if the 
sand blast machine is located in a large factory, spe- 
cial blowers are not required. Otherwise a corn- 




Fig. 98. — Rotating Table Machine Direct-Pressure Blast 
(Mott Sand Blast Mfg-. Co.) 

pressed air plant must be installed. It is suggested 
that a reserve air tank be added, this to be charged 
when needed, and the supply of compressed air thus 
always available can be used to advantage for agitat- 
ing plating solutions, or for drying work taken from 
the final hot water dip. It is best to locate the com- 
pressor in a dry place, free from dust. Wet air re- 



150 The Modem Electroplater 






duces the efficiency, and perhaps may stop entirely the 
operation of the sand blast machine. 



SAND BLAST SAND 



, 



Some words of caution in the selection of the sand 
may be advisable. Not all grades of sand can be used 
with success. Usually a hard, clean silica sand is the 
best. The grains should be uniform in size and in 
texture though sharp sand is not necessary, as the 
edges soon wear off. Above all y the sand must be 
perfectly dry when placed in the blasting machine, 
even if it is necessary to heat it in order to remove 
all the moisture. 

CLEANSING BY PICKLING 

But tumbling, sand blasting, and other mechanical 
cleaning machinery is not always available for the 
removal of foreign substances from the surface of 
articles to be plated. In many instances, therefore, 
it is necessary to prepare the work by pickling. This 
process is one where the scale or other undesirable 
substance is removed from the metal surface by the 
chemical action of an acid. Sulphuric, hydrochloric 
or muriatic, and hydrofluoric acids, diluted with 
water, are the ones used to the greatest extent. Com- 
pounds are also manufactured which can be dissolved 
in water, and employed with the same success as acids. 
Pickle baths for iron articles are made by adding one 
part of sulphuric or muriatic acid to fifteen or twenty 
parts of water. The acid should always be added to 
the water; never the water to the acid. Brass work 
requires a slightly weaker solution of sulphuric acid 



Electrolytic Cleaning 151 

to obtain the best results. Hydrofluoric acid may be 
used in a very diluted form, if necessary. Its function 
is to dissolve the sand adhering to the castings yet 
without injury to the iron. A quick pickle for iron 
castings, which may be used cold or hot with good 
results, is composed of 20 parts water, 2 parts muri- 
atic acid and 3 parts hydrofluoric acid. 

The work is strung on wires and suspended or 
placed in the pickle. Care must be exercised to pre- 
vent over-pickling, which causes seams and roughness 
on the surface of the work. Warm pickle baths, of 
course, act with greater rapidity, but the acid fumes 
arising from the tanks are more dense. 

RINSING 

Immediately after removal from the pickle, the 
work is rinsed in cold water to remove all traces of 
the acid, and then dipped for a few moments in hot 
water. The purpose of the hot water treatment is to 
give the articles sufficient heat to dry quickly without 
forming rust. 

ELECTROLYTIC CLEANING 

Before passing on to a description of the final 
cleaning operations, some mention should be made 
of the electrolytic cleansing process. This method is 
rapidly gaining favor since it removes the foreign 
substances in much less time than the pickling bath, 
and lessens the labor of scouring. 

Usually steel tanks are employed since they can 
then be conveniently used for the anodes, being con- 
nected to the positive terminal of the generator cir- 
cuit. The electrolyte is an alkaline solution, such as 



152 The Modern Electroplater 

caustic soda, kept near the boiling-point by means 
of steam coils. The work to be cleaned is treated as a 
cathode and is, therefore, connected to the negative 
bns bar. An e.m.f. of 6 volts is sufficient, providing 



Negative 



Steel Tank 

-Piece Bemg 
Cleaned 



Fig. 99. — Electrolytic Cleaning. A Similar Process is 
Employed in Copper Striking 

the current density is not less than 12 amperes per 
square foot. As might be expected, an increase in 
current density quickens the cleaning action. Large 
quantities of hydrogen gas are thrown off from the 
surface of the work, removing all traces of oxide and 
grease. Only a few minutes are required for this 
process, which is shown in diagram form in Fig. 99. 




COPPER STRIKING 

Copper "striking," or "flashing," is another fa- 
vorite method of cleaning metal work. One advantage 
of this process is that a thin film of copper is deposited 
on the article, a perfect coating denoting a chemically 
clean surface. Upon this coating another metal may 
be deposited with excellent results. As in the process 
described in the paragraph on electrolytic cleaning, a 
steel tank, being positive, serves as the anode. The 



Hot Lye Dipping 153 

article to be cleaned is connected to the negative ter- 
minal. An alkaline copper bath is used. Such an 
electrolyte may be prepared to suit the requirements 
.of the work from a mixture of water, copper cyanide, 
sodium cyanide, and caustic soda. A copper deposit, 
under such conditions, forms in a few moments. 

POLISHING 

Should the work now present a rough surface where 
a fine smooth one is desired, a polishing operation is 
added. When the polisher has secured the desired 
grade of finish, the work is passed on to the plating 
room for the final cleaning operations, preparatory to 
entering the electrolyte. A discussion on polishing 
and grinding is given in Chapter IX. 

HOT LYE DIPPING 

For steel and iron pieces, the next step is an im- 
mersion, for 15 to 30 minutes, in a hot lye or caustic 
soda solution. While the strength of this solution 
may be varied to suit the character of the work, one 
part of lye to 40 parts of water by weight, proves 
sufficient for the average requirements. 

For quick and positive results it is essential that 
the lye bath be maintained at nearly a boiling tem- 
perature. This is accomplished by the use of steam 
coils, as is indicated in Chapter V. After removal 
from this tank, the work is thoroughly rinsed in cold 
water and taken to the scouring bench. 

SCRATCH BRUSHING 

Scratch brushing and scouring produce in general 
the same effect, the former being slightly more severe. 



154 The Modern Electro plater 

The scratch brush is constructed of fine metal wires 
and is driven by mechanical power. Obviously, to 
secure desired cleansing results, the scratch brush 




Fig. 100. — Circular Steel Wire Scratch Brush 

(A. P. Munning- & Co.) 

wires are composed of a material harder than the 
surface being worked on, these being held by a wooden 
center hub, as shown at Figs. 100 and 101. 

SCOURING 

For scrubbing or scouring, fine pumice and water is 
often used. Although a hand brush can be employed 



Cleaning With Brushes 155 

for most work, greater production in less time is ob- 
tained through the use of a power-driven rotary 
brush. This brush may be mounted with its lathe on 




Fig. 101. — Small Circular Black Bristle Brush 

(A. P. Munning- & Co.) 

the scouring board as suggested in Chapter V. The 
work of scouring is continued until the entire surface 
to be treated is as bright, clean and smooth as it is 
desired that the finished plated surface should be. 

REMOVING OXIDES 

When the articles are as clean as scouring can 
make them, they should be rinsed thoroughly in cold 
water and given a quick dip in muriatic acid. Upon 
rinsing them again in cold water, an inspection should 
be made prior to hanging them in the plating tank. 
Since moisture does not readily adhere to an oily 
surface, the appearance of dry spots on the work 
after rinsing indicates improper cleaning. Obviously, 



156 



The Modern Electroplater 



in such instances, the cleaning operation should be 
repeated to remove the grease. Work that is held 
out of the solution will oxidize quite rapidly. This 
final acid dip, preparatory to the plating operation, is, 




"x. 



Fig. 102. — Cotton Potash Brush 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

therefore, a precautionary measure to remove all pos- 
sible existing oxide. No time should thus be lost in 
placing the work in the electrolytic solution after it 
has passed through the la t rinsing water. 




Fig. 103.— Goblet Shaped Brush 
(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

The same general operations may be followed for 
cleaning brass and copper objects with the exception 
of the final acid dip. To remove the oxide accumula- 
tion, a potassium cyanide dip is substituted for the 



Stripping 157 

muriatic acid. After rinsing in cold water, the work 
is immediately placed in the plating tank. It might 
be worth mentioning that finely polished brass and 
copper articles rarely require scouring, but this is, 
of course, a question to be decided by the plater. A 
variety of scouring and cleaning brushes, for different 
classes of work, are shown in Figs. 102, 103 and 104. 

STRIPPING 

It is not unusual in the production of commercial 
work to discover, after plating is completed, that 
some mechanical operation has been omitted or that, 
through accident, perhaps, the original finish is dam- 




Fig. 104. — Brush for Cleaning the Interior Surfaces of 
Vessels 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

aged. Before replating can be properly accomplished, 
the old deposit must be removed. Especially is this 
true of nickel or silver work. Two methods are avail- 
able : the old deposit may be removed by acid dipping, 
or else stripped electrically by reversing the current 
direction, thereby using the articles as an anode. 



158 The Modem Electroplate?* 

Copper or brass plating is most easily removed by 
dipping the work in a hot solution of sulphuric and 
nitric acids mixed in a proportion of approximately 
six to one by volume. Rinse in hot water after 
dipping. 

A good stripping solution for nickel finishes is com- 
posed of one part each, by volume, of water, sulphuric 
acid, and saltpeter (sodium nitrate). Nitric acid may 
be substituted for the saltpeter, but in proportion 
one-fourth that of the sulphuric acid. During the 
stripping process, continue to move the work back 
and forth through the solution. Rinse in hot water 
immediately after removal from the dip. 

Silver may also be removed from copper alloy arti- 
cles through the use of an acid dip. A hot solution 
of two parts sulphuric acid to one part saltpeter gives 
good results. 

Silver may be stripped from iron and steel articles 
by utilizing a reverse current of about two volts, the 
articles forming the anodes, and one of the regular 
silver anodes forming the cathode. A stripping solu- 
tion for this process is: 

"Water 1 gal. 

Potassium cyanide 8 oz. 

Silver chloride % oz. 

NON-METALLIC WORK 

Articles which are non-conductors of electricity 
may be so treated that a metallic deposit can be 
formed on their surfaces. The purpose of such work 
may be commercial, artistic, or sentimental in na- 
ture. Metal-coated wood and leather work, porcelain 
or pottery has commercial value. Metalized flowers, 



Acid Dipping 159 

insects, leaves and the like, can be fashioned into 
novelties or jewelry. Keepsakes, such as baby shoes, 
can also be preserved if covered with a thin coating 
of copper or silver. 

Large, stable articles, after being thoroughly 
washed with alcohol, are dipped or painted with shel- 
lac; fragile pieces are sprayed with the same varnish 
thinned with alcohol. After drying, a second coating 
of commercial electrotypers' varnish is applied. When 
this application has dried so that the article may be 
handled, dust on finely ground graphite or plumbago, 
smoothing it over the surface with a soft hair brush. 
Take care to brush the graphite evenly over every 
section to be plated, remembering that the metal de- 
posits only where the surface has been prepared to 
carry electricity. Copper is undoubtedly the best 
metal to use for quick deposition and the prepared 
article should accordingly be hung in an acid copper 
solution. The deposit does not form at once on all 
sections of the surface but gradually works out from 
one or two points. When the desired thickness of 
copper is deposited, the work may be re-cleaned and 
transferred to another tank for the final deposit of 
the desired metal. 

There are many other methods of preparing non- 
metallic surfaces for plating work. In general, how- 
ever, the brief directions just given are sufficient for 
the average work. For further discussion of the sub- 
ject the reader is referred to works on electrotyping. 

BRIGHT DIPPING 

The foregoing discussion has considered the vari- 
ous methods of preparing work for the electroplating 



160 The Modern Electroplater 

bath. But not all metals require plating, particu- 
larly brass and other copper alloys. They require 
only a refurbishing. It is, therefore, important to 
understand the art of removing from such work the 
oil remaining from machining operations, or the tar- 
nish resulting from exposure. After the correct finish 
is received, through the action of acid dips, if a lac- 
quer coating is added the original bright finish is 
preserved for some time. 

One of the quickest methods of removing tarnish, 
or discoloration from metals, particularly copper 
alloys, is to immerse the stained piece in a strong acid 
solution. This process is known as bright dipping. 
There is little difference between the cleaning action 
of dips and pickles; the first is a rapid treatment 
while the latter is a prolonged operation. The in- 
stantaneous acid action is used with greatest success 
when the surface to be cleaned is smooth. 

In general, the fastest acting dips are composed of 
nitric acid or sulphuric acid, alone or combined in 
varying proportions. For copper alloy articles, a dip 
of two parts sulphuric acid, one part nitric acid, and 
a sparse handful of common table salt for each five 
gallons of solution, gives a bright clean surface. For 
pieces that have been plated, and from which light 
discolorations must be removed before lacquering, a 
small quantity of water should be added to the solu- 
tion. A soft, satin finish will be the result of using a 
dip of equal parts sulphuric and nitric acid in which 
has been dissolved one pound of metallic zinc for each 
five gallons of solution. For steel and iron, a favorite 
dip is prepared from equal parts of water and hydro- 
chloric acid. 



Acid Dipping 161 

Acid dips should be prepared and used in stone- 
ware jars placed in a tank of hot water. A dipping 
tank equipped with an exhaust hood is necessary 
since the acid fumes are quite poisonous. The con- 
struction of such a tank was described in a previous 
chapter. 

When water is used, or two or more acids are mixed 
together, it is safest to combine them in relation to 
their weights, the heavier added to the lighter. Thus, 
if the mixture desired is composed of water and hy- 
drochloric acid, the latter should be added to the 
former. Or if the solution is to be sulphuric and 
nitric acid, sulphuric acid, being the heavier, should 
be poured into the nitric acid. When zinc is employed 
to dull the finish, it should be dissolved first in the 
nitric acid, when it may then be added to the solution. 
Under no circumstances should acids be poured or 
mixed rapidly; such hasty action is dangerous. 

Small pieces to be bright dipped are strung on 
wires, or placed in stoneware or wire baskets, while 
the larger work is handled separately on wire hooks. 
After a short immersion in boiling lye, the work is 
passed through hot water, then immersed in the acid 
dip for a few seconds. Upon removal, a thorough* 
rinsing in hot water is given. Hot sawdust, blowing 
by compressed air, or oven drying must be used to 
prevent tarnishing. 



CHAPTER VIII 

PLATING SOLUTIONS AND THE ELECTRO- 
DEPOSITION OF METALS 

Brass — Brass Plating Solution — Brass Anodes — Voltage 
Eegulation for Brass Plating — Brass Coloring — Bronze — 
Bronze Plating Solution — Brass Anodes — Voltage Eegu- 
lation for Bronze Plating — Copper — Copper Plating 
Solutions for Still Tank — Catalytic Agents — Copper 
Anodes — Voltage Eegulation for Copper Plating — Copper 
Deposition — Copper Striking — Copper Coloring — Gold — 
Gold Plating Solution — Gold Anodes — Voltage Eegula- 
tions for Gold Plating — Gold Deposition — Stop-Off Var- 
nish — Iron — Iron Plating Solution — Iron Anodes — Volt- 
age Eegulation for Iron Plating — Lead — Lead Plating 
Solution — Lead Anodes — Voltage Eegulation for Lead 
Plating— Nickel— Solutions for Still Tank Nickel Plat- 
ing — Solution for Barrel Nickel Plating — Black Nickel- 
ing — Nickel Anodes — Voltage Eegulation for Nickel 
Plating — Preparation of Work for Nickel Plating — 
Nickel Deposition — Silver — Silver Plating Solution — 
Silver Anodes — Voltage Eegulation for Silver Plating — 
Silver Deposition — Silver Coloring — Tin — Tin Plating 
Solution — Tin Anodes — Voltage Eegulation for Tin 
Plating — Tin Deposition — Ztnc — Electro-Galvanizing — 
Solutions for Still Tank Zinc Plating — Solution for 
Barrel Zinc Plating — Zinc Anodes — Voltage Eegulation 
for Zinc Plating — Zinc Deposition — Mechanical Ma- 
chinery for Electro-Galvanizing. 

It is difficult to determine the order in which the 
various metals used in electro-deposition should be 

162 



Brass Plating 163 

considered. Nickel and brass plating are of most in- 
terest, perhaps, to those handling hardware and simi- 
lar articles. Again, zinc deposition appeals to the 
operator in charge of the plating division of a factory 
whose output must be coated with a cheap protective 
metal to afford freedom from rust rather than to add 
to its appearance. On the other hand, gold and silver 
deposition, especially the latter, is of great impor- 
tance to the manufacturer of jewelry, cutlery, table- 
ware, and similar goods requiring a beautiful polished 
surface. For convenience, then, rather than for their 
degree of importance, the several metals will be con- 
sidered in alphabetical order. 

BRASS 

Commercially, brass is one of the important metals ; 
it is undoubtedly the most extensively used of all 
alloys. Its color, yellow, varies in shade according to 
the percentage of zinc and copper in its composition; 
an increase in zinc with a corresponding decrease in 
copper produces a lighter color, and vice versa. In 
practice, the proportion of each metal content ap- 
proximates: copper, 60 per cent, zinc 40 per cent. 
Brass presents a more pleasing appearance than zinc, 
but is higher in cost. On the other hand, it is less 
expensive than copper and is not quite so susceptible 
to tarnish. It is, therefore, an excellent protective 
metal for deposit on iron products, to preserve the 
latter from the action of the atmosphere. 

BRASS PLATING SOLUTION 

A solution prepared from the following formula 
gives excellent results in brass plating : 



164 The Modern Electroplater 

Water 1 gal. 

Sodium cyanide 9 oz. 

Copper cyanide 5 oz. 

Zinc cyanide 2 oz. 

Sodium carbonate 4 oz. 

Ammonium chloride % oz. 

The addition of a very small amount of arsenic tri- 
oxide (white arsenic), dissolved in caustic soda, im- 
proves the appearance of the deposit. Ammonia also 
appears to assist in creating a fine grained deposit 
and may be added to the solution if desired. 

The sodium cyanide is dissolved in the water and 
the resulting solution poured into two containers, 
half in each. In one container the copper cyanide is 
dissolved ; to the other the zinc cyanide is added. The 
first solution is then put into the plating tank and the 
other poured in slowly. Before adding all of the zinc 
cyanide solution, a test should be made to determine 
the color of the deposit. If the plated article appears 
too dark in color, more zinc cyanide solution is added 
until the desired color is obtained. The remaining 
ingredients are then placed in the electrolyte in agree- 
ment with the formula. 

A cyanide electrolyte for brass plating yields the 
best results. Experience shows that for this copper 
alloy, acid solutions are impractical. The cyanide 
bath may be used for either still tank or barrel plat- 
ing. 

BRASS ANODES 

As stated in Chapter VI, the anodes may be either 
in the form of castings or rolled plates. "While the 
casting type is more soluble, many platers prefer the 



Brass Plating 165 

rolled anode. Often copper and zinc anodes are used 
in alternate positions. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

For still tank brass plating the voltage may vary 
from four to six. For barrel work a slightly higher 
pressure may be required to produce the desired 
deposition. 

BRASS COLORING 

While a copper surface gives the greatest oppor- 
tunity for successful coloring, many beautiful effects 
may be secured on brass-plated or solid brass articles. 
There are several available coloring solutions, among 
which are the following: 

FOR BLACK COLOR 

Ammonia 1 gal. 

Copper carbonate 14 oz. 

Sodium carbonate 8 oz. 

The copper carbonate is dissolved in the ammonia. 
Thcsodium carbonate cannot be added directly, but 
should be first dissolved in a very small quantity of 
hot water. The article to be colored is dipped in this 
solution until the desired shade is obtained, when it 
is removed and rinsed in fresh water. Boiling for a 
short period in a caustic potash solution fixes the 
color. It is then washed thoroughly, dried, lightly 
scratch-brushed, and lacquered. 

FOR BROWN COLOR 

Water 1 gal. 

Caustic soda 3!/2 oz. 

Antimony sulphide !/2 oz - 



166 The Modern Electroplater 

The caustic soda is dissolved in hot water after 
which the antimony sulphide is added. This is a very 
fast solution, only a few seconds being required to 
turn the brass a dark brown. 

BRONZE 

A copper alloy, which is much more durable than 
brass, but which is employed to less extent commer- 
cially, is bronze. This alloy is a composition of copper 
and tin, in proportion of 85 per cent to 90 per cent 
of the former to 15 per cent to 10 per cent of the 
latter. Because of the large copper content, bronze 
is quite expensive, and is, therefore, not used where 
brass may be substituted. For electroplating work, 
however, bronze may often be employed to advantage. 

BRONZE PLATING SOLUTION 

A good bronzing solution may be prepared from the 
following formula: 

Water 1 gal. 

Sodium cyanide 6 oz. 

Sodium bisulphate 2 oz. 

Copper cyanide 4 oz. 

Tin chloride % oz. 

In a manner similar to the preparation of the brass 
electrolyte, dissolve the sodium cyanide in the pre- 
scribed quantity of water. This solution is then di- 
vided between two containers. Into one is poured 
the tin chloride; to the remaining solution is added 
the copper cyanide and sodium bisulphate. The tin 
chloride solution is added to the copper bath until 
the desired color is obtained. 



Copper Plating 167 

BRONZE ANODES 

Either cast or rolled anodes are available for bronze 
plating. The cast type is usually preferred. The 
anode area should exceed the surface to be plated. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

A lower voltage may be used for bronze plating 
than is required for brass work. In most cases a 
pressure of two to four volts is sufficient to obtain the 
desired current density. 

COPPER 

Copper fills an important place in the world's in- 
dustries, especially those relating to the production 
and maintenance of electrical machinery. It is a very 
malleable metal of a reddish color. As has been pre- 
viously indicated, copper enters into the composition 
of many of the familiar alloys, such as bronze, brass, 
gun metal, german silver, bell metal, and aluminum 
bronze. The art of copper plating has advanced to 
a great degree in recent years, especially in the prepa- 
ration of electrotype plates. A copper coating is also 
quite often deposited on baser metals as a foundation 
for other metals, such as nickel and silver. 

COPPER PLATING SOLUTIONS FOR STILL TANK 

There are two divisions of copper plating electro- 
lytes : alkaline and acid. The former finds the greater 
use, although more difficult of management than the 
acid bath. Such metals as iron, tin, and zinc are elec- 
tro-positive with respect to copper, and an acid solu- 
tion cannot be used in the deposition of copper upon 



168 The Modern Electro plater 

them. On the other hand, the acid bath is invariably 
used for the plating of brass and other metals less 
positive than copper, as well as for electrotyping. 

An alkaline formula which yields a solution pro- 
ducing a fine grained deposit of copper is : 

Water 1 gal. 

Sodium cyanide 3% oz. 

Copper cyanide 3 oz. 

Sodium carbonate 2 oz. 

Sodium hyposulphite .'.,.. % oz - 

The plating tank should be filled about one-third full 
of hot water. The other ingredients should be added 
and dissolved in the following order : sodium cyanide, 
copper cyanide, sodium carbonate, and sodium hypo- 
sulphite. Finally, enough water should be poured 
in to fill the tank to the desired level. It is usually 
best to wait a short time for the solution to clear 
before starting the plating operation. 

A very simple acid-copper plating bath may be 
compounded as follows : 

Water 1 gal. 

Copper sulphate 5 oz. 

Sulphuric acid 1 oz. 

The quantity of any of the three may be varied to a 
slight degree to obtain the desired results. 

CATALYTIC AGENTS 

It is difficult to determine why certain substances 
when added to electrolytic solutions tend to increase 
the current density and to produce a smooth fine- 



CopjJer Plating 169 

grained deposit. Experience shows the very interest- 
ing fact that the addition of glue, gelatine, glucose, 
or grape sugar in small quantities to the plating bath 
produces very desirable working conditions. The 
United States Bureau of Standards is carrying on 
extensive experiments of this nature. It is reported 
that one part of glue in ten thousand parts of solu- 
tion produces a noticeable effect. It is, therefore, 
suggested that minute quantities of any of the men- 
tioned or similar catalytic agents be added to the acid 
bath. 

COPPER ANODES 

Anodes for use in copper plating may be in plate 
form. Often sheets of copper, cut to suitable size, 
will suffice. One difficulty met with, especially when 
cyanide solutions are used, is the coating of the anode 
surface with a substance which is a non-conductor of 
electricity. This condition necessitates frequent re- 
moval of the plates for cleaning. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

For still tank deposition the plating voltage may 
vary from two to four for the cyanide bath and from 
y 2 to iy 2 for the acid electrolyte. In barrel plating 
the current pressure required is often as high as ten 
volts for alkaline solutions, although it may be less 
for acid baths. 

COPPER DEPOSITION 

While there is ordinarily nothing difficult about 
copper plating, under certain conditions special care 
must be exercised. It is suggested, for instance, that 
sand blasting be employed in the preparatory clean- 



170 The Modern Electroplater 

ing process instead of pickling. Unless such precau- 
tions are taken in the cleaning of castings, for ex- 
ample, weak spots may appear in the coating. For 
such work no advantage is gained, if the first depo- 
sition was in an alkaline bath, by completing the plat- 
ing operation in an acid solution, although this is the 
usual procedure for articles leaving the cyanide elec- 
trolyte in perfect condition. Furthermore, a good 
durable coating of copper must always be deposited 
on iron, tin, and zinc articles in an alkaline bath be- 
fore transferring them to the acid solution where a 
heavy deposit can then be built up quickly. 

COPPER STRIKING 

A quick and positive method of cleaning work for 
the plating process is copper " striking" or "flash- 
ing." This was described in Chapter VII. Not 
only does the gas thrown off at the surface of the 
article clean the piece, but a light film of copper is 
deposited forming a perfect foundation for the de- 
position of any metal. The tank is of iron and forms 
the positive or anode plate. The article is connected 
to the negative bus bar of the supply circuit. The 
solution used for this process is : 

Water 1 gal. 

Sodium cyanide l 1 /^ oz. 

Copper cyanide % oz. 

Caustic soda 8 oz. 

The sodium cyanide is dissolved in the water, after 

which the copper cyanide and caustic soda are added. 

This solution is worked at a high current density 



Copper Plating 171 

with a voltage of about ten. A fine film of copper 
will be deposited in but fifteen to twenty seconds. 

COPPER COLORING 

Many pleasing and artistic effects may be secured 
by coloring copper-plated surfaces with various chem- 
icals. The article to be colored is cleaned in the 
usual manner, immersed for a few moments in a 
muriatic-acid dip, and copper plated. Upon coming 
from the plating bath, it is rinsed thoroughly and 
suspended in the coloring solution for a length of 
time dependent upon the shade desired. When re- 
moved from this solution the work is carefully rinsed 
in clean water and lightly scratch-brushed. For 
hardware and office fixtures the appearance is often 
improved by "spotting" in several places with cloth 
or felt "buffs." The finished surface may then be 
preserved with lacquer. 

A coloring solution producing a dark bronze effect 
is composed of: 

"Water 1 gal. 

Potassium sulphate 8 oz. 

A smaller quantity of potassium sulphide may be 
used or ammonium sulphide may be substituted for 
the potassium sulphate. 

Green colors on copper may be secured by painting 
the work with a solution composed of : 

Vinegar 1 quart 

Copper carbonate 16 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 8 oz. 

Cream of Tartar 4 oz. 



172 The Modern Electroplater 

Unlike the treatment with other solutions, this work 
is not rinsed after immersion or painting. The liquid 
is allowed to dry on the article as slowly as possible ; 
thus giving the chemicals an opportunity to act upon 
the copper. After the desired finish is secured, the 
surface is brushed lightly with softened bee's wax. 

GOLD 

Gold is a malleable yellow metal. Due to its chem- 
ical inactivity, it is able to resist decomposition by the 
atmosphere and most acids. It is employed to a great 
extent in the arts, but is not used in the pure condi- 
tion on account of its softness. The chief alloy of 
gold is copper, the latter imparting a reddish color 
as well as increasing its hardness. The composition 
of gold usually employed in jewelry is measured in 
carats, twenty-four carats being the pure metal. Sev- 
eral of these alloy combinations are: 20-carat gold, 
equivalent to 20 parts of gold to 4 of copper; 18- 
carat gold, equivalent to 18 parts of gold to six of 
copper. The total number of parts, as may be seen, 
is always twenty-four. 

GOLD PLATING SOLUTION 

A good gold solution may be composed of : 

Water 1 gal. 

Gold chloride 3 oz. 

Potassium cyanide 10 oz. 

The potassium cyanide is dissolved in warm distilled 
or rain water. To this solution is added the gold 
chloride. The quantity of potassium cyanide may 
need to be varied to secure the desired color. 



Gold Plating 173 

GOLD ANODES 

While a strip of platinum may be used as an anode, 
the metal contents in the solution being replenished 
by the addition of gold chloride, it is better to em- 
ploy a thin sheet of pure gold. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

A current pressure, varying from % to 4 volts, is 
required for gold plating. Experience with a par- 
ticular solution "will soon show the exact voltage 
necessary for the desired color and speed of deposi- 
tion. 

GOLD DEPOSITION 

It is best to work the plating solution at a tempera- 
ture of about 125° F. A faint film of gold is first 
deposited and the article lightly scratch-brushed, to 
lay down the grain. The work is then thoroughly 
washed in hot water, dipped in cold water, and im- 
mersed again in the plating solution for the final coat- 
ing. It is a good plan to keep the work in motion 
by swinging it slightly on its slinging wire. 

When it is necessary to gold plate or gild the inside 
of hollow vessels, the following method may be em- 
ployed. The vessel is filled with the gold solution to 
the level desired and connected to the negative 
terminal of the current supply. An anode of gold 
is then lowered into the solution, care being taken 
to see that the copper connecting wire is not also 
immersed. 

The deposition is continued in a manner identical 
with the method used for still-tank plating. 

The finish of the completed coating may, in some 



174 The Modern Electroplate?' 

degree, be governed by the condition of the surface 
prior to deposition. Frosted or satin finishes are thus 
the direct result of sand-blasted or scratch-brushed 
surfaces. The sand blast should be operated at a low 
air pressure (about five pounds per square inch), and. 
if possible, a fine grade of pumice should be used in- 
stead of the regular sand. 

In the matter Of the color of the deposit gold is 
very sensitive to changes in the current density, the 
temperature of the bath, and the composition of the 
plating solution. Many beautiful tints, such as rose, 
red, green, and the like may be secured by using 
special solutions. Such solutions are available on the 
market and since the directions for their use are 
peculiar to each, and are furnished by the manu- 
facturer, they need not be discussed here. 

STOP OFF VARNISH 

When several colors of metal are desired on one 
article, special measures must be taken. The light- 
est shade desired is first deposited over the entire 
piece. After washing and drying, those sections 
which are to remain the light color are covered by 
painting with a "stop off" varnish. A soft camel's- 
hair brush should be used for this work. As soon as 
the varnish is dry the article is washed, dipped in a 
warm caustic potash solution to remove any existing 
stains, rinsed, and placed in the solution prepared to 
give the other color desired. After gilding, the var- 
nish is removed by dissolving with turpentine or 
benzine applied with a soft brush. The "stop off" 
varnish may be purchased in the grade required for 
any specific work. 



Iron Plating 175 

IRON 

Iron is a hard, gray-white metal which is seldom 
available in a pure state. Steel is produced from iron 
by a special process. Both of these metals are of the 
greatest importance in the industrial world. While 
the electroplater deposits other metals upon steel and 
iron objects, he has practically no demand for iron- 
plated articles. For this reason but little space will 
be given here to the deposition of iron. 

IRON PLATING SOLUTION 

A formula which resembles that to be suggested 
later for nickel plating may be made up as follows : 

Water 1 gal. 

Ferrous ammonium sulphate 14 oz. 

The ferrous ammonium sulphate is dissolved in hot 
water. The solution should be neutral or very 
slightly acid. 

IRON ANODES 

The anode surface should be in excess of the area 
to be plated. Absolutely pure iron is difficult to ob- 
tain, but the purest available should always be used. 
If the anodes show a tendency to become covered with 
a black substance, they should be removed and 
thoroughly cleaned. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

Because of the ease with which hydrogen is liber- 
ated in iron solutions, the current density should be 



176 The Modern Electro plater 

quite low. Less than one volt current pressure is 
sufficient for most solutions. Since iron deposition is 
quite similar in many respects to the more commonly - 
known nickel plating, it is suggested that the discus- 
sion of the latter be read before considering the 
former. 

LEAD 

Lead is a soft bluish-gray metal which melts at 
the comparatively low temperature of 617° F. Un- 
less exposed to the atmosphere, lead shows a high 
luster. Until recently, the electroplater was little in- 
terested in the deposition of lead. At present, how- 
ever, metal containers are frequently required to be 
lead-lined; this is easily accomplished by filling the 
vessel with the correct electrolyte, immersing lead 
anodes connected to the positive supply circuit, and 
using the container as a cathode. 

LEAD PLATING SOLUTION 

An excellent electrolytic solution for the deposi- 
tion of lead is prepared in the following manner: 

Water 1 gal. 

Hydrofluoric acid 32 oz. 

Boric acid 12 oz. 

White lead (lead carbonate) 16 oz. 

The hydrofluoric acid is placed in a wood container. 
The boric acid is then added slowly. This operation 
should be performed in the open or under a ventilat- 
ing hood since the fumes should not be inhaled. As 
soon as the boric acid is dissolved, the white lead may 
be added, followed by the required quantity of water. 



Lead Plating 177 

As explained in the discussion of copper plating, the 
addition of very small quantities of glue tends to 
improve the character of the deposit. And this is 
especially true in lead plating. 

LEAD ANODES 

Only anodes of pure lead should be used for de- 
position. They can be used in the form of castings, 
but lead plates or sheets are more often employed. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

As stated in a previous chapter, solution agitation 
allows a greater current density. The most simple 
method of agitation is the release of compressed air 
from a tube in the bottom of the tank. Experience 
indicates that such agitation is of little help in lead 
plating, yet any form of mechanical agitation some- 
what improves the texture of the deposit. Heating 
the solution produces the same results. Again, a 
more concentrated solution gives a fine-grained de- 
posit since it allows greater current density. Under 
normal conditions, however, the voltage required is 
six, provided there is solution agitation. 

NICKEL 

Nickel is a hard, brittle, white metal. Because it 
is capable of taking a high polish, it is extensively 
used in electroplating for deposition on the baser 
metals. Again, it is not easily corroded by the 
atmosphere and is, therefore, a valuable protective 
metal for iron articles. 



178 The Modern Electroplater 

SOLUTIONS FOR STILL TANK PLATING 

A solution for nickel plating may be compounded 
as follows : 

Water 1 gal. 

Nickel ammonium sulphate 12 oz. 

(Double salt) 
Nickel sulphate 2 oz. 

(Single salt) 

Boric acid 2 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 1 oz. 

The double nickel salt is dissolved in hot water. To 
this solution is added the single nickel salt and am- 
monium chloride. The boric acid is dissolved sep- 
arately in hot water before it is mixed with the 
solution previously prepared. 

A more generally known, and certainly more simple, 
nickel-plating bath may be formed from: 

"Water 1 gal. 

Nickel ammonium sulphate 14 oz. 

(Double salt) 
Boric acid 2 oz. 

The nickel ammonium sulphate is dissolved in hot 
water, then a quantity of the latter is added to the 
solution until a hydrometer reading shows a density 
of about 7° Baume. 

SOLUTION FOR BARREL NICKEL PLATING 

For barrel nickel plating, a slightly different solu- 
tion is suggested. Such an electrolyte is made up 
as follows : 



Nickel Plating 179 

Water 1 gal. 

Nickel sulphate . . 12 oz. 

(Single salt) 

Boric acid 4 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 2 oz. 

Muriatic acid y 2 oz. 

To the water is added the single nickel salt and the 
ammonium chloride. The boric acid is dissolved sep- 
arately in a small quantity of hot water and then 
added to the general solution with the muriatic acid. 

BLACK NICKELING 

A solution quite similar to that used in bright 
nickel plating, yet which produces a dead-black de- 
posit, is composed of: 

Water 10 gal. 

Nickel ammonium sulphate 5 pounds 

(Double salt) 

Sulpho-cyanide of soda IV2 pounds 

Sal ammoniac iy 2 pounds 

Zinc sulphate 1 pound 

Sodium carbonate 4 oz. 

The double-nickel salt is dissolved in the water. The 
others are then added in the following order: Sal 
ammoniac (Ammonium chloride), zinc sulphate, so- 
dium carbonate, and finally, sulpho-cyanide of soda. 

NICKEL ANODES 

Nickel anodes, 99 per cent pure, may be secured 
commercially. Nothing is quite so important in nickel 
plating as pure nickel anodes, since even traces of 



180 The Modern Electroplater 

other metals, particularly copper, tend to discolor the 
deposit. Anodes are available in either cast or rolled 
form. The great advantage of the cast anode is its 
porous composition, which makes it readily soluble. 
When rolled anodes are employed, their hardness pre- 
vents their going into solution to such an extent that 
the electrolyte is weakened and additional nickel salts 
must be added to maintain the required strength. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

Nickel plating solutions offer considerable resist- 
ance to the passage of an electric current and for this 
reason a voltage of 2% to 5 is often required for 
still-tank work. A rough, crystalline deposit is the 
result of a heavy current. 

Barrel nickel plating requires a current pressure 
of about 10 volts. Because of the constant solution 
agitation, a high-current density is ^permissible. 

The current pressure necessary for black-nickel 
plating is quite low, y 2 volt being sufficient to pro- 
duce the best results. 

PREPARATION OF WORK FOR NICKEL PLATING 

The preparation of work for plating was discussed 
to some extent in Chapter VIII. A few brief remarks 
on the preparation of articles to be nickel-plated 
might nevertheless, be added at this time. There are 
two essential requirements: A smooth, polished sur- 
face, and a preliminary coating of some metal less 
positive than nickel. A deposited nickel coating is 
very hard. For this reason it is desirable to elimi- 
nate the need of as much polishing work as possible. 
A preliminary surface that has been polished until 



Nickel Plating 181 

it is smooth as the desired finish of the completed 
coating, will assist greatly in producing a perfect 
deposit. Moreover, such careful preparation of the 
surface permits the elimination of pickling and acid- 
dipping operations which later appear to have a 
detrimental effect on the nickel deposit. While it is 
possible to deposit nickel directly upon iron, steel, 
zinc, tin and other metals more electro-positive in 
nature to nickel, better results are obtained by first 
giving articles of those metals a light coating of cop- 
per or brass. In many instances, "striking" in the 
copper bath described in this chapter, is sufficient 

NICKEL DEPOSITION 

More than usual care is necessary in the manage- 
ment of nickel solutions. In general, there are five 
items which' influence the character of the deposit. 
They are: cleanness, metal content of solution, acid- 
ity of solution, temperature of solution, and current 
strength. 

Cleanness is required in any branch of electroplat- 
ing, but in nickel deposition it is absolutely essential. 
Unless precautions are taken, dust that has settled 
on the surface of the solution will adhere to the work 
as it is immersed. Obviously, there will be an inferior 
deposit at the points covered by the dust and the 
finished surface will show small "pin holes." Again 
it must be remembered that because of its neutral re- 
action, the nickel solution does not have the chemical 
strength to dissolve light films of oil or grease, which 
cyanide or acid electrolytes of other metals do to 
some extent. Thus, even the touch of a finger renders 
the work unclean for the nickel-plating bath. Hence, 



182 



The Modern Electroplater 



the necessity for special care in the scouring and 
preliminary cleaning process. To insure rapid dry- 



Slidinq 
Cover-. 




Liquor 
Outlet 



Fig. 105. — Metal Drying Apparatus. Work Taken From the 

Plating Tank is Rinsed in Fresh Water and Placed in 

This Machine for Quick Drying 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

ing after cleaning, the work is placed in special ma- 
chines, as shown in Figs. 105 and 106J 

The hydrometer is a valuable aid in determining 






Nickel Plating 183 

the content of the nickel-plating bath. A reading 
of 6° to 8° Baume indicates that the metal content 
is sufficient. Any reading below 5° denotes a weak 
solution and more single nickel salts should be added. 
This weak condition is usually the result of the use 
of rolled anodes or insufficient active anode surface. 

Success in nickel plating requires that the solution 
be very slightly acid. One of the chief causes of 
"peeling" or "blistering", however, is an excess of 
acid, so care must be taken to see that only the neces- 
sary quantity of acid is used to bring about the de- 
sired reaction. A bath showing an alkaline reaction 
produces discolored, dark work. Litmus paper, which 
was described in Chapter VI, has the property of 
turning red when dipped in an acid solution, and 
blue when exposed to an alkaline bath. Although 
the double nickel salt in solution is usually neutral, 
a few drops of sulphuric acid may be added until 
the solution shows a slight acid reaction, when tested 
with litmus paper. Should it appear that the electro- 
lyte is too strongly acid, then more neutral salts are 
added until the correct reaction is obtained. 

A subject that receives but little attention, yet 
which has as much, if not more, to do with success 
or failure in nickel plating than any other one condi- 
tion, is the temperature of the solution. A tempera- 
ture below 50° F. is apt to cause crystallization of the 
salts. Usually a certain quantity of hydrogen is lib- 
erated at the cathode ; the temperature must be regu- 
lated for each solution so that the quantity of these 
gas bubbles is not excessive and thus cause the metal 
to "pit." If the plating tanks are equipped with 
steam-heating coils, similar to those described in 



184 The Modern Electroplater 

Chapter V, the temperature may be regulated with 
little difficulty. 

A very strong current also causes excessive libera- 
tion of hydrogen which, as has already been stated, 
is one of the chief causes of "pitted" and uneven 
deposits. Only experience with each particular solu- 
tion will show the current density required for suc- 
cessful work. 

Reference was made earlier in the chapter to the 
use of certain catalytic agents. Glue cannot be used 
in nickel-plating solutions, since it causes a brittle de- 
posit which flakes off readily. Glucose, however, has 
no such detrimental effect but rather produces a 
smooth fine-grained deposit. 

SILVER 

Silver is a white metal, having a high lustre. It 
is malleable and can therefore be rolled or beaten 
into very thin sheets. It is a harder metal than gold, 
but softer than copper. While it is not acted upon 
by the air or water, it combines with sulphur to form 
black silver sulphide. Thus the surface of silver- 
plated articles, exposed to smoke or gas containing 
traces of sulphur, is tarnished with the black sul- 
phide. Silver presents the least resistance, of all 
metals, to the flow of electricity. 

SILVER PLATING SOLUTIONS 

A simple formula for a silver plating solution is 
prepared as follows : 

Water 1 gal. 

Silver chloride 3 oz. 

Sodium cyanide 8 oz. 



Silver Plating 185 

The sodium cyanide is dissolved in warm water. To 
this solution is added the silver chloride which has 
been reduced to a paste with water. Another quite 
similar formula substitutes potassium cyanide for the 
sodium cyanide. It may be necessary to add more 
cyanide to secure the proper working conditions of 
the bath. It is well, though, to use the cyanide with 
discretion ; an excess will discolor the deposit as well 
as make the plating process sluggish. 

SILVER ANODES 

Rolled anodes of fine silver are usually employed. 
The purity of the metal influences the deposit and 
only the purest silver should therefore be used for 
anodes. "While it is not absolutely essential, the 
anode will pass into solution with greater ease if it 
be annealed prior to placing in the bath. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

The required current pressure is exceedingly low 
for silver plating, but y 2 to 1 volt being sufficient. 
The average current density is approximately 2% 
amperes per square foot of surface plated. 

SILVER DEPOSITION 

The work to be silver plated is cleaned in the 
usual manner so that all grease, oxides and other 
tarnish are removed. For iron and steel articles, a 
copper film may be deposited to form a foundation 
for the silver. More often, however, a silver ' ' strike ' ' 
is used. The work is dipped for a moment in a hot 
potash bath and then transferred, without rinsing, to 
the "strike" solution. This bath is usually similar 
to those described in the paragraph on silver plating 



186 The Modern Electroplate!* 

solutions, with the possible exception that there may 
be an excess of cyanide and a decrease in the metal 
content. A very strong current is used with the re- 
sult that a thin adhesive film of silver is quickly 
deposited. The work may then be lightly scratch- 
brushed, rinsed and immersed in the regular vat for 
the completion of the deposition process. Tin, zinc, 
and their alloys may also receive the foregoing pre- 
liminary treatment before entering the plating tank. 
Copper and metals containing a large percentage of 
copper are sometimes prepared by dipping in a so- 
lution of potassium cyanide to which a small quantity 
of mercuric oxide has been added. The article, chem- 
ically cleaned in an acid dip, is immersed for a few 
moments in this solution. Upon removal it will be 
seen that a thin coating of mercury has adhered to 
the surface. The article, thus treated, is suspended 
in the standard solution for the silver plate. 

SILVER COLORING 

It is sometimes desired to color silver-coated ar- 
ticles. Silver surfaces which have been colored a 
blue-black may be ' ' spotted " on a soft cloth wheel to 
obtain varying shades, or the embossed portions may 
be brightened, leaving the background the original 
color. The following is the usual so-called " oxidiz- 
ing" solution for silver coloring: 

Water 1 gal. 

Ammonium carbonate 2 oz. 

Potassium sulphide 1 oz. 

If a hot solution is employed, only a few seconds are 
required to color the silver. 



Tin Plating 187 

TIN 

Tin is a soft, malleable, white metal. Its chief uses, 
commercially, are in the formation of alloys and as 
a protective coating for vessels. While tin plating 
is not extensively employed in the industrial world, 
yet, under certain conditions, tin deposition is quite 
essential. Usually, however, the coating is secured at 
less cost by merely dipping the article in molten tin. 

TIN-PLATING SOLUTIONS 

A satisfactory tin-plating solution is made up of: 

"Water : 1 gal. 

Caustic soda 16 oz. 

Sodium hyposulphite 8 oz. 

Tin chloride 4 oz. 

Sodium cyanide 2 oz. 

The water is placed in three containers, an equal 
amount in each. The caustic soda is dissolved in the 
first; the sodium hyposulphite in the second; the so- 
dium cyanide in the third. A little water is added to 
the tin chloride and then worked into the consistency 
of paste. The caustic soda and sodium hyposulphite 
solutions are poured together. To this mixture the 
tin chloride is added followed by the sodium cyanide 
solution. A very small quantity of glue should also 
be used if a fine close-grained deposit is desired. 

TIN ANODES 

Cast anodes are usually employed for tin plating, 
although other types can be used with success. 



188 The Modern Electroplater 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

There may be a wide variation in the current pres- 
sure, the best results being obtained with voltages 
ranging from two to six. 

TIN DEPOSITION 

Little difficulty is experienced in the management 
of tin-plating solutions. The preparatory cleaning 
solutions are identical with those described in Chap- 
ter VII. If glue, or any of the other catalytic agents 
previously mentioned, is added to the solution, even 
heavy deposits may be secured without trouble. 



ZINC 



Zinc is a bluish-white metal which at ordinary 
temperatures is quite brittle. When heated to 212° 
F, it becomes malleable as well as ductile and may 
be rolled into sheets. Above 424° F., however, it be- 
comes brittle again, and finally melts at about 775° F. 
In this zinc is peculiar. 

ELE CTRO-G ALV ANIZING 

Zinc is widely employed as a protective coating for 
such metals as are affected by the atmosphere. Until 
recently, a process known as hot galvanizing was em- 
ployed in all instances where this film of zinc was 
required. As the term implies, this method required 
the immersion of the work in molten zinc, which had 
a deleterious effect on those metals whose character- 
istics were changed by an increase in temperature. 
Of late, however, much progress has been made in the 
electro-deposition of zinc, often termed "cold gal- 



Electro-Galvanizing 189 

vanizing" or " electro-galvanizing". Because zinc 
is electro-positive to iron and steel it is especially 
valuable as a protective coating for these metals. 
Unlike hot galvanizing, the electro-deposited coating 
of zinc may be varied in thickness and is certainly 
smoother and more durable. 

SOLUTIONS FOR STILL TANK ZINC PLATING 

As is the case with copper, there are two kinds of 
zinc-plating solutions available for still-tank work : 
acid and alkaline. An acid solution which has met 
with favor is composed of : 

"Water 1 gal. 

Zinc sulphate 32 oz. 

Aluminum sulphate 2 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 2 oz. 

Sulphuric acid *4 oz. 

The zinc sulphate and ammonium chloride are dis- 
solved in part of the water while the aluminum sul- 
phate is dissolved in the remainder. The two solu- 
tions are then mixed together and the specified 
quantity of sulphuric acid is added. Grape sugar 
may be used as a catalytic agent to prevent roughness 
in the deposit. 

Another formula, quite similar to the above and 
which is prepared in the same manner, is : 

Water 1 gal. 

Zinc sulphate 32 oz. 

Aluminum sulphate 4 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 2 oz. 

Boric acid 2 oz. 



190 The Modern Electroplater 

An alkaline or cyanide zinc solution does not deposit 
the metal as rapidly as the acid bath, but the coating 
is more uniform. A formula for such a solution is : 

"Water 1 gal. 

Zinc cyanide 3 oz. 

Sodium cyanide . 3 oz. 

Caustic soda 4 oz. 

Aluminum sulphate y± oz. 

The sodium cyanide and the zinc cyanide are dis- 
solved in a portion of the water. The aluminum 
sulphide is dissolved in the remaining part in another 
container. The two solutions are then mixed together. 
"When the tank has been filled to the proper depth, 
the caustic soda is added. 

Another very good solution, which in composition 
and preparation is similar to the foregoing, is: 

Water 1 gal. 

Zinc cyanide 4 oz. 

Sodium cyanide 4 oz. 

Caustic soda 4 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 2 oz. 

Cyanide solutions usually work best when their 
temperatures are raised above 150° F. 

SOLUTIONS FOR BARREL ZINC PLATING 

Many email iron and steel articles may be quickly 
protected against rust by receiving a light coating 
of zinc in a plating barrel. Solutions for barrel plat- 
ing vary but little from those required for still-tank 
work, but the following formula is recommended: 



Electro-Galvanizing 191 

Water 1 gal. 

Zinc sulphate .48 oz. 

Aluminum sulphate 3 oz. 

Ammonium chloride 3 oz. 

Sulphuric acid y 2 oz. 

The chemicals are dissolved in water and the so- 
lutions combined in the same manner as specified for 
acid-zinc baths for still-tank plating. 

There are a great number of formulas for zinc 
plating, but those given here undoubtedly produce 
the best results with the least expense and effort. 

ZINC ANODES 

For zinc plating a cast anode is preferred. It may 
be round, flat, elliptical or corrugated in form. The 
purest metal obtainable should be used for the anodes 
if perfect deposits are to be expected. The anode 
surface should be at least one-third greater than the 
area to be plated. 

VOLTAGE REGULATION 

The current pressure for acid solutions for still- 
tank work may vary from 3 to 6 volts, while for 
cyanide solutions the pressure may range from 2 to 
4 volts. Barrel plating always requires a much 
higher current pressure, and for zinc deposition 
should be 10 to 12 volts. Other types of mechanical 
plating also require a high-current pressure of 8 to 
10 volts. 

ZINC DEPOSITION 

There is little to say as to special precautions to 
be taken in the management of galvanizing solutions. 



192 



The Modern Electroplater 



If the work has been carefully cleaned no difficulty 
will be experienced in obtaining a perfect coating. 
The only possible exception to this statement is the 
handling of iron castings which, because of their 
porous nature, are difficult to clean. The best solution 



■Brake 




''■Driving Steam Outlet- 
Pulley 

Fig. 106. — Metal Drying Apparatus Arranged with Bottom 
Discharge 

(General Platers' Supply Co.) 



to the problem, in this instance, is to clean them elec- 
trically in an alkaline bath composed of equal parts 
of caustic soda, sodium cyanide, and sodium carbo- 
nate dissolved in water. The tank should be of steel 
since it composes the anode. The casting is connected 
to the negative line and acts as the cathode. A cur- 
rent pressure of 6 to 8 volts is sufficient to clean the 



Electro-Galvanizing 193 

work in a few minutes, provided the action of the 
gas thrown off at the surface of the casting appears 
vigorous. Sand blasting is also an excellent method 
of cleaning work for zinc plating, no chemical treat- 
ment being required after such an operation. 

MECHANICAL MACHINERY FOR ELECTRO- 
GALVANIZING 

While automatic machinery is employed in the de- 
position of many metals, the greatest number and 
variety is found in machines designed especially for 
electro-galvanizing. The subject of galvanizing is 
one so broad that it cannot be discussed in this volume. 
Merely casual observation of the iron and steel ar- 
ticles about us in our homes, in the industries, on the 
farms — shows that the majority are protected from 
rust and other corrosion by galvanizing. To compete 
with the low cost of hot galvanizing, automatic plat- 
ing machinery must be used, thereby allowing quan- 
tity production. The commercial electroplater, who 
finds a demand for such work, will be wise to study 
the modern plating machinery to determine the extent 
to which such devices would increase the quality and 
quantity of his output. 



CHAPTER IX 
POLISHING, BUFFING AND LACQUERING 

The Polishing Boom — The Motor Driven Lathe — The Belt- 
Driven Lathe — Overhanging Lathes — Belt Strapping 
— Grinding Lathes — Surface Grinders — Portable Grind- 
ers — Dust Collector Hoods — Polishing — Polishing Wheels 
— Gluing the Wheels — Cleaning the Wheels — Emery 
Applications — The Glue Heater — Emery Trough — Buf- 
fing — Buffing Wheels — Buffing Compositions — Speed of 
Buffs — Scratch Brushes — Burnishing Barrel — Lacquer- 
ing — The Lacquer Eoom — Lacquer Application — Colored 
Lacquer. 

THE POLISHING ROOM 

All grinding, polishing, and buffing operations, be- 
cause of the abrasive dust thrown from the wheels, 
must be performed in a room isolated from the plating 
tanks. In arranging the floor plan, several important 
features must be considered. The polishing lathes, 
for instance, must be so situated that the operators 
face the light as they work, thereby eliminating con- 
flicting shadows. On the other hand, sufficient space 
must be allowed between the lathes for the storage 
of work, thus making it possible to continue opera- 
tions without moving from the wheel. 

Besides the polishing and buffing machines, a well- 
equipped polishing room should be provided with a 
ball burnisher, tumbling barrels, and sand-blast ap- 
paratus. These latter two have already been de- 

194 



Polishing Lathes 195 

scribed in some detail and, although they are part 
of the polishing-room equipment, will not require 
further consideration in this chapter. 

Power for driving the machinery may be supplied 
by a motor of the correct capacity and speed. If the 
motor is located in the polishing room, dust-proof or 
protected bearings should be provided. It is seldom 
necessary to provide a motor for each machine ; power 
may be transmitted to a number of machines through 
line shafts and counter shafts. 

THE MOTOR-DRIVEN LATHE 

The most simple type of polishing or buffing lathe 
is direct motor-driven, the armature shafts, extended 
beyond the bearings, serving as the arbor for the 
wheel. This extension may be made on either or both 




Fig. 107. — Polishing and Buffing Motor Lathe 
(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

sides of the motor. Particular care must be exercised 
in the protection of the bearings and commutator 
against the injurious emery dust from the wheel. A 
fully-enclosed motor, as illustrated in Fig. 107, should 
be secured, if possible. It will be noted that even 



196 The Modern Electroplater 

the oil holes and cups are omitted, self-oiling bearings 
being used. 

The advantage of this single unit machine is ap- 
parent. It may be placed where most convenient, on 
a bench or on a column, without regard to location 
of overhead shafting. Again, such units may be 
added to the equipment without causing a drain upon 
the existing power plant. 

THE BELT-DRIVEN LATHE 

Belt-driven lathe heads form the standard equip- 
ment for many polishing rooms. According to the 
shop requirements, they can be secured with flat, 




Fig. 108. — Polishing and Buffing Head on Column 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

cone, or grooved pulleys. The bearings are dust- 
proof and are so constructed that adjustment for 
wear can be made when necessary. Ball bearings are 



Polishing Lathes 



197 



sometimes employed on the small machines. A 
column, npon which the lathe head can be mounted, 
can be used or the lathe can be secured to the work- 




* 



Fig. 109. — Polishing and Buffing Lathe 
(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 




Fig. 110. — View of Lathe Arranged for Belting from Shaft 
Below the Floor 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 



198 



The Modern Electroplate)' 



table. The spindle ends are usually tapered with 
screw points, but a straight-threaded arbor may be 
provided if desired. The several illustrations show 
polishing and buffing lathes for both light and heavy 




Fig. 111. — Overhanging Polishing Lathe 

(A. P. Munning- & Co.) 

duty, that in Fig. 108 shows a polishing and buffing 
head mounted on a column. The simple lathe in Fig. 
109 is a plain bearing form, and that in Fig. 110 is 
a heavier type adapted to be driven by belting from 
shafting placed below it. 



Polishing Lathes 199 

OVERHANGING LATHES 

An overhanging lathe, such as is shown in Fig. Ill, 
is adapted to all classes of work. The overhang per- 
mits its use on large work of irregular shape, with- 
out interference with the column. 

BELT STRAPPING 

A belt-strapping attachment may be conveniently 
used in connection with a polishing head. For the 
wheel is substituted a flanged pulley. At a distance, 




Fig. 112. — Belt Strapping Attachment 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

depending upon the length of the belt, a second pulley 
support is secured to the floor. This support, as is 
clearly indicated in Fig. 112, may be adjusted to 
tighten or loosen the belt. There are many classes 
of work which can be polished with ease on this 



200 The Modern Electroplater 

device, which would be handled with difficulty on a 
wheel. 

GRINDING LATHES 

A grinding lathe is rigidly constructed, but in 
general appearance is similar to the standard polish- 




Fig. 113. — Motor Driven Grinder 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 

ing head. For convenience, a rest is provided as 
well as a container for water. It is quite important 
to place substantial guards around emery or composi- 



Grinders 



201 



tion wheels. Such protection may save much damage 
to property and injury to workmen should the wheel 
burst while running at a high speed. Another use- 




Fig. 114. — Simple Glass Shield to Protect Eyes from Emery 

Dust 



ful device is a glass shield, Fig. 114, to protect the 
eyes from flying chips or dust. This shield may be 
easily constructed to suit any special requirements. 



PORTABLE GRINDERS 

For heavy castings or large objects, a portable 
grinding apparatus is most useful. This simple de- 
vice consists of a flexible shaft equipped with a pul- 
ley at one end and a spindle at the other extremity 
for a polishing or grinding wheel. The pulley end 
is anchored to the floor. A round belt, passing be- 
tween a grooved line shaft pulley and the anchored 
pulley, drives the polishing or grinding wheel. The 



202 



The Modern Electroplate?' 



workman moves the wheel over the work instead of 
vice versa, as when using a lathe-mounted grinder. 




•■■■■■■HI 



Fig. 115. — Disc Surface Grinder and Polisher 

(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 



SURFACE GRINDERS 



A disc-surface grinder and polisher is shown in 
Fig. 115. As will be noted, a horizontal steel disc 
is secured to an upright driving shaft. A cloth circle 



Dust Collectors 



203 



is cemented to the disc, sized with a suitable grain of 
emery. The steel disc can be easily removed, re- 
versed, or replaced by another disc. This machine 




Fig. 116. — Press for Gluing Emery Cloth to Grinder Discs. 
(Bennett O'Connell Co.) 

is exceptionally useful for the preparation of objects 
presenting flat surfaces. 

A special press, Fig. 116, is required for cementing 
the emery cloth to the steel disc. 



DUST COLLECTOR HOODS 

Polishing, buffing, and grinding operations produce 
much metallic and abrasive dust. Such dust, if not 
removed as soon as formed, fills the air, settles upon 
finished work, and injures the health of the workmen. 
Even though many state laws require that suitable 
ventilating devices be provided in rooms devoted to 
work of this nature, the removal of abrasive dust 



204 The Modern Electroplater 

should be considered also from the standpoint of ef- 
ficiency. Fresh air and clean surroundings are 
productive of efficient work. 

While open windows or roof ventilators will assist 
in maintaining air circulation, the only positive 




Fig. 117. — Hood with Adjustable Top 
(General Platers' Supply Co.) 

method is a blower system. If hoods, such as illus- 
trated in Fig. 117, are placed around the polishing, 
buffing, and grinding wheels, and each hood connected 
through a pipe to an exhaust fan, all of the dust 
particles can be collected as they are thrown from the 
wheel. A very satisfactory motor driven fan for ven- 
tilating the plating room is shown in Fig. 118. 



Dust Collectors 



205 




Fig. 118. — Motor Driven Ventilating Fan 

(Wagner Electric Mfg. Co.) 




Fig. 119. — Wooden Polishing Wheel 



206 The Modem Electroplater 

POLISHING 

The machinery required for grinding, polishing, 
and burring operations has been described. It is 
therefore necessary to consider the preparation and 




Fig. 120. — Canvas Polishing Wheel 

use of the wheels employed to obtain the various 
surface finishes. 

Polishing is accomplished with disc wheels on whose 
perimeter emery is set in glue. Such wheels are con- 
structed of wood covered with leather, or formed of 
many layers of canvas, felt, leather or similar ma- 
terials. 

POLISHING WHEELS 

The wooden wheel is constructed, as a rule, of %- 
inch discs glued together, the alternate layers with 
the grain crossed, and dried under pressure. A 



Polishing Wheels 



207 



leather band is secured to the circumference, and it 
is upon this surface that the emery is glued. Wooden 



X 



or 



o c * <§, 



Pig. 121.— Felt Polishing Wheel 







Fig. 122. — Loose Sheepskin Polishing Wheel 

wheels are available in any diameter over 8 inches 
and any thickness greater than 1 inch. 



208 The Modem Electroplater 




Fig. 123. — Bull Neck Polishing Wheel 




Tig. 124. — Cross Section of Compress Wheel 



Polishing Wheels 209 

The canvas wheel, while often less expensive than 
other types, is quite serviceable. It is built up of 
many layers of strong, tightly-woven canvas discs 
cemented together. An advantage claimed for this 
wheel is its resilience. This assists materially in 
lessening fatigue of the workman, 




Fig. 125. — Polishing Wheel Cleaner 
(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

Felt, cloth, and paper wheels are sometimes used, 
their action being similar to the canvas. 

The all-leather polishing wheel is especially adapt- 
able to fast, hard grinding. Because of its elasticity 
or pliability, it quickly adjusts itself to any un- 
evenness in the emery coating. This quality allows a 
longer life to the emery surface. If desired, the 
leather wheel may have its polishing surface so 
treated that it will accomplish the identical results 
of the emery or carborundum wheel. Again the 



210 The Modern Electroplater 




:_ -CO.: £-.&■; 



Tig. 126. — Huntington Emery Wheel Dresser for Truing 
Wheels While Running at Full Speed. 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 




Fig. 127. — Balancing Tool for Polishing Wheels, Pulleys, 
Armatures, etc. 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 



Polishing Wheels 211 

surface may be formed to fit any particular work. 
For articles having irregular edges, a soft sheep-skin 
wheel produces the best results. Various forms of 
polishing wheels are shown in Figs. 119 to 124 in- 
clusive. 

CLEANING THE WHEEL 

After prolonged use and many glue and emery 
applications, the polishing surface becomes rough 
and uneven. The best remedy is to remove entirely 
the thick coating when a new cutting surface may be 
applied. A polishing wheel cleaner, similar to that 
shown in Fig. 125, may be employed for this work. 
By placing the worn wheel in the machine, and al- 
lowing it to run for a few minutes with the water 
just touching the rollers, all of the glue and emery 
will be removed. Should such a device be unavailable, 
place the wheel on the lathe and loosen the emery 
particles by pressing a rough metallic edge, such as a 
broken casting, against the revolving wheel face. The 
surface may then be cut down by the aid of a wheel 
trimmer, an instrument which is shown in Fig. 126. 
It may be further smoothed by wetting the wheel 
with a piece of water-soaked waste or cloth held with 
one hand while a stone, manufactured for such pur- 
poses, is held against the surface with the other hand. 
As soon as the prepared surface is dry, the usual 
glue and emery applications may be made. A balanc- 
ing stand to test the wheel for rotative balance is 
shown in Fig. 127. 

EMERY APPLICATIONS 

It may be well to add a word of caution in regard 
to the gluing operation. Unless some degree of care 



212 The Modern Electroplater 

is exercised, a wheel prepared for fine work will have 
a polishing surface sprinkled with a few grains of 
coarse emery left on it by the glue brush. Perhaps 
the brush or glue pot, in such instances, had previ- 
ously been used in preparing a coarse emery wheel. 
A wheel surface containing several grades of emery 
cannot possibly be used with any expectation of pro- 
ducing fine work. 

It is possible to use the same polishing wheel for 
either roughing or fining operations. While the wheel 
may be run dry for iron or steel fining it is best to 
apply slight quantities of tallow for brass work. 

Grease wheels are usually set up with a fine grade 
of emery. Oil may be used with success for keeping 
the grease wheel polishing surface lubricated, but the 
emery deposit will not be as well preserved as when 
tallow is applied. Experience has shown that a coarse- 
grained material, such as cast iron, will finish with 
best results when No. 140 emery is used. No. 160 
emery is required for the fine-grained malleable iron, 
drawn-steel parts, drop forgings, and the like. Old 
emery is removed in the usual manner and new ap- 
plications are made as previously directed. 

In general, it is a good policy to keep several wheels 
prepared and held in reserve. The extra cost is 
negligible in comparison to the expense of holding 
up production at some critical time. Without fail, 
all wheels should be inspected each evening, and 
should the examination show that new deposits are 
required, the polishing surfaces should be applied be- 
fore closing up the shop. Thus all wheels will be dry 
and in good condition the following morning. Canvas 



Polishing Wheels 213 

wheels, which become soft, may be hardened by first 
immersing the perimeter of the wheel in hot water 
to a depth of several inches. The wheel is then rolled 
back and forth so that the heat will penetrate every 




Fig. 128. — A Modern Steam Heated Glue Container 
(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

point on the circumference. After this operation, 
it is placed in a press or between two boards. If 
the latter are used, some heavy object should be 
piled upon the top board so that the wheel will dry 
under pressure. 



214 The Modern Electro plater 

THE GLUE HEATER 

It is not possible to heat glue in a make-shift con- 
tainer and expect to secure a clear, flowing liquid 
free from foreign matter. Under no circumstances 
should the glue-pot be placed directly upon the heat- 
ing element unless surrounded by a water jacket. 
Fig. 128" illustrates an excellent type of glue heater. 
It will be noticed that there are several glue contain- 
ers. This arrangement allows a separate pot for each 
of several similar grades of emery and the danger 
of coarse grains mixing with finer grades through 
the medium of one container is eliminated. 

GLUING THE WHEELS 

It is a simple matter to prepare a polishing wheel, 
but care must always be exercised to see that the job 
is neatly done. If the wheel is new, several coats 
of glue and emery are required to build up a cutting 
surface. Place the wheel in the lathe, and while it is 
turning, use sandpaper to remove any uneven points. 
Apply a thin coat of hot glue, free from foreign mat- 
ter. The wheel may continue running for a time 
until the glue is nearly hard when a wet cloth should 
be pressed against the revolving glued surface. This 
procedure will produce a smooth face for the emery 
coating. If the polishing lathe is not required, the 
wheel may remain on the arbor until thoroughly dry. 
A new wheel, since there is no emery body to build 
upon, should be given two coats of glue and emery. 
A drying period is allowed between the coatings. 



Buffing Wheels 215 

EMERY TROUGH 

There is no more simple method of applying emery 
to the polishing wheel than through the use of an 
emery trough, such as is shown in Fig. 129. A glue 




Fig, 129. — Emery Trough 

(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

application is made to the surface of the wheel and 
the latter is then rolled through the trough in which 
is the desired grade of emery. 

BUFFING 

Buffing is the process of finishing metal surfaces 
by the use of cloth wheels charged with a special 
composition. 

BUFFING WHEELS 

Buffing wheels, more intimately termed "buffs," 
are constructed of less rigid material than polishing 
wheels. For this reason there is more "give" to 
them, requiring less pressure to produce the desired 
results. Materials such as bleached and unbleached 
muslin, sheeting, canton flannel, denim, and light 
duck are used extensively. To give maximum wear, 
the layers or discs of cloth are arranged with the 



216 The Modern Electroplater 




Fig. 130.— Woolen Cloth Buffs 




Fig. 131. — Buff Leather Wheels. Note They May Be Turned 
to Special Shapes to Facilitate Buffing Different Articles 



Buffing Wheels 



217 



threads crossing each other in different directions. A 
number of such discs are assembled into sections 
about % 6 inch thick and stitched together, the stitch- 
ing being in concentric circles y 4 inch apart, Any 
number of these sections may then be cemented to- 







Fig. 132.— Cotton Wick Buff Wheel 



gether under pressure to secure the desired wheel 
thickness. Typical woolen cloth buffs are shown in 
Fig. 130. 

It is not possible here to give the type of buffs re- 
quired for the various forms of work. Each manu- 
facturer separates his product into various grades 
and for each he claims special advantages. While, 
in general, it might be said that unbleached muslin 
is used to best advantage in buffing silverware and 
other fine work, bleached muslin for brass, copper, 
and heavily-nickeled parts, sheeting for gold and 
silver, yet experience and the manufacturer's advice 



218 The Modern Electroplater 

will best tell the exact grade required to produce the 
finest results. These wheels may be formed to handle 
various classes of work as the buff leather wheels are 
in Fig. 131. A cotton-wick buff wheel is shown in 
Fig. 132. 

BUFFING COMPOSITIONS 

Various compositions may be used with buffing 
wheels to increase the cutting speed or assist in form- 
ing a smooth finish. Tripoli, crocus, pumice, lime, 




Fig. 133. — Stubless Triplex Buff 



and rouge, marketed perhaps under a trade name, 
are all efficient. Tripoli is a silicious substance and 
an excellent abrasive. There is nothing in its com- 
position to assist in holding the particles together or 
to make it cling to the wheel surface. Tallow or other 
grease is therefore mixed with the tripoli for con- 



Abrasive Compositions 219 

venience in applying the composition. It can be ob- 
tained in many degrees of fineness. 

Crocus is a red iron oxide. It is prepared in both 




Fig. 134. — Lump Pumice 
(Crown Rheostat & Supply Co.) 

powder and cake form. Crocus is used on work re- 
quiring a high polish and fine finish. 

Pumice stone, as its name implies, is composed of 
pumice usually imported from Italy. Very excellent 
"old brass" finishes may be obtained with its use. 

Lime compositions can be obtained in powder form 
ready to mix with grease or water. While they are 
especially good compounds for nickel, copper alloys 
can also be readily finished with them to a high luster. 

Rouges, formed from oxides, are usually red or 
black in color. Red rouge is the most popular and is 
used for coloring and fine polishing. Black rouge 
is manufactured for buffing materials on which the 
red color would be objectionable. 

Rotten stone may be obtained in both powdered and 



220 The Modern Electroplater 

lump form. It has much the same characteristics 
as the foregoing abrasives. 

Emery can be obtained in cake form, the emery 
being mixed with the hard grease of the cakes. It 




Fig. 135.— Finishing Composition in Cake Form 

(A. P. Munning & Co.) 

may also be secured, as is the case of the other com- 
positions, in barrel quantities, the mixture of grease 
and abrasive having the same qualities as are found 
in the cake form. 




Tig. 136.— Cutting Down Composition in Cake Form 
(A. P. Munning & Co.) 

Lump pumice is shown at Fig. 134 and the crocus 
composition used for coating buffing wheels is made 



Speed of Buffs 



221 



11,000 



10,000 



9,000 



8,000 



7,000 



^6,000 
5,000 
1,000 
3,000 
2,000 

i.ooqL 



V 






























A 






























V 


. 




























\ 


\ 































v\ 




























\ 


\ 


V 


























\ 


A 


A 


k -o 
























\ 


\ 






r 






















\ 


\ 




























V 


\ 








h 




















\ 


\ 










































h 


* c 






























"V^ 
S5&* 




























ks 


?<? 












V 














& 


fe 






>n >> 








\ 


V 










s^ 




& 
















S 


v 








f& 


























$o ( 


7 n 


























*"^ 


r^ 



















































6 7. 



10 II 12 13 14 
Diameter of Buf f 



15 16 17 18 



Fig. 137. — Speed of Buffs 
(Courtesy of A. P. Munning & Co.) 

The above chart shows at what speed any size buff must 
be run in order to give a predetermined peripheral or cutting 
speed at the face. For example, suppose we have an 18-inch 
buff and wish to have 14,000 feet of the edge of the buff pass 
the surface of the work per minute. Taking the 18-inch line 
on the base, and following it up to where it crosses the 14,000 
curve, then following horizontally to the left, we find that 
the buff must have a speed of about 3,000 revolutions per 
minute. 



222 The Modern Electro plater 

up into the handy cake form shown in Fig. 135. A 
cutting down composition may also be procured 
molded into cakes, as shown in Fig. 136. 

SPEED OF BUFFS 

No definite advice can be given relative to the 
speed of polishing and buffing wheels. Only the work- 
man, by watching carefully the work he is producing, 
can judge whether the speed is correct. The chart 
shown in Fig. 137, however, may be used as a safe 
guide toward the regulation of buffing speeds. 

SCRATCH BRUSHES 

There are many instances where treatment with a 
steel or brass scratch brush improves the surface of 
an article. Many pleasing effects may be secured 
on dipped or plated articles if they are lightly 
touched against a rotating scratch brush. As has 
been previously stated, the final metal deposit is much 
improved if the work is removed from the tank, 
scratch brushed to lay down the grain of the metal,' 
and returned to the solution for the final plating 
operation. Surfaces thus treated are exceptionally 
durable. Illustration of a scratch brush is shown in 
Fig. 104. 

BURNISHING BARREL 

A power-driven ball-burnishing barrel provides a 
rapid and quite effective method of burnishing small 
articles, either before or after plating. Because small 
steel balls are utilized as burnishing agents, this proc- 
ess is similar to hand work with the exception that 






Burnishing 223 

several thousand operations are performed at each 
revolution of the barrel. 

A tumbling barrel cannot be converted for use in 
steel-ball burnishing. Since this work requires great 
tool pressure on the part being burnished, the barrel 




Fig. 138. — Ball Burnishing Machine 
(The Baird Machine Co.) 

must be designed to concentrate the mass of pieces 
and balls to gain such weight as will produce the nec- 
essary pressure on the bottom layers. As a protection 
against excessive bruising, a lining of maple, or other 
hard wood, is provided. 

The burnishing process is quite simple. The pieces 



224 The Modern Electroplater 

to be burnished are placed in the barrel with several 
hundred pounds of small steel balls. There is little 
danger of using too large a quantity of steel balls; 
rather the risk lies in the other direction. A good 
plan is to allow approximately twice the quantity of 
balls as of work, so the articles will not strike against 




Fig. 139. — No Wave Action in a Full Barrel. The "Baird." 
Type of Ball Burnishing Machine 

each other; but in all instances the barrel must be 
completely full. Dissolve six to ten ounces of good 
soap, free from alkali, in a bucket of hot water. As 
soon as this solution is poured into the barrel, the 
cover may be secured in place, and the machine set 
to revolving. 

It is suggested that in selecting the size of the balls 
for burnishing, attention should be given to the char- 
acter of surface of the articles. Steel balls may be 



Burnishing 225 

secured in sizes from % i ncn to y 2 inch in diameter. 
For work having crevices or depressions, the smaller 
size balls will obviously produce the best burnishing 
effect. A mixture of several sizes is permissible. 

The manager of the plating room will find it to 
his advantage to construct the sifting device shown 



- Frame - 
■Semen- 



'! I 



a 



g-j---.-»-j-j------t- ssss : 



"'-Bottom box into which steel balls-fall--' 

Fig. 140. — Separating Device for Use with Steel Ball Burn- 
ishing Barrel 

in Fig. 140. It will be seen that an upper frame with 
a screen bottom rests upon a water-tight box. The 
latter has the same width as the upper frame but 
is 24 inches longer. Cleats secured to the upper 
edges of the box serve to prevent a side movement of 
the frame, yet allow lengthwise motion. The wire 
mesh of the frame should be of such coarseness that, 
when the contents of the barrel are poured into the 
separating device, the balls will fall through into the 
box beneath, leaving only the burnished articles on 
the screen. The upper frame, after the removal of 
the pieces, may be pushed aside and the steel balls 
returned to the barrel. 

LACQUERING 

Tarnish will soon appear on newly-plated work, 
or articles of brass and copper cleaned by bright dip- 
ping. If, however, such new surfaces are protected 



226 The Modern Electroplater 

from moisture and chemicals by a lacquer coating, 
the original luster is preserved. Moreover, the ar- 
ticle may then be cleaned with a damp cloth without 
endangering the finish. Most of the brass and nickel- 
plated hardware, automobile accessories, electrical 
fixtures, and scientific instruments manufactured at 
the present time, are treated with either transparent 
or colored lacquer. 

The application of lacquer calls for skill, clean 
materials and patience. The consistency of the fluid 
must also always be given careful consideration. If 
the body is too heavy, a thinner one of the same grade 
as the lacquer must be added to prevent the formation 
of ridges or ripples. On the other hand, a lacquer 
that is too thin will not wear well and may show 
iridescent colors. The same precautions must be ex- 
ercised in preparing the work for lacquering as for 
plating. Grease or moisture is often the cause of a 
cloudy or spotted finish. Care must therefore be 
taken to see that steam from the plating and dipping 
baths does not condense on the articles being prepared 
for the lacquer application. It is not advisable, how- 
ever, to hold the work in a drying oven until ready 
for lacquering, since the best results are obtained 
when the temperature of the articles, surrounding 
atmosphere and lacquer are as closely identical as 
possible. 

THE LACQUER ROOM 

Ideal conditions for lacquering can only be realized 
when a separate room is equipped for the work. Such 
a room should be laid out with as much care and fore- 
thought as possible. Ventilators should be so designed 



Lacquering 227 

that there will be a constant supply of fresh air and 
a corresponding removal of all fumes. Dust and 
moisture, the presence of which will result in inferior 
work, must positively be eliminated. Efficient lac- 
quering can be accomplished only when the light is 
sufficiently strong to enable the operator to easily see 
the results obtained. Since the materials used in com- 
pounding lacquer are quite inflammable, the incan- 
descent lamp is the only artificial light that may 
safely be employed. Stoves should not be used in 
the lacquer room and heat must, therefore, be ob- 
tained from steam or hot water radiators. 

A large part of the unpleasant fumes can be elimi- 
nated from the work room if the lacquered articles 
are placed in a ventilated drying oven until the coat- 
ing has hardened. An oven for this purpose may be 
constructed in one corner of the room, and should be 
of sufficient capacity to hold the maximum estimated 
production. Suitable racks should be placed about 
the walls for the small articles, while provision should 
be made for hanging larger work from ceiling hooks. 
The oven temperature should approximate 100° F. 
This may be maintained by steam coils, the regulat- 
ing valves being placed outside the oven to prevent 
steam from escaping inside. 

LACQUER APPLICATION 

Lacquer can be applied either by spraying, brush- 
ing, or dipping. Spraying is now considered the 
cheapest and quickest method of lacquering. Shops, 
therefore, which can obtain a compressed-air supply 
will find it most advantageous to install the spray 
system. Under an air pressure of fifty or sixty 



228 The Modern Electroplater 

pounds per square inch, a spray "pistol", in the 
hands of a skilled workman, will quickly distribute a 
thin coating over the most difficult surface. Even 
should the compressed air supply be unavailable, a 
small hand sprayer will give satisfactory results. 




Fig. 141. — Method of Lacquering by Dipping 

(Hanson & Van Winkle Co.) 



For brush applications the lacquer should be 
thinned down to the minimum point consistent with 
good work. A soft bristle, badger hair brush should 
be used, flowing the lacquer over the surface in long, 
even strokes. A perfect finish cannot be obtained 
with a stiff, inferior brush. The method of lacquering 



Lacquering 229 

by dipping, shown in Fig. 141, is used for quick 
results. 

Where it is necessary to lacquer large amounts of 
articles in a minimum time, and where quantity pro- 
duction is desired rather than quality of finish, the 
dipping process will prove superior to other methods. 
The dip tank should be as small as possible, yet of 



// / M \ \ WNIX 



Fig. 142.— Simple Arrangement of Lacquer Dip, Drain Boards, 
and Drying Rack 



sufficient size to handle the articles to be coated. The 
tank itself should be either enameled iron, glass, or 
earthenware. Avoid the use of tanks of metal, such 
as copper, brass, zinc, or galvanized iron; these will 
soon destroy the original color of the lacquer. Drain 
trays, arranged as shown in Fig. 142, will permit the 
surplus lacquer to flow back to the tank as it drips 
from the dipped work. If a ventilating hood is placed 
directly over the dip tank and drain trays, the work- 
man will not suffer any inconvenience from the fumes. 
A cover for the tank should be provided to prevent 



230 The Modern Electroplater 

evaporation and to keep out dust, grease, and mois- 
ture. 

Iridescent coloring caused by too thin lacquer, 
or white, cloudy spots resulting from grease, may 
often be removed by the application of a second coat 
of lacquer. If this fails to repair the faulty work, 
the lacquer may be entirely removed by dipping in 
hot potash or lye solution. 

After cleaning in fresh water and thoroughly 
drying, the fresh application of lacquer can be made. 

COLORED LACQUER 

While transparent lacquers are used to a great 
extent, color finishes can be employed with excellent 
results. Prepared dyes can be obtained and added 
to transparent lacquer to produce the desired shade. 
It is a good plan to mix the colored preparation the 
day before it is required, since standing improves 
the solution. Manufacturers, as a rule, produce dyes 
for special lacquer work and the operator will do well 
to consult the producer, or a catalogue, to ascertain 
the grade required for his particular needs. 



CHAPTER X 
USEFUL REFERENCE DATA 

(A) The Maintenance and Eepair of a Plating Generator — 
Building Up — Low Voltage — Eeversal of Current Direc- 
tion — Commutator Sparking — Armature Troubles — Test- 
ing for Open Circuit — Testing for Short Circuit — Test- 
ing for Grounds — Field Troubles — Bearing Troubles — 
Unusual Noises — -(B) The Transmission of Power — Shaft 
Drive — Pulleys — Belts — Eules for Speed — (C) Eesuscita- 
tion from Electric Shock or Asphyxiation — Quick Action 
■ — Preliminary Treatment — Loosen Clothing — Eesuscita- 
tion — Warmth — Patience — (D) Antidote for Poisons — 
(E) Conductivity of Common Metals — (F) Comparison 
of Thermometers — (G) Fluxes for Soldering or Welding 
— (H) Miscellaneous Data — Amperes Eequired to Plate 
One Square Foot of Surface — Weight of Metal Deposited 
per Amperehour — Eound Copper Conductors for Plating 
Currents — Decimal Equivalents. 

(A) THE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF 
A PLATING GENERATOR 

Nothing can so retard plating room production as 
the irregular operation of the generator. An unre- 
liable source of current supply will contribute more 
than any one thing to poor quality of work and the 
general inefficiency of the plant. The plating gen- 
erator is not a machine of mystery. A little care 
exercised in its management will reward the opera- 
tor with constant and unfailing service. At times, 

231 



232 The Modern Electroplater 

however, troubles may arise, and the following sug- 
gestions are made with the purpose of assisting the 
plater to locate and repair them. 

BUILDING UP 

A self-excited generator may not, upon starting, 
produce an e.m.f. This may indicate that the residual 
magnetism in the field poles is insufficient in strength 
to induce an e.m.f. in the armature windings. The 
armature e.m.f. serves to increase the field excitation, 
"building up" the generator as the latter increase 
continues to induce a larger e.m.f. in the armature. 

Should the generator fail to build up, the natural 
inclination would be to search for a break in the 
field circuit. Excessive resistance, caused by poor 
terminal connections, or even light brush contact, 
might also act to prevent building up. Again, a short 
circuit in either the , field, armature, or outside con- 
nections should be looked for. Should investigation 
fail to disclose any mechanical defects, it will be 
necessary to disconnect the field from the armature 
and excite the former for a few moments from some 
outside source. This operation will strengthen the 
residual magnetism. 

LOW VOLTAGE 

Should difficulty be experienced in obtaining the 
rated voltage, some note should be taken of the shunt 
field rheostat to determine whether the resistance is 
excessive. Low voltage is also the result of driving 
the generator at a speed less than that indicated on 
the name plate. This may be checked with a speed 
indicator. 



Generator Troubles 233 

REVERSAL OF CURRENT DIRECTION 

The electroplater will quickly recognize a reversal 
of the current direction. This is caused by a change 
in the residual magnetism when the machine is idle. 
Lightning, an outside current, or magnetic influence 
from a nearby dynamo may effect this reversal in 
polarity. The remedy is to excite the generator field 
for a moment in the correct direction from some 
outside current supply. 

COMMUTATOR SPARKING 

Undoubtedly the most apparent form of genera- 
tor trouble is a sparking commutator. There are 
several causes of poor commutation, the chief of which 
is an overloaded generator. A simple short circuit, 
caused by a bar falling across the supply mains, or 
work touching the anodes in the tanks must be 
guarded against. Perhaps, also, the generator ca- 
pacity may be insufficient for the plating require- 
ments. 

A rough commutator will always cause sparking. 
A dark glazed surface is a condition to be strived for. 
Excessive sparking will quickly groove and pit the 
commutator and unless some remedy is applied, will 
injure it beyond repair. A slightly rough surface 
can be quickly smoothed with fine sand paper. Under 
no circumstances should emery cloth be used, since the 
emery dust, which is a conductor of electricity, may 
lodge between the commutator bars, causing short 
circuits. If the commutator is very rough, the arma- 
ture must be removed from the machine, centered in 
a lathe, and a light cut taken from the pitted copper 
surface. Often, when the brushes vibrate, the cause 



234 The Modern Electroplater 

is discovered to be a high or low commutator bar. 
These bars are often held in place through the aid 
of a threaded ring on the outside of the commutator. 
If possible, the bar should be driven back in place 
and the ring screwed up tight. In this case, it is 
absolutely necessary that the commutator be trued 
up in a lathe. To keep the commutator surface clean, 
it should be treated once a week with vaseline ap- 
plied with a cloth free from lint. Too much lubrica- 
tion is, of course, detrimental, since it gums on the 
brushes and retains dust and grit. 

Poor brush contact is another cause of faulty com- 
mutation. Graphite-treated woven wire or special 
brushes for plating generators should always be used. 
The brush should never fit so tightly in the holder 
but that the spring can press it snugly against the 
commutator. The brush pressure may be deemed 
correct when its bearing against the commutator is 
about 2 pounds per square inch of contact surface. 
A small spring scale may be used to determine this 
pressure. It must be remembered that if the brushes 
bear too hard they will grind and the copper dust 
thus formed will lodge between the segments, caus- 
ing short circuits and sparking. 

Weak field excitation may be the cause of sparking 
brushes. Usually this condition may be determined 
by noting the voltage across the terminals; a low 
voltage indicating insufficient field excitation. The 
remedies for this trouble have already been dis- 
cussed. 

Short circuits and grounds in the armature will 
produce sparking at the commutator. Tests and 
remedies for this condition will be described later. 



Generator Troubles 235 

ARMATURE TROUBLES 

Should armature trouble appear, it may be due 
to an open circuit, a short circuit, or a ground in the 
winding. Excessive heating may also be caused by 
overloading the generator or by conduction from a 
defective, hot bearing. 

TESTING FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 

The usual methods employed in testing for broken 
armature leads and open circuits are as follows: A 
strip of brass is substituted for one of the brushes, 
so that but one commutator segment is touched by it 
at a time. A low reading ammeter is then connected 
through a low voltage battery to the brass strip and 
the other regular brush. The armature is rotated by 
hand very slowdy and the ammeter readings noted. 
Most plating generators have two leads soldered to 
each commutator bar; a break in one of these leads 
causes a reduced ammeter deflection ; a break in both 
causes a complete open circuit and there is no deflec- 
tion indicated. The broken lead may be traced from 
the bar upon w 7 hich the brass strip rests at the mo- 
ment of reduced ammeter deflection. 

Open circuits are found by testing in a manner 
similar to that just described. Instead, however, of 
connecting one meter lead to the regular brush, con- 
tact is made with the commutator by a second brass 
strip. This latter strip is so held that it at all times 
touches a bar adjacent to one upon which the first 
brass strip rests. As in the first test, an open circuit 
is indicated by no deflection of the ammeter. It is, 
of course, understood that there will be no deflection 



236 The Modern Electro plater 

of the pointer as the strips pass over the insulating 
mica when the armature is rotated. There should 
be no confusion of this with the action of the meter 
when an actual broken circuit is found. 

TESTING FOR SHORT CIRCUITS 

A short circuit in an armature is found with the 
same equipment as required for the open circuit test. 
As the two brass strips are touched against adjacent 
commutator bars and the armature slowly rotated, 
an ammeter reading above normal indicates a short 
circuit in the coil section connected to one of the bars. 

TESTING TOR GROUNDS 

A ground is any connection between a winding and 
the core or frame. Grounds in an armature are 
usually found by connecting a battery to the brushes 
of the generator. A low-reading voltmeter is then 
observed while one of its leads is touched against 
each commutator bar, the other lead being in contact 
with the shaft or core iron. A voltmeter deflection 
indicates, of course, that there is a ground or con- 
nection between the core and the winding. The 
ground may be localized by noting the bar where the 
voltmeter shows the least deflection. 

FIELD TROUBLES 

As a rule, the field gives very little trouble. Ex- 
cessive heating may be traced to a short circuit, to 
high terminal voltage, or to the conduction of heat 
from the armature. A short circuit may be easily 
located by noting, with a voltmeter, the difference 
of potential cross each field winding. An open cir- 



Generator Troubles 237 

cuit or an exceptionally high resistance can be noted 
by connecting a battery and ammeter in series with 
each of the coils in turn. If there is no deflection 
of the pointer it will naturally indicate an open cir- 
cuit. 

BEARING TROUBLE 

Bearing friction absorbs power, causes wear, and, 
if the friction is excessive, produces great heat. 
Clean, smooth bearing surfaces, between which is a 
thin film of good lubricant, should show but a slight 
rise in temperature. A good grade of mineral oil 
should be freely used ; if possible, the oil wells should 
be filled each day. Abrasive dust from the polishing 
room may work into the bearings, causing a scored 
and roughened shaft. Bearing alignment is quite 
important, as is also the shaft and bearing fit. Pre- 
cautions should be taken to guard against bending 
the shaft, since excessive vibration will then result. 

UNUSUAL NOISES 

Any large generator produces certain character- 
istic noises while operating. It is the unusual noise 
that should be at once noted by the plater and an 
investigation made as to its cause, A slipping belt 
gives a screeching sound. This may be due to in- 
sufficient belt tension, but usually it is caused hy an 
overload thrown on the generator. Adjustments 
should be so made that there will be little pounding 
of the belt. If a scraping noise is heard, the genera- 
tor should be immediately stopped. It may be found 
that a pole shoe is loose, that the bearings have worn 
to such an extent that the armature is rubbing 
against the field poles, or that the armature is un- 



238 The Modern Electroplater 

balanced. Commutator noises may be due to rough- 
ness, chattering of brushes, or the need of a lubricant. 
Remedies for these troubles have already been sug- 
gested. 

(B) THE TRANSMISSION OF POWER 

"While the subject of mechanical power transmis- 
sion does not concern the electroplater to so great a 
degree as it does a machine shop superintendent, yet 
a few simple precautions taken at first will prevent 
interrupted service at a later time. 

SHAFT DRIVE 

If it is necessary to use overhead shaft drive for 
the various machines, care should be exercised to 
place the hangers in alignment. Should the distance 
between the hangers be so great as to allow the shaft 
to bend, even slightly, the wear on the bearings will 
be excessive. Compute carefully the size of shaft 
required to transmit the required power; then allow 
a good factor of safety. It will be remembered that 
the slower the shaft speed, the less power it will 
safely transmit. Countershafts, which are run at 
a slow speed should, therefore, have a larger diameter 
than the drive shafts. 

PULLEYS 

Ordinarily, paper or wooden pulleys will give bet- 
ter satisfaction than iron ones ; the friction is greater 
and they are much lighter. When pulleys are to be 
added to a shaft, split iron or pressed steel pulleys 
may be used to advantage, since they may be installed 
without disturbing the shaft. 



Power Transmission 239 

BELTS 

Although in many instances it is necessary, on ac- 
count of lack of space, to mount the motor on the 
ceiling, such mounting demands a vertical belt drive; 
an inclined belt will give better results, and one that 
is horizontal is best of all. Long belts need not be 
drawn as tightly as short ones to produce the same 
friction; yet there is a limit even to the length. 
Harmful bearing friction and an injurious side to 
side motion of the belt are direct results of long 
distance between pulley centers. 

RULES FOR SPEED 

The electroplater is often confronted with the prob- 
lem of determining the speed of shafts, countershafts, 
and machines, as well as the size of the required 
pulleys and belts. Such information may be obtained 
from the manufacturers of the apparatus in question, 
but for the convenience of the plater, the following 
rules are quoted, through the courtesy of the Crown 
Eheostat and Supply Co. : 

"To find speed of countershaft in accordance with 
main shaft and machine. Subtract the number of 
revolutions of the main shaft from the number of 
revolutions the machine should make ; divide the re- 
mainder by two. The quotient will show the number 
of revolutions of the countershaft. 

"Example: The main shaft runs 200 revolutions 
per minute, while the machine should run 1,000 revo- 
lutions per minute. Deduct 200 from 1,000, leaving 
800, which divide by 2 ; the quotient will then be 
400, which is the number of revolutions the counter- 
shaft should make. 



240 The Modern Electroplater 

"To find diameter of pulleys on the main shaft. 
Multiply the diameter in inches of the receiving 
pulley of the countershaft by the number of revo- 
lutions the countershaft should make, and divide the 
product by the number of revolutions the main shaft 
makes. 

"Example: The countershaft runs 400, the receiv- 
ing pulley is 7% inches in diameter, and the main- 
shaft runs 200; 400 times iy 2 equals 3,000, which 
divided by 200 equals 15; this is the diameter of 
pulley on main shaft in inches. 

' l To find diameter of pulley on countershaft carry- 
ing belt to machine. Multiply the number of revolu- 
tions the machine should make by the diameter of 
pulley of machine and divide by the number of revo- 
lutions the countershaft makes. 

"Example: Say machine should make 1,000 revo- 
lutions, the diameter of pulley on machine being 6 
inches, and the countershaft making 400 revolutions, 
then multiplying 1,000 by 6 equals 6,000; dividing 
this by 400 gives 15, which should be the diameter 
of pulley carrying belt from countershaft to machine. 

' ' To find speed of a machine. Multiply the number 
of revolutions of the main shaft by the diameter of 
pulley in inches, and divide by the diameter of re- 
ceiving pulley of the countershaft. The result is 
speed of countershaft. Then multiply the number 
of revolutions of countershaft by diameter of trans- 
mitting pulley, and divide by diameter of pulley on 
machine. The result will be speed of machine. It 
should be well understood that no other pulleys but 
those in contact with one belt should be considered. 
To find the horse-power a belt will safely transmit. 



First Aid 211 

Multiply diameter of pulley in inches by its revolu- 
tions per minute and the product by width of belt 
in inches. Divide this product by 3,000 for single 
belting or 2,100 for double belting, and the quotient 
will be the horse-power that can be safely trans- 
mitted. To find the length of the belt. Add the 
diameters of the two pulleys, divide by 2 and multi- 
ply by 3.1416. To this add twice the distance between 
centers of pulleys. This is practically correct where 
pulleys are not very different in size, and are to run 
with short belt. 

"•A belt velocity of 2,600 feet per minute is said 
to give the best results." 

(C) RESUSCITATION FROM ELECTRIC 
SHOCK OR ASPHYXIATION 

It is, of course, understood that the low voltages 
required for electroplating are by no means danger- 
ous to human life. If, however, the plating generator 
is driven by an electric motor, a time may come when 
an inspection or a repair job will expose the work- 
man to an outside power circuit of 220 to 440 volts. 
While a normal, healthy person will usually rally 
promptly from a slight shock at these voltages, in- 
stances are on record of mortalities caused by shock 
from currents of even lower pressure. Since the 
method of resuscitation from electric shock is quite 
similar to that from asphyxiation by poisonous 
vapors, a brief discussion of the subject will ben- 
efit the electroplater who is often exposed to both 
dangers. 



242 The Modern Electroplater 

QUICK ACTION 

Good judgment will prompt, in the ease of any 
accident, the placing of an immediate call for the 
nearest doctor. Realizing that the spark of life is 
hanging by the merest thread, those attending the 
patient will act quickly and continue their efforts 
with patience. In the case of gas or poisonous vapor 
asphyxiation, the patient should be removed at once 
to fresh air before the acts of resuscitation are be- 
gun. Not so with a case of electric shock. The loss 
of a few seconds may cause death; the work of re- 
suscitation should be started at the earliest possible 
moment regardless of the position of the unconscious 
man. 

PRELIMINARY TREATMENT 

If the accident is caused by electric shock, search 
for and remove the wires or other conductors from 
contact with the injured man's body, using a board 
or other non-metallic agent. If the tongue appears 
to be swallowed, pry open the mouth with a stick of 
wood and pull the tongue out using a cloth or hand- 
kerchief to obtain a better grip. The tongue must 
then be held out to prevent it again plugging up the 
throat. 

LOOSEN CLOTHING 

For either shock or asphyxiation, loosen at once 
all clothing. But since the body heat must be re- 
tained to as great extent as possible, do not remove 
any but the tight throat apparel, such as collar or 
scarf. 






First Aid 243 

RESUSCITATION 

Lay the patient on his back, and, if con\ T enient, 
arrange the head lower than the feet. Assume a 
kneeling position at the head of the patient. Grasp- 
ing his arms at the wrists, place them over the lower 
ribs and press, immediately afterward swinging the 
arms directly up and backward, then downward again 
to repeat the pressing operation. Expel and fill 
the man's lungs in this manner sixteen times a minute 
in imitation of the normal breathing action. A hiss- 
ing of the expelled air will indicate the work of 
resuscitation is being carried out correctly. 

If a helper is available, the work may be accom- 
plished more quickly and with promise of greater 
success by having him move the patient's legs, bend- 
ing them at the knees so that the latter move upward 
and toward the breast at the time that the arms are 
extended backward. As the air is expelled from the 
lungs, the legs should be pulled out straight. 

WARMTH 

At all times the patient should be kept as warm as it 
is possible to make him. Wrap the exposed parts in 
blankets without, of course, interfering with the work 
of resuscitation. Do not administer hot or cold drinks 
until the patient is sitting up, as the possibility of 
choking must be avoided. 

PATIENCE 

It may be well to add that consciousness is not al- 
ways restored in a few minutes. Results may not 



244 The Modern Electroplater 

be seen for one, two, or even four hours in severe 
cases. But while there is the faintest spark of life 
there is something well worth working for, and no 
amount of fatigue should cause one to give up. Not 
until death has actually occurred, as may be known 
by the softening of the patients eyeballs, is there no 
hope for success. 



(D) ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS 

The majority of the chemicals used in electroplat- 
ing are poisonous, and workmen should exercise the 
greatest precautions to safeguard their health. Plat- 
ing room utensils should under no circumstances be 
used for drinking cups. It is dangerous practice to 
eat lunches where the chemicals are stored. Work 
that has dropped off the wires into the electrolyte 
should be recovered with some mechanical device; to 
dip the arms into the solution may result in skin 
sores, especially if it is a cyanide solution. In case 
of accident the following remedies will give relief 
until the doctor arrives: 

HYDROCHLORIC ACID 

If the acid solution has been swallowed, require 
the patient to drink tepid water to act as an emetic 
or an alkali solution, such as magnesia, lime, or chalk 
and water, to counteract the effect of the acid. Milk 
or the white of eggs may be used if available. 

SULPHURIC ACID 

Treatment same as for hydrochloric acid poisoning. 



First Aid 245 

NITRIC ACID 

Treatment same as for hydrochloric acid poisoning. 

HYDROCYANIC ACID 

Take hydrogen peroxide internally. If this anti- 
dote is not available, administer a weak solution of 
iron acetate. Employ artificial respiration if neces- 
sary. Keep the patient warm. 

POTASSIUM CYANIDE 

Treatment came as for hydrocyanic acid poisoning. 

LEAD ACETATE 

Administer an emetic ; give milk, white of eggs. 

SILVER NITRATE 

Require the patient to drink salt and water solution. 

SODIUM HYDROXIDE 

Give vinegar, lemon juice, oil, or milk. 

POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE 

Treatment same as for sodium hydroxide poisoning. 

COPPER SALTS 

Administer an emetic, then milk or white of egg. 

MERCURY SALTS 

Require the patient to swallow the white of an egg. 



246 The Modern Electroplater 

ALKALINES 

Since alkalines are the opposite to acids in chemical 
action, weak acid solutions may be employed as anti- 
dotes. Vinegar or lemonade is the best, but if neither 
is available, a very weak solution of nitric or sul- 
phuric acid may be used. It is advisable to give the 
patient a tablespoonful of olive oil a few minutes after 
the acid treatment. 

ACID VAPORS 

Remove the patient at once to a location where there 
is plenty of fresh air. Cause him to inhale ammonia 
vapor. Keep him warm with hot blankets. Give 
hot foot baths. Require him to drink hot coffee, tea, 
or other hot beverage. Note section C. 

BURNS AND SCALDS 

Apply at once a light paste of baking soda or, if 
this is not available, starch or flour. Vaseline, vege- 
table oils, and cream are also soothing. Linseed oil 
mixed with an equal part of lime water makes a good 
dressing. After treating, cover the affected part 
with a light bandage to prevent foreign matter touch- 
ing the wound. 

In the case of acid or alkali burns, wash with run- 
ning water. Acid burns should then be treated with 
lime water and linseed oil, or baking soda and soap 
suds. Eye burns should be bathed with lime water. 

Alkali burns may best be treated by neutralizing 
the alkali with a weak acid, such as lemon juice, 
cider, or vinegar. Eye burns should be treated at 
once with olive oil or a solution of boric acid. 



Reference Data 247 

(E) CONDUCTIVITY OF COMMON METALS 

Copper, because it offers the least resistance to the 
passage of an electric current of any metal except 
silver, is the metal used for most conductors. The 
following table, using silver as a standard, gives the 
relative conductivity of the common metals. "When 
it is noted that brass has approximately 4% times 
the resistance of copper, it will be seen why the latter 
metal is preferred for bus bars and other plating 
room electrical conductors. 

Silver 100.00 

Copper . 99.9 

Gold 80.00 

Aluminum 34.00 

Zinc 29.00 

Brass 22.00 

Platinum 18.00 

Iron 16.8 

Tin 13.1 

Nickel 12.08 

Lead 8.3 

German Silver 7.7 

Mercury 1.7 

(F) COMPARISON OF THERMOMETERS 

Freezing point 32° Fahrenheit 

Do. 0° Centigrade 

Boiling point 212° Fahrenheit 

Do. 100° Centigrade 

To find Fahrenheit reading, Centigrade being 
known : 

F = C X 9/5 + 32° 
To find Centigrade reading, Fahrenheit being 
known : 

C=(F-32) X5/9 



248 The Modern Electroplater 



o 











o 


^-fc-ts^jS*^*^ 




35 














4* 
















to 


^ H? £ H2 ^ * S 12 ^ W 
















a 

C8 
















3 


£*:$!•&£ * * 2|2 ^ * 




a 












ks 












« 




m 






CO 


2 




M 

£ 




-12 Hs ^ -|2 H2 ^ :|2 ^ 2|2 ^ 


K 


5 










O 


05 


^-v 






H 


0> 


6 
O 


8 


o 


H2^H2^H2^^^2|2^ 


O 


d 


>> 
'ft 
ft 

m 

-4— 






Q 

O 
u 


58 
+s 

•a 

35 
© 


O 
Q 




H2^H2^^H2^^|2^2|2 


S5 


eg 


o 

CD 

,4 


O 


o 


H2 ^ ^ H2 ^ H2 H2 ^ :|2 ^ 


a 


s 

c3 


c 
O 


H 
H 
H 




XH2^H2H2^H2^:|2.^ 


o 


Cb 


fe 

£ 






CO 





O 




3 


^ H2 ^ ^ H2 ^ ^ »|2 ^ :|2 


W 


eg 


O 








N 


s 








CO 




Eh 




^^H2^^H2H2^H;^ 




fl 




5 
































0) 






3 


^ H: H: H2 ^ ^ ^ H2 ^ H2 




'Sjd 












c3 












- 

c3 






LO 


X ^ ^ ^ H2 H2 ^ ^ H2 ^ 














o 








; 













; 




+3 






ft 
5 


3 i-O 3 iO 1 3 iO 3 333 










■-J > J (N ION O iO O iO 










< 


H 'H rt H N IN M M 



\ 



Miscellaneous Data 



249 



-? 


^ 


CO 


X 

CO -. 


^ 


-? 


X 
CO 


X 
CO 


X 
<* 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


XX 
co 


co°° 


X 

co 


£ 


X 
CO 


X 
CO 


X 


X 


X 


X 


rH 


£ 


S 


co 


£ 


X 

co . 




X 

co 


X 
CM 


X 


X 


X 


flkO 


i— i 


£ 


cox 


xoo 

COX 


^ 






X 
CO 


X 

-1- 


X 


X 

H- 


^ 


^ 


£ 


£ 


XOO 
eo\ 


X 






X 
CO 


X 

CO 


X 
<* 


X 


$ 


KS|<0 


rH 


X 


S 


xx> 
co 








X 
CO 


CO 


X 


rate 


£ 


* 


$ 


£ 


£ 








X 
IN 


X 
CO 


X 
CO 


& 


* 


^ 


^ 


£ 


£ 








X 
(N 


X 
CO 


X 
(M 


hIss 


a 


sis 


X 


S 


£ 








X 
CO 


X 

co 


X 


^ 


rtj^J 


^ 


^ 


X 


£ 








X 


X 
CO 


X 
CO 


* 


£ 


X 


^ 


£ 


^ 








X 


X 
CO 


X 

CO 


X 


■s 


•s 


S 


^ 


s 








X 
CO 


X 
CO 


X 
CO 


3 
O 


o 


c 
c 


O 

o 

CO 


O 


O 

o 

GO 















X 


X 










«tf 


tH 










s 


^H 


rH 


- 






X 


X 


X 


X 






"* 


-H 


Th 


^ 






. M 


^ 


r-x 


- 


- 


- 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Tf< 


-f 


tM 


^h 


TJH 


-<* 


CO 




..* 


£ 


£ 


- 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


TjH 


H< 


h- 


-t 


-f 


^ 


X 


CO^ 


J 


CO • 


£ 


^ 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


<tf 


-* 


■* 


't 


<* 


^ 


X 






^ 


^ 


CO- 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


<SJH 


^ 


TtH 


-* 


TJH 


TjH 


X 


$ 


\x 


xoc 


\X 


\X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


^ 


^ 


^ 


-* 


<tf 


"* 


£ 


s 


35 


£ 


X 


^ 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


^ 


-f • 


"* 


Tf 


TT 


^ 


X 

CO 


£ 


x 
co 


xoo 

CO . 


co s 


^ 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


•"h 


"* 


H^ 


>* 


Tji 


rp 


£ 


£ 


£ 


co 00 


co" 


•,x 

CO N 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


CM 


(M 


CO 


tH 


-f 


<* 


o 


o 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


c 


o 




CO 


CO 


^ 


O 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


Ol 


CO 



250 The Modern Electroplate?* 

(H) FLUXES FOR SOLDERING OR 
WELDING 

Brass Sal Ammoniac 

Copper Sal Ammoniac 

Lead Resin and Tallow 

Lead Pipes Resin and Sweet Oil 

Iron Borax 

Iron (Tinned) Resin 

Tin Pipes Resin and Sweet Oil 

Zinc Zinc Chloride 



ROUND COPPER CONDUCTORS FOR PLATING 
CURRENTS 



B.&S. 
Gauge 


Dia. 
Inches 


Capacity 
Amperes 


Resistance 

per 1000 

ft. in ohms 


Weight 
per 1000 
ft. in lbs. 


0000 


.460 


300 


.0489 


63 


000 


.409 


245 


.0617 


50 


00 


.364 


215 


.0778 


40 





.324 


190 


.0981 


31 


1 


.289 


160 


.1237 


25 


2 


.258 


135 


.1560 


20 


3 


.230 


115 


.1967 


16 


4 


.204 


100 


.2480 


13 


8 


.129 


60 


.6271 


5 


12 


.080 


30 


1.586 


2 


16 


.050 


15 


4.009 


0.78 



Reference Data 251 

AMPERES REQUIRED TO PLATE ONE 
SQUARE FOOT OF SURFACE 

(Courtesy of A. P. Munning & Co.) 

METAL AMPERES 

Nickel 4 

Brass 6-8 . 

Bronze 6-8 

Copper (Alkali) 6-8 

Copper (Acid) 10-30 

Silver „ . . 2 

Zinc li/ 2 

Gold 10 

DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS 



1/32 


.0312 


17/32 


.5312 


1/16 


.0625 


9/16 


.5625 


3/32 


,0937 


19/32 


.5937 


1/8 


.125 


5/8 


.625 


5/32 


.1562 


21/32 


.6562 


3/16 


.1875 


11/16 


.6875 


7/32 


.2187 


23/32 


.7187 


1/4 


.250 


3/4 


.750 


9/32 


.2812 


25/32 


.7812 


5/16 


.3125 


13/16 


.8125 


11/32 


.3437 


27/32 


.8437 


3/8 


.375 


7/8 


.875 


13/32 


.4062 


29/32 


.9062 


7/16 


.4375 


15/16 


.9375 


15/32 


.4687 


31/32 


.9687 


1/2 


.500 


32/32 


1.000 



252 The Modern Electroplater 

WEIGHT OF METAL DEPOSITED PER 
AMPERE HOUR 

(Courtesy of A. P. Munning & Co.) 

(ENGLISH SYSTEM) 

.0415 oz. Copper (Acid) 



.0836 oz. 


Copper (Cyanide) 


.0862 oz. 


Gold 


.136 oz. 


Lead 


.0377 oz. 


Nickel 


.119 oz. 


Silver 


.0782 oz. 


Tin 


.0428 oz. 


Zinc 


(metric system) 


1.176 grams 


Copper (Acid) 


2.372 grams 


Copper (Cyanide) 


2.444 grams 


Gold 


3.858 grams 


Lead 


1.069 grams 


Nickel 


3.373 grams 


Silver 


2.218 grams 


Tin 


1.213 grams 


Zinc 



Reference Data 253 



WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 

AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHTS 

16 drams 1 ounce 

16 ounces 1 pound 

100 pounds 1 ewt. 

2000 pounds 1 short ton 

2240 pounds 1 long ton 

TROY WEIGHTS 

24 grains 1 dwt. 

20 dwts 1 ounce 

12 ounces 1 pound 

Used for weighing gold, silver, and precious stones. 

APOTHECARIES ' WEIGHTS 

20 grains 1 scruple 

3 scruples 1 dram 

8 drams 1 ounce 

12 ounces 1 pound 

METRIC WEIGHTS 

10 milligrams 1 centigram 

10 centigrams 1 decigram 

10 decigrams 1 gram 

1000 grams 1 kilogram 

ENGLISH LENGTH MEASURE 

12 inches 1 foot 

3 feet 1 yard 

5280 feet 1 mile 



METRIC LENGTH MEASURE 

10 millimeters 1 centimeter 

10 centimeters 1 decimeter 

10 deeimeters 1 meter 



ENGLISH SQUARE MEASURE 

144 sq. inches 1 sq. foot 

9 sq. feet 1 sq. yard 



254 The Modern Electroplate?' 



METRIC SQUARE MEASURE 

100 sq. millimeters 1 sq. centimeter 

100 sq. centimeters 1 sq. decimeter 

100 sq. decimeters 1 square meter 

ENGLISH CUBIC MEASURE 

1728 cubic inches 1 cubic foot, 

27 cubic feet 1 cubic yard 

40 cubic feet 1 shipping ton 

231 cubic inches 1 gallon 

METRIC CUBIC MEASURE 

1000 cubic millimeters 1 cubic centimeter 

1000 cubic centimeters 1 cubic decimeter 

1000 cubic decimeters 1 cubic meter 

LIQUID MEASURE 

4 gills 1 pint 

2 pints .1 quart 

31% gallons 1 barrel 

2 barrels 1 hogshead 

METRIC EQUIVALENTS 

LINEAR MEASURE 

1 centimeter 0.3937 inch 

1 decimeter 3.937 inches 

1 meter 39.37 inches 

1 kilometer '. . 0.6214 mile 

1 inch 2.54 centimeters 

1 foot 3.048 decimeters 

1 yard • 0.9144 meter 

1 mile 1.6093 kilometers 

SQUARE MEASURE 

1 sq. centimeter 0.155 sq. inch 

1 sq. decimeter 0.1076 sq. foot 

1 sq. meter 1.196 sq. yards 

1 sq. kilometer 0.386 sq. mile 

1 sq. inch 6.452 sq. centimeters 

1 sq. foot 9.290 sq. decimeters 

1 sq. yard 0.8361 sq. meter 

1 sq. mile 2.59 sq. kilometers 



Reference Data 255 



WEIGHTS 

1 gram 0.0353 ounce 

1 kilogram 2.2046 pounds 

1 metric ton 1.1023 English tons 

1 ounce 28.85 grams 

1 pound 0.4536 kilogram 

1 English ton 0.9072 metric ton 

VOLUME 

1 cu. centimeter 0.061 cu. inch 

1 cu. decimeter 0.035 cu. foot 

1 cu. meter 1.308 cu. yard 

1 liter 1.057 quart liquid 

1 cu. inch 16.39 cu. centimeters 

1 cu. foot 28.32 cu. decimeters 

1 cu. yard 0.765 cu. meter 

1 quart liquid 0.946 liter 

1 gallon 0.378 decaliter 



INDEX 



Abrasive, 143, 220 

Abrasive dust, 132, 194, 203, 

237 
Absolute weight, 21 
Accessories, automobile, 226 
Acetate, lead, 25, 245 
Acid, 23, 27, 83, 111, 134, 135 
Acid bath, 168-169 
Acid, boric, 176, 179, 189 
Acid burns, 246 
Acid-copper bath, 168 
Acid dip, 156, 160, 161 
Acid dipping, 157, 181, 186 
Acid electrolyte, 169 
Acid fumes, 44, 113, 151, 161 
Acid, hydrochloric, 21, 25, 150, 

160-161, 244 
Acid, hydrocyanic, 25, 245 
Acid, hydrofluoric, 150-151, 176 
Acid, muriatic, 25, 132, 150, 

157, 179 
Acid, nitric, 24, 158, 160, 161, 

245 
Acid-proof paint, 85, 88 
Acid-proof wall, 45 
Acid, prussic, 25 
Acid pump, 135 
Acid resisting paint, 47 
Acid stains, 45 
Acid, sulphuric, 21. 25, 83, 158, 

160, 168, 189, 191 
Acid tank, 111 
Acid vapors, 50 
Acid vapors, antidates for, 246 
Action, electrochemical, 26 
Active area, 92 
Adjusting valve, 92 
Agitation, 104, 119 



Agitation, air, 93 

Agitation, mechanical, 93, 177 

Agitation, solution, 92 

Agitator, 108 

Air, 46, 50, 120 

Air, compressed, 119-120 

Air supply, 94 

Air valve, 146 

Alcohol, 159 

Algebra, 23 

Alkali burns, 246 

Alkalies, 134 

Alkaline bath, 170 

Alkaline solution, 151, 169 

Alkalines, antidotes for, 246 

Alloy, brass, 160 

Alternating current, 62-63 

Aluminum, 18, 21, 132, 247 

Aluminum bronze, 167 

Ammeter, 36, 73, 74, 235, 237 

Ammeter coils, 73 

Ammeter shunt, 74 

Ammonia, 24, 164, 165 

Ammonium chloride, 24, 164, 

171, 178, 190-191 
Ammonium hydroxide, 24 
Ammonium sulphate, 190-191 
Ammonium sulphide, 171 
Ampere hour, 76 
Amperehour meter, 75, 76 
Amperes, 30, 33, 37 
Amperes, per square foot, 251 
Anion, 27-28 
Anode, 27, 28, 92, 95, 104, 108, 

121, 126, 165, 185 
Anode, brass, 121 
Anode, bronze, 167 
Anode, copper, 169 
Anode, corrugated, 122 
Anode, curved, 101, 125 



257 



258 



Index 



Anode, elliptic, 123 

Anode, flat, 121, 123 

Anode, flat plate, 122 

Anode, gold, 122, 173 

Anode, iron, 175 

Anode, lead, 177 

Anode, nickel, 177 

Anode rod, 94 

Anode, rolled, 185 

Anode, silver, 122, 185 

Anode surface, 101, 122 

Anode, tin, 187 

Anode, zinc, 191 

Anodes, plating, 121-126 

Antidotes for poisons, 244 

Antimony, 18 

Antimony sulphide, 165-166 

Apothecaries' weight, 253 

Apparatus, 62 

Area, 32 

Argon, 18 

Armature, 66, 235-236 

Armature assembly, 66 

Armature coil, 62-63 

Armature conductors, 66 

Armature core, 63, 65 

Armature shaft, 195 

Armature trouble, 235 

Armatur^ winding. 232 

Armature wire, 61 

Arsenic, 18 

Arsenic trioxide, 164 

Art, 11, 16, 167 

Artificial heat, 91 

Artificial illumination, 48-49 

Artificial light, 227 

Artificial lighting, 49 

Asphaltum, 47, 85, 89, 110 

Asphaltum paint, 44-46, 113 

Asphyxiation, 241-242 

Assembly armature, 66 

Assembly floor, 41 

Atom, 20, 22, 26 

Atomic theory, 20 

Atomic weight, 21, 24, 29 

Automatic conveyor, 15 

Automatic machinery, 14, 102, 

108, 193 
Automatic moving tank, 107 



Automatic plating machine, 83, 

102, 110 
Automatic plating tank, 105 
Automatic sand blast, 145 
Automobile accessories, 226 
Automobile wheel rims, 109 



B 



Bakelite, 101 
Baking soda, 25 
Balance, rotative, 212 
Balancing tool, 211 
Ball-bearings, 68, 196 
Ball burnishing barrel, 222 
Ball burnishing machine, 223- 

224 
Balls, steel, 223-224 
Bar magnet, 55 
Barium, 18 
Baron, 18 

Barrel, 98, 140, 142 
Barrel, ball burnishing, 222 
Barrel, burnishing, 222 
Barrel, grinding, 142 
Barrel hoop, 109 
Barrel, metal, 140 
Barrel nickel plating, 168, 180 
Barrel, oblique, 101 
Barrel, oblique plating, 101 
Barrel, plating, 14, 42, 48, 80, 

100, 126, 169, 191 
Barrel, rolling, 148 
Barrel, rotating, 83, 97 
Barrel, sandblast tumbling, 147 
Barrel, tumbling, 140, 148, 194 
Barrel, zinc plating, 190 
Bases, 23-24, 27 
Basket, 128 
Basket, dipping, 131 
Basket, plating, 127-128 
Basket, stoneware dipping, 132 
Basket, wire, 132 
Bath, cvanide, 164, 169 
Bath, lve, 153 
Bath, nickel plating, 183 
Bath, pickle, 110 






Index 



259 



Bath, plating, 33, 91 

Bath, water, 117 

Battery, 27, 235. 237 

Battery, chemical, 53 

Battery, primary, 20, 52 

Baume', 133. 178, 183 

Bearing friction, 237 

Bearing trouble. 237 

Bearings, 44, 68. 195-196 

Bearings, ball, 68. 196 

Bearings, bronze, 68 

Bearings, non-frictional, 68 

Bearings, self-oiling, 195 

Bee's wax, 172 

Bell metal. 167 

Bell, signal, 77 

Belt, link, 107 

Belt strapping, 199 

Belt velocity, 241 

Belt-driven 'lathe, 195 

Belting, 70 

Belts, 239 

Bench, scouring, 153 

Bicarbonate, sodium, 25 

Bismuth. 18 

Bisulphate, sodium, 166 

Black nickeling, 179 

Blistering, 183 

Blower, 149 

Blower system, 204 

Blue stone, 25 

Blue vitriol, 25 

Board, cleaning, 42 

Board, scouring, 42, 114, 155 

Bobbin, 72-73 

Bobbin winding, 73 

Boiler, 117 

Bolt, 88 

Boric acid, 176, 179. 189 

Box, hot sawdust, 120 

Boxwood sawdust, 119 

Branch, 36-37 

Brass, 14, 108, 156\ 163. 168, 

217, 247 
Brass alloy. 160 
Brass anode, 121 
Brass coloring, 165 
Brass plating, 163-164 
Brass plating solution, 163 



Brass tank, 42 

Brass tube, 95 

Bright dipping, m, 159 

Broken circuit, 236 

Bromine. 18 

Bronze, 166, 171 

Bronze aluminum. 167 

Bronze anodes, 167 

Bronze bearings, 68 

Bronze plating, 167 

Bronze plating solution, 166 

Brush, cleaning, 157 

Brush contact, 234 

Brush, cotton potash, 156 

Brush, glue, 212 

Brush, goblet-shaped. 156 

Brush, hand, 154 

Brush holder, 59. 67 

Brush rigging, 66 

Brush, rotary, 155 

Brush, rotating, 155 

Brush, scratch, 153 

Brush, soft hair, 159 

Brush, woven wire, 68 

Brushes, composition, 67 

Brushes, dynamo, 61. 64, 67, 

233, 235 
Bubble, air, 94 
Bubbles, gas, 92, 103, 183 
Buff leather wheel. 218 
Buff, stubless, 218 
Buffing, 137, 194. 215 
Buffing composition, 218 
Buffing lathe, 197 
Buffing speed, 221-222 
Buffing wheel, 215 
Buffs, 170, 215 
Buffs, speed of, 221-222 
Buffs, woolen cloth. 216-217 
Building up, generator, 232 
Bullneck polishing wheel. 208 
Bureau of Standards, 14 
Burnisher, steel ball, 15 
Burnishing barrel, 222 
Burnishing, steel ball, 143 
Burns, 246 
Busbar, 80, 94 
Business competition, 40 
Business expansion, 41, 69 



260 



Index 



Cadmium, 18 

Caesium 18 

Calcium, 18 

Calibration, 74 

Candle power, 49-50 

Canton flannel, 215 

Canvas, 207-208 

Canvas polishing wheel, 207 

Canvas wheel, 207, 213 

Capacity, 68 

Carat, 172 

Carbon, 18, 26, 33, 67 

Carbonate, copper, 171 

Carbonate, lead, 25, 170 

Carbonate, potassium, 25 

Carbonate, sodium, 25, 164, 165, 

179, 192 
Carboy 135-136 
Carboy inclinator, 136 
Carpenter's level, 90 
Cast anode, 180, 187, 191 
Cast iron, 63, 213 
Casting, iron, 151, 192 
Casting, plate, 121 
Castings 97, 130, 140, 147, 151, 

201 
Catalytic agents, 168-169, 184, 

189 
Cathode, 26, 28, 62, 103, 108, 

124, 152, 192 
Cathode rod, 49, 95, 126 
Cathode surface, 102 
Cation, 26-28 
Caustic potash, 165, 174 
Caustic soda, 152, 153, 164, 170, 

187, 190, 192 
Ceiling, 44 
Centigrade, 32, 247 
Cerium, 18 

Chain, conveyor, 104-107 
Chains, 109 

Charging, the tumbler, 142 
Cheese cloth, 90 
Chemical action, 17 
Chemical affinity, 17 
Chemical battery, 53 
Chemical equation, 16, 23 



Chemical equivalents, 28-29 
Chemical symbols, 18 
Chemical transformation, 24 
Chemist, 11 
Chemistry, 16, 25, 28 
Chemistry, electro-, 16 
Chloride, ammonium, 24, 164, 

171, 178, 191 
Chloride, ferric, 25 
Chloride, gold, 172-173 
Chloride, iron, 25 
Chloride, lead, 24 
Chloride, mercuric, 25 
Chloride, nickel, 24 
Chloride, nickel ammonium, 24 
Chloride, potassium, 24 
Chloride, silver, 158, 184-185 
Chloride, sodium, 25 
Chloride, stannous, 25 
Chloride, tin, 25, 166. 187 
Chlorine, 17, 19, 21, 24 
Chromium, 19 
Circuit, 34-38, 61 
Circuit, broken, 236 
Circuit, field, 72, 232 
Circuit, hydraulic, 29-30 
Circuit, line, 59 
Circuit, open, 235 
Circuit, parallel, 34, 78 
Circuit, series, 34 
Circuit, short, 234-236 
Circuit, tank, 92 
Cleaning board, 42 
Cleaning, electrolytic, 151-152 
Cleansing, 139 
Cloth disc, 215 
Clothing, 137 
Coal, 117 
Cobalt, 19 
Coil, 66, 91, 183 
Coil capacity, 111 
Coil, cooling, 30 
Coil, field, 59-60 
Coil, steam, 92, 111-119, 152, 

153, 227 
Coils, ammeter, 73 
Coils, armature, 62-63 
Cold galvanizing, 188 
Cold pickle tank, 111 



Index 



261 



Cold pickling, 110 
Collector ring, 97 
Colored lacquer, 230 
Coloring, 165-171 
Coloring, brass, 165 
Coloring, copper, 171 
Coloring, iridescent, 230 
Coloring solution, 165 
Columbium, 19 
Combinations, 17 
Combining weights, 22 
Commercial practice, 56 
Commercial work, 40 
Common salt, 25 
Commutation, 62 
Commutator, 44 
Commutator, 63^65. 71, 233 
Commutator bar, 234-236 
Commutator segment, 63 
Commutator, sparking, 233 
Comparison of thermometers, 

247 
Components, 26 
Composition brushes, 67 
Composition, buffing, 218 
Composition, cutting down, 220 
Composition, finishing, 220 
Compound, 57 
Compound generator, 57 
Compounds, 17-21 
Compress wheel, 209 
Compressed air, 119-120 
Compressed air agitation, 93 
Compressed air supply, 42 
Compressor, 120 
Concrete base, 45 
Conductance, 36 
Conductivity, of metals, 247 
Conductor, H-29, 61, 108 
Conductor bar, 107-108 
Conductor copper, 44, 69 
Conductor, sizes of, 247-249 
Conductors, armature, 66 
Conductors for plating currents, 

250 
Constant, 33-35 
Constant voltage, 65 
Contact, brush, 234 
Conversion factor, 39, 71 



Conveyor, automatic, 15 
Conveyor chain, 104-107 
Cooling coils, 30 
Copper, 13-28, 30-32, 77, 121, 

156, 189, 217 
Copper alloy, 156, 160, 166 ' 
Copper anode, 169 
Copper bath, 181 
Copper carbonate, 171 
Copper coloring, 171 
Copper conductor, 44, 69 
Copper cyanide, 153, 164, 168, 

170 
Copper deposit, 153 
Copper deposition, 169 
Copper dust, 234 
Copper flashing, 152 
Copper hook, 107, 128 
Copper plating, 156, 167, 177 
Copper plating solutions, 167 
Copper rod, 95, 128 
Copper segments, 66 
Copper striking, 152, 170 
Copper strip, QQ, 108 
Copper sulphate, 24-28, 168 
Copper tank, 42 
Copper tube,. 95 
Copper wire, 126 
Copperas, 25 
Core, 236 

Core, armature, 63-65 
Core, iron, 63 
Corrosion, 104 
Corrosive sublimate, 25 
Corrugated anode, 122 
Cost, 14, 70 

Cost, copper conductors, 44 
Cost, of materials, 76 
Cotton potash brush, 156 
Cotton wick buff wheel, 217-218 
Coulomb, 37 

Counter shaft, 71, 195, 238 
Counter shaft, speed of, 239 
Counter-sinking, 41 
Coupling, 91 
Cover plate, 101 
Cream of tartar, 171 
Crocus, 219, 220 
Cross-section, 32-33 



262 



Index 



Crystallization, 183 

Cup, oil, 196 

Cupric oxide, 24 

Current, 26-37, 55, 61-73, 90 

Current, alternating, 62-63 

Current density, 152 

Current, direct, 13 

Current direction, 64 

Current direction, reversal of, 

233 
Current, eddy, 63 
Current, electric, 26-33, 55, 92 
Current, field, 58 
Current flow, 28-34, 62, 72 
Current, line, 57-58, 73-74 
Current, plating, 58, 95 
Current pressure, 62, 74, 80, 176, 

188, 191 
Current regulation, 57 
Current, reverse, 158 
Current strength, 33 
Current supply, 53, 231 
Current, uni-direction, 62 
Current value, 33, 36, 37, 62 
Curved anode, 101, 125 
Customers, 40 
Cut, 13 

Cutlery, 13, 163 

Cutting down composition, 220 
Cutting speed, 218 
Cutting surface, 210 
Cyanide bath, 164, 169 
Cyanide, copper, 153, 164, 168, 

170 
Cyanide electrolyte, 170 
Cvanide, potassium, 24, 

158, 172, 185, 186 
Cyanide, sodium, 153, 164, 

"184, 192 
Cvanide solution, 83-85 
Cyanide, zinc, 24, 164, 190 
Cycle, 62 
Cylinder, 100-101 
Cypress boards, 114 



156, 



170, 



D 



Dalton. 22 
D'Arsonval, 73 



D'Arsonval galvanometer, 73 

Daylight, 48-49 

Death bombs, 14 

Decimal equivalents, 251 

Decompose, 29 

Decomposition, 26 

Deflection, 74 

Denim, 215 

Departments, 41 

Deposit, 28, 93, 98, 105, 127, 

152, 164, 185 
Deposit, copper, 153 
Deposition, 163, 191 
Deposition, copper, 169 
Deposition, electro-, 11, 27, 72, 

162 
Deposition, gold, 173 
Deposition, iron, 176 
Deposition, nickel, 181 
Deposition, silver, 163 
Development, 14 
Dial, 77 

Diameter of pulley, 240 
Dielectric, 65 
Difference of potential, 32-34, 

236 
Dioxide, sulphur, 24 
Dip, lye, 116 

Dip, potassium cyanide, 156 
Dipping, acid, 111 
Dipping basket, 131 
Dipping, bright, 111, 159 
Dipping lye, 153 
Dipping tank, 112 
Dipping vats, 48 
Dips, 42 
Dips, acid, 113 
Direct current, 73 
Direct-current generator, 71 
Direct-current machine, 71 
Disc wheel, 206 
Discoloration, 160 
Disintegration, 122 
Double-voltage generator, 80 
Drain, 44, 45, 46 
Drain tray, 229 
Drainage, floor, 44 
Drawn metal, 130 
Drawn steel work, 110, 212 



Index 



263 



Dresser, emery wheel, 211 

Drilling, 41 

Drill press, 41 

Drive shaft, 238 

Driving motor, 48, 70 

Driving unit, 39, 69. 71 

Drop forging, 110, 212 

Drop in potential, 44 

Drop in pressure, 31 

Drum, 61-65 

Drying, 182 

Drving apparatus, 182 

Drying oven, 108, 117, 134, 226 

Duets, ventilating, 63 

Dust, 44, 149 

Dust, abrasive, 132, 194, 203, 

237 
Dust collector hood, 203 
Dust, copper, 234 
Dust, emery, 196 
Dyes, 230 
Dynamo, 57, 64, 80 
Dynamo, design, 65 



E 



Earthenware tanks, 83 
Eddy current, 63 
Efficiency, 41, 82, 107, 204 
Electric' circuit, 29, 30, 32, 33, 

46 
Electrie contact, 72 
Electric current, 26, 30, 55, 92 
Electric energy, 32, 38 
Electric light, 49, 77 
Electric motor, 70 
Electric power, 38, 70 
Electric shock, 241-242 
Electricity, 16-17, 29, 37 
Electrical charges, negative, 26 
Electrical charges, positive, 26 
Electrical fixtures, 226 
Electrical losses, 71 
Electrical machinery, 167 
Electrical measurement, 30 
Electrical resistance, 32-33 
Electrical units, 17 
Electro-bar magnet, 55 



Electro-chemical action, 26 
Electro-chemistry, 16 
Electro-deposit, 121, 139 
Electro-deposition, 11, 27, 72, 

162 
Electro-galvanizing, 13, 106, 

188, 193 
Electrodes, 26, 27, 28 
Electrolysis, 11, 26 
Electrolvte, 27, 91, 100, 117, 

151, 164 
Electrolyte cleaning, 151, 152 
Electrolyte, cyanide, 170 
Electrolyte, gold, 85 
Electrolyte, nickel, 133 
Electrolytic solution, 119 
Electro-magnet, 54, 55 
Electro-motive force, 26, 33, 60, 

80 
Electroplater, 14. 33. 47, 70 
Electroplating, 11 
Electroplating business. 40 
Electroplating industry, 40 
Electro-positive, 12. 167, 181, 

189 
Electrotypers' varnish, 159 
Electrotyping, 11-13, 159 
Elementary principles, 54 
Elements, 'l7, 18, 20, 28 
Elements, tabulation of, 18 
Elliptic anodes, 123 
Emery. 203, 212, 220 
Emery application, 212 
Emery dust, 196 
Emery trough, 215 
Emery wheel, 140 
Emerv wheel dresser, 211 I 

E. M. F. curve, 62-64 
Employees, 40, 44 
Enamel-lined containers, 85 
Enamel lining, 85 
Enamelled iron tank, 85 
Engine, 38, 69 
Engine drive, 70 
English cubic measure, 254 
English length measure, 253 
English square measure, 253 
Equation, 24, 33, 36 
Equation, chemical, 16, 23 



£64 



Index 



Equipment, 40, 49, 195 
Equipment, ventilating, 133 
Equivalent, 28-29 
Equivalent weight, 29 
Equivalents, decimal, 251 
Erbium, 19 
Europium, 19 
Exhaust, 51 
Experimental work, 53 
Explosive shells, 14 
External shunt, 74 
Eye strain, 41 



Factor, conversion, 39, 71 

Factory, 41, 120 

Factory department, 41 

Factor v, output, 41 

Fahrenheit, 247 

Fall of potential, 31 

Fall of pressure, 31 

Fan, ventilating, 47, 205 

Fans, motor-driven, 42 

Fans, power-driven, 47 

Faraday, 28-30 

Faraday's laws, 28 

Faucet, 96 

Felt, 207-208 

Ferric chloride, 25 

Ferric oxide, 25 

Ferric sulphate, 22 

Ferrous ammonium sulphate, 

175 
Field circuit, 72, 232 
Field coils, 59-60 
Field current, 58 
Field excitation, 57, 60, 72, 232 
Field, generator, 233 
Field magnet, 55, 58, 60 
Field magnetic, 61 
Field pole, 55, 61, 232 
Field rheostat, 232 
Field troubles, 236 
Field winding, 58, 236 
Filter mask, 132 
Fining, 212 
Finishing composition, 220 



Fire-proof material, 72 

Flanges, 65 

Flannel, Canton, 215 

Flashing, 170 

Flashing, copper, 152 

Flat anode, 121, 123 

Flat plate anode, 122 

Floor, 50 

Floor area, 41 

Floor construction, 44-45 

Floor drainage, 44 

Floor plan, 42-43 

Floor plan-polishing room, 194 

Floor space, 107 

Floor surface. 45 

Flowers, metallized, 158 

Fluorine, 1 9 

Flux, magnetic, 61 

Foot lever, 146 

Foot-pounds, 38 

Force, electro-motive, 26, 33, 

60, 80 
Force, lines of, 61 
Foreign substances, 150 
Forging, drop, 110, 212 
Forgings, 147 
Foundation, 45, 69 
Foundry work, 110 
Four-pole generator, 55 
Framework, 46 
Fresh air, 42 
Friction, bearing, 237 
Frictional losses, 70 
Fumes, 42, 47, 50, 69, 176 
Fumes, acid, 44, 113, 151, 161 
Fumes, poisonous, 42 



Gadolium, 19 
Gages, 31 

Gages, pressure, 31 
Gallium, 19 
Gallon, 30 
Galvanizing, 193 
Galvanizing, cold, 188 
Galvanizing, electro, 13, 106, 
188, 189, 193 



Index 



265 



Galvanizing, hot, 188 
Galvanizing solution, 191 
Galvanometer, D'Arsonval, 73 
Gas, 17, 24, 118, 170, 193 
Gas bubbles, 92, 103, 183 
Gelatine, 169 
Generator, 27, 44, 53, 137, 231, 

235 
Generator armature, 63, 71 
Generator capacity, 39, 71 
Generator, compound, 57. 
Generator, direct-current, 71 
Generator, double-voltage, 80 
Generator field, 233 
Generator field rheostat, 72 
Generator, four pole, 55 
Generator frame, 59 ' 
Generator location, 42 
Generator output, 71 
Generator, plating, 54, 137 
Generator, self-excited, 232 
Generator, separately excited, 

57-60 
Generator, series, 57-58-60 
Generator, shunt, 57-58-60 
Generator speed, 71 
Generator, speed of, 72 
Generator, steam, 116 
Generator voltage regulation, 72 
German silver, 167, 247 
Germanium, 19 
Gild, 173 
Gilding, 174 
Glass, 143 
Glass shield, 201 
Glauber's salts, 25 
Glucinum, 19 
Glucose, 169, 184 
Glue, 169, 177, 184, 205, 213, 

214 
Glue brush, 212 
Glue heater, 213-214 
Goblet-shaped brush, 156 
Gold, 13, 163, 172, 184, 217, 

247 
Gold anode, 122, 173 
Gold chloride, 172-173 
Gold deposition, 173 
Gold electrolvte, 85 



Gold plating, 13 

Gold plating solution, 172 

Grain, 173 

Grape sugar, 189 

Graphite, 159 

Gravel, 143 

Grease, 138, 152, 181, 218, 226 

Grinder, 202 

Grinder, portable, 201 

Grinder, surface, 202 

Grinding, 194, 203 

Grinding barrel, 142 

Grinding lathe, 200 

Grinding wheel, 201-204 

Ground, 236 

Guards, 200 

Gun metal, 167 



H 

Hand brush, 154 

Hand hole, 146 

Hanger, 238 

Hardware, 12, 163, 226 

Health, 42, 44, 47, 203 

Heat, 17, 32, 72 

Heat, artificial, 91 

Heater, glue, 213-214 

Heater, steam coil, 91 

Heating, 236 

Heating problem, 50 

Heating units, 50 

Helium, 19 

Hood, ventilating, 42, 112, 176, 

229 
Hoods, 47-48, 204 
Horizontal tumbler, 140 
Horse-power, 38-39, 71 
Horseshoe magnet, 54 
Hot galvanizing, 188 
Hot solutions, 134 
Hydraulic circuit, 29-30 
Hydrochloric acid, 21, 150, 160, 

244 
Hydrocyanic acid, 25, 245 
Hydrofluoric acid, 150-151, 176 



266 



Index 



Hydrogen, 17-21, 29, 152, 175, 

183 
Hydrometer, 133-134, 178, 182 
Hydrostatic pressure, 30 
Hydrosulphite, sodium, 187 
Hydroxide, ammonium, 24 
Hydroxide, sodium, 23 



Jacketed kettle, 113 
Jacketed tank, 113 
Jacobi, 11 
Jar, stoneware, 161 
Jewelry, 13, 159, 163, 172: 
Joint insulating, 91-93 
Joule, 37-38 



Illumination, 50 

Illumination, artificial, 48-49 

Impregnate, 44 

Impregnating compound, 69 

Inclinator, carboy, 136 

Indicator, 137 

Indicator, speed, 71, 137, 232 

Indium, 19 

Industrial plant, 93 

Industry, 13-14 

Insects, 158 

Inspection, 98 

Instrument, 74 

Instruments, scientific, 226 

Insulating joint, 91, 93 

Insulation, 44, 72 

Insulator, 94 

Internal resistance, 75 

Iodine, 19 

Ions, 26, 62 

Iridescent coloring, 230 

Iridium, 19 

Iron, 12, 17, 32, 158, 170, 175, 

178, 247 
Iron anodes, 175 
Iron, cast, 63, 212 
Iron casting, 151, 192 
Iron chloride, 25 
Iron, core, 63 
Iron deposition, 176 
Iron, malleable, 213 
Iron, oxide, 25, 219 
Iron plates, 88 
Iron plating solution, 175 
Iron rod, 55 
Iron solutions, 175 
Iron washers, 88 
Iron volk, 56 



K 

Kalium, 18 
Keep-sakes, 159 
Kettle, jacketed, 113 
Kilowatt, 37-39 
Kilowatt hour, 38 
Krypton, 19 



Labor, 102 

Labor-saving machinery, 15 

Laboratory, 12 

Lacquer, 160, 226 

Lacquer application, 227 

Lacquer, colored, 230 

Lacquer room, 134, 226 

Lacquer spray, 119 

Lacquering, 108, 225, 226 

Laminae, 63 

Lamps, 49 

Lanthanum, 19 

Lathe, 155 

Lathe, belt driven, 195 

Lathe, buffing, 197 

Lathe, grinding, 200 

Lathe head, 196 

Lathe, motor driven, 195 

Lathe, overhanging, 199 

Lathe, overhanging polishing, 

198 
Lathe, polishing, 206 
Law of multiple proportions, 22 
Lead, 14, 74, 176, 247 
Lead acetate, 25, 245 



Index 



267 



Lead anodes, 177 

Lead carbonate, 25, 176 

Lead chloride, 24 

Lead oxide, 23 

Lead peroxide, 23-24 

Lead pipe, 91-93, 110 

Lead plating, 177 

Lead plating solution, 176 

Lead sesquioxide, 23 

Lead sheeting, 89 

Lead suboxide, 23 

Lead, sugar of, 25 

Lead, white, 25 

Leakage, 85 

Leaks, in floor, 41 

Leaks, in tank, 87 

Leather, 206-207 

Leather wheels, 216 

Leaves, 159 

Length, 32-33 

Light, 50 

Light, artificial, 227 

Light, electric, 77 

Lighting, artificial, 49 

Lighting, natural, 41 

Lightning, 233 

Lime, 218 

Lime compositions, 219 

Lineal measure, 254 

Line circuit, 59 

Line current, 57, 73 

Line pressure, 72 

Line shaft, 69-70, 195 

Line shaft losses, 120 

Line voltage 35 

Lines of force, 61 

Lining, 85-90 

Lining material, 90 

Link belt, 107 

Liquid measure, 254 

Lithium, 19 

Litmus, 134 

Litmus paper, 134, 183 

Loss, mechanical, 71 

Losses, lineshaft, 120 

Low voltage, 232 

Lubrication, 68 

Lumber, 86 

Lump pumice, 219 



Lye, 85, 153 
Lye bath, 153 
Lye dip, 116 
Lye dipping, 153 



M 



Machine, 53, 60, 70 

Machinery, 14 

Machinery, automatic, 14, 102, 

108, 193 
Machinery operations, 41 
Magazines, 16 
Magnesium, 19 
Magnet, 73 
Magnet, bar 55 
Magnet, electro, 54-55 
Magnet, electro-bar, 55 
Magnet, field. 55, 58, 60 
Magnet, horseshoe, 54 
Magnet, permanent, 73 
Magnetic area, 60 
Magnetic characteristic, 63 
Magnetic field, 61 
Magnetic flux, 61 
Magnetic properties, 54 
Magnetism, residual, 232-233 
Malleable iron, 213 
Management. 40 
Manganese, 19 
Manufacturers. 14, 68 
Material, 32-33 
Measure, cubic, 254 
Measure, length, 253 
Measure, lineal, 254 
Measure, liquid, 254 
Measure, metric cubic, 254 
Measure, metric length, 253 
Measure, metric square, 254 
Measure, square, 253 
Measures, 253-254 
Mechanical agitations, 93, 177 
Mechanical loss, 71 
Mechanical plating, 191, 193 
Mechanical plating tank, 109 
Mechanism, 77 
Men, 42 



268 



Index 



Mercuric chloride, 25 

Mercury, 19, 32, 186, 247 

Mercury salts, 245 

Metal barrel, 140 

Metal drying apparatus, 182, 

192 
Metal, per ampere hour, 251 
Metal ribbon, 72 
Metal tubing, 110 
Metal wire, 108 
Metallic ring, 61 
Metallic strips, 59 
Metallized flowers, 158 
Metals, 26, 33 
Metals, precious, 13, 23 
Meter, 32, 74, 77 
Meter, ampere hour, 75-76 
Metric cubic measure, 254 
Metric equivalents, 254 
Metric length measure, 253 
Metric square measure, 254 
Metric weights, 253 
Mica, 69, 236 
Mineral oil, 237 
Minute, 121 
Moisture, 226-227 
Molecular composition, 22 
Molecule, 21, 26, 105 
Molybdenum, 19 
Motor, 38, 70, 137, 195 
Motor capacity, 70-71 
Motor drive, 70 
Motor driven lathe, 195 
Motor, driving, 48, 70-71 
Mould, 13 

Moving tank, automatic, 107 
Multiple, 34, 37 
Multiple proportion, 22 
Munitions, 14 
Muriatic acid, 25, 132, 150, 155- 

179 
Muslin, 215 
Muslin, unbleached, 217 



N 

Name plate, 71, 137, 232 
Natural ventilation, 47 



Negative, 64 

Neon, 19 

Nickel, 12, 19, 163, 167, 241 

Nickel ammonium sulphate, 

178-179 
Nickel anode, 177 
Nickel chloride, 24 
Nickel deposition, 181 
Nickel electrolyte, 133 
Nickel plating, 121, 175, 180 
Nickel plating bath, 183 
Nickel salt, 123, 134, 179, 183 
i\ickel solution, 121 
Nickel sulphate, 178-179 
Nickel tank, 42 
Nitrate, potassium, 25 
Nitrate, silver, 18, 24, 30, 37 
Nitrate, sodium, 24, 158 
Nitric acid, 24, 158, 160, 245 
Nitrogen, 17, 18, 19 
Noises, 237 
Non-acid solutions, 85 
Non-conductor, 158, 169 
Non-corrosive metal, 12 
Non-frictional bearings, 68 
North pole, 55 
Novelties, 159 
Nuts, 42, 88 



Oblique plating barrel, 101 

Oblique tumbler, 140 

Office, 69 

Ohm, 32-33 

Ohm's law, 33 

Oil hole, 196 

Oil, lubricating, 68 

Oil, mineral, 237 

Oil of vitriol, 25 

Oil, polishing, 212 

Oil rings, 68 

Oil well, 237 

Open circuit, 235 

Operator, 104, 194, 227 

Osmium, 19 

Output, 54, 7.1 



Index 



269 



Oven, 42, 108, 117 

Oven, drying, 108, 117, 134, 226 

Overflow, 112 

Overflow pipe, 113 

Overhanging lathe, 199 

Overhanging polishing lathe, 198 

Overhead expense, 54 

Overheat, 63 

Overloading, 235 

Oxide, 155, 215 

Oxide, ferric, 25 

Oxide, iron, 25, 219 

Oxide, lead, 23 

Oxide, silver, 24 

Oxygen, 17-29 



Packing, 41 

Paint, 12, 90 

Paint, acid proof, 85-88 

Paint, acid resisting, 47 

Paint, asphaltum, 44, 46, 113 

Palladium, 19 

Paper, litmus, 134, 183 

Paper, roofing, 44, 46 

Paper wheel, 207 

Parallel, 34, 37, 57 

Parallel circuits, 34, 78 

Particles, 20-21, 26 

Peeling, 183 

Permanent magnet, 73 

Peroxide, lead, 23-24 

Phenomenon, 17 

Phosphorus, 19 

Pickle bath, 110 

Pickles, 117, 151 

Pickling, 108, 110, 143, 181 

Pickling, cold, 110 

Pickling tank, 46, 112 

Pipe, 30, 93 

Pipe, lead, 91, 93, 110 

Pipe, overflow, 113 

Pipe, sheet metal, 47 

Pipe, water, 30, 46 

Piping system, 92 

Plant, industrial, 93 



Plate castings, 121 

Plater, 16, 42, 49, 68, 72 

Platform, 44 

Plating anodes, 121-126 

Plating barrel, 14, 42, 48, 100, 

126 
Plating, barrel nickel, 168, 180 
Plating, barrel zinc, 190 
Plating basket, 127-128 
Plating bath, 33, 91 
Plating, brass, 163, 164 
Plating, bronze, 167 
Plating, copper, 156, 167, 177 
Plating current, 58, 95 
Plating currents, conductors 

for, 250 
Plating division, 41 
Plating equipment, 53 
Plating generator, 54, 137 
Plating hooks, 128 
Plating, lead, 177 
Plating, mechanical, 191 
Plating, nickel, 121, 175, 178, 

180, 183 
Plating operation, 41, 54 
Plating process, 98 
Plating racks, 128-129-130 
Plating room, 15, 41, 69, 120 
Plating, silver, 13, 42 
Plating solutions, 90 
Plating tank, 42 
Plating tank, automatic, 105 
Plating tanks, 94 
Plating, tin, 187 
Plating work, 33, 57, 67, 71 
Plating, zinc, 13, 193 
Platinum, 19, 173 
Plumbago, 159 
Plumbing, 96 
Pointer, 77 
Pointer, voltmeter, 61 
Poisonous fumes, 112, 132 
Poisonous vapors, 242 
Poisons, antidotes for, 244 
Polarity, 55 
Pole, south, 61 
Poles, 55, 61-62, 67 
Polishing, 153, 206, 207 
Polishing head, 200 



270 



Index 



Polishing lathe, 206 
Polishing operation, 41 
Polishing room, 43, 194-195-196 
Polishing wheel, 204, 215 
Porcelain, 158 
Portable grinder, 201 
Positive plate, 92 
Positive value, 64 
Potash, 85 

Potash, caustic, 165, 174 
Potash solution, 110 
Potassium, 18-19 
Potassium carbonate, 25 
Potassium chloride, 24 
Potassium cyanide, 24, 158, 172, 

185 
Potassium cyanide, antidote 

for, 245 
Potassium cyanide dip, 156 
Potassium hydroxide, antidote 

for, 245 
Potassium nitrate, 25 
Potassium sulphate, 171 
Potassium sulphide, 171 
Potential, 30, 69 
Potential difference, 31-33, 75 
Potential, difference of, 32, 34, 

236 
Potential, drop in, 44 
Potential, fall of, 31 
Power, 37-38. 70, 195 
Power plant, 196 
Power, transmission of, 238 
Praseodynum, 19 
Precious metals, 13 
Press, 203 
Press, drill, 41 
Press, punch, 41 
Pressure, 37 
Pressure, difference, 30 
Pressure drop, 31 
Pressure, fall of. 31 
Pressure gages, 31 
Pressure, hydrostatic, 30 
Pressure, line, 72 
Primary battery, 26, 52 
Printing, 13 
Production, 15, 41, 82, 102, 115, 

213 



Protective coating, 12 

Protective agent, 12 

Prussic acid, 25 

Pulley, 71, 196, 201, 238 

Pulley, diameter of, 240 

Pulverizing, 26 

Pumice, 143, 154, 174, 218, 220 

Pump, acid, 135 

Punched parts, 41 

Punchings, 97 

Punch press, 41 

Punch shop, 41 



R 



Rack, for drying, 227 

Pack, for plating, 104, 107, 130 

Radiator, 227 

Radium, 19 

Reaction, 23 

Reciprocal, 36 

Regulating valve, 92-94 

Regulation, current, 57 

Regulation, generator voltage., 

72 
Relative density, 133 
Relative weight, 21 
Research work, 13 
Residual magnetism, 232-233 
Resilience, 207 
Resistance, 30-32, 74, 78, 90 
Resistance electrical, 32-33 
Resistance factors, 32 
Resistance, internal, 75 
Resistance units, 34, 35, 37 
Resistances in parallel, 35 
Respirator, 132 
Resuscitation, 243-244 
Reversal of current direction, 

233 
Reverse current, 158 
Rheostat, 33, 80 
Rheostat, field, 232 
Rheostat, generator field, 72 
Rheostat, tank, 78-80 
Rhodium, 19 
Riddle, 118 



Index 



271 



Eing, metallic, 61 

Ring, oil, 68 

Ring, slip, 64 

Rinsing, 151 

Rinsing tank, 113-114 

Rinsing vat, 112 

Rod, copper, 95, 128 

Rolled anode, 185 

Roller, 212 

Rolling barrel, 148 

Roofing paper, 44, 46 

Roof ventilator, 42, 204 

Room, lacquer, 134, 226 

Room, plating, 15, 41, 45, 69, 

120 
Room, polishing, 43, 194, 195 
Room, sand blast, 145 
Room, store, 69 
Rotary brush, 155 
Rotary plating tank, 100 
Rotating barrel, 83, 97 
Rotating plating tank, 100 
Rotating table sand blast, 148- 

149 
Rotative balance, 212 
Rotten stone, 219 
Rough, 218-219 
Houghing, 212 
Round-section anode, 124 
Round wire, 32 
Routing, 41 
Rubber apron, 138 
Rubber glove, 138 
Rubidium, 19 
Rules for speed, 239 
Rust, 12, 128, 139, 151, 163 
Ruthenium, 19 



Sal ammoniac, 24, 179 

Sal soda, 25 

Salt, mercury, 245 

Salt, nickel, 123, 134, 179, 180 

Salt, table, 21, 160 

Salt, tartar, 25 

Saltpetre, 25, 158 

Salts, 23, 24, 27 



Salts, Glauber's, 25 

Samarium, 19 

Sand, 143 

Sand blast apparatus, 194 

Sand blast machine, 119, 149, 
150 

Sand blast room, 145 

Sand blast rotating table, 148- 
149 

Sand blast sand, 150 

Sand blast, single hose, 144 

Sand blast tumbling barrel, 147 

Sand blasting, 110, 143, 150, 
174, 193 

Sand container, 143 

Sandpaper, 205 

Sand, sandblast, 150 

Sand, silica, 150 

Sawdust, 42, 142 

Sawdust box, 117-118 

Sawdust, boxwood, 119 

Scalds, 246 

Scale, coating of, 110, 139 

Scale divisions, 73 

Scandium, 19 

Scientific instruments, 226 

Scouring, 110, 113, 154, 157, 
182 

Scouring bench, 153 

Scouring boards, 42, 114, 155 

Scouring tank, 113 

Scratch brush, 153 

Scratch brushing, 153 

Screws, 42 

Scrubbing, 113, 154 

Second, 37 

Segment, commutator, 63 

Segment, copper. 66 

Segments, 65, 234 

Selenium, 19 

Self-excited generator, 232 

Self-oiling bearings, 195 

Separately excited shunt gen- 
erator/ 57-60 

Series, 57-59 

Series circuits, 34 

Series connected, 72 

Series generator, 57-58-60 

Service, 53 



272 



Index 



Sesquioxide, lead, 23 

Shadows, 50 

Shaft, 61, 68, 238 

Shaft, armature, 195 

Shaft, counter, 71, 195, 238 

Shaft drive, 238 

Shafting, 137 

Shaft, line, 69, 70, 195 

Sheepskin polishing wheel, 208- 

210 
Sheeting, 215 
Sheeting, lead, 89 
Sheet iron, 47 
Sheet metal pipes, 47 
Shellac, 159 
Shipping, 41 
Shoes, 138, 159 
Shop, 70 

Short circuits, 234, 235, 236 
Shunt, 57 

Shunt, ammeter, 74 
Shunt, external, 74 
Shunt generator, 57-58, 60 
Shunt winding, 58 
Shunt wound, 71 
Sifting device, 225 
Silica sand, 150 
Silicon, 19 
Silver, 13, 17, 30, 37, 77, 158, 

167, 185, 217 
Silver anode, 122, 185 
Silver chloride, 158, 184-185 
Silver, conductivity of, 247 
Silver deposition, 163 
Silver, German, 167, 247 
Silver nitrate, 18, 24, 30, 37 
Silver nitrate, antidote for, 245 
Silver oxide, 24 
Silver plating, 13, 42 
Silver plating solutions, 184 
Silver sulphide, 184 
Single hose sand blast, 144 
Slinging wire, 126, 153 
Slip ring, 64 
Slot, 66 
Slot wedge, 66 
Smoke^ 184 
Soda, baking, 25 
Soda, caustic, 152, 164, 170, 187 



Soda, sulpho-cyanide of, 179 
Sodium, 20-21 
Sodium bicarbonate, 25 
Sodium bisulphate, 166 
Sodium carbonate, 25, 164, 179, 

192 
Sodium chloride, 25 
Sodium cyanide, 153, 164, 166, 

170, 184, 187, 190 
Sodium hydroxide, 23. 
Sodium hydroxide, antidote for, 

245 
Sodium hyposulphite, 181 
Sodium nitrate, 24, 158 
Sodium sulphate, 25 
Solenoid, 55 
Solids, 26 

Solution agitation, 92 
Solution, brass plating, 163 
Solution, bronze plating, 166 
Solution, coloring, 165 
Solution, copper plating, 167 
Solution, cyanide, 83-85 
Solution, electrolytic, 119 
Solution, galvanizing, 191 
Solution, gold plating, 172 
Solution, hot, 134 
Solution, iron, 175 
Solution, lead plating, 176 
Solution, non-acid, 85 
Solution, plating, 90 
Solution, potash, 110 
Solutions, 26 

Solutions, alkaline, 151, 169 
Solutions, nickel, 121 
Solutions, silver plating, 184 
Solutions, tin plating, 187 
Solutions, warm, 91 
Solutions, zinc plating, 189 
South pole, 61 
Sparking, 234 
Sparking commutator, 233 
Specific gravity, 133 
Speed, buffing, 221-222 
Speed, cutting, 218 
Speed, generator, 71, 72 
Speed indicator, 71, 137, 232 
Speed of buffs, 221-222 
Speed of counter shafts, 239 



Index 



273 



Speed of machines, 240 

Speed of rotation, 102 

Speed, rules for, 239 

Spencer, 11 

Spider, 63 

Spotting, 171 

Sprayer, 228 

Spraying, lacquer, 227 

Sprav, lacquer, 119 

Spray pistol, 228 

Spray system, 227 

Square measure, 254 

Stains, acid, 45 

Stains, water, 45 

Standards, bureau of, 14 

Stannous chloride, 25 

Stannum, 18 

Stator, 57 

Steam, 46, 91, 117 

Steam coil, 92, 111, 152, 227 

Steam coil heater, 91 

Steam generator, 116 

Steam supply, 42, 117 

Steel, 158, 160, 175, 181, 190 

Steel Ball Burnisher, 15, 145 

Steel balls, 223-224 

Steel, boiler, 85 

Steel rod, 88 

Steel tank, 83 

Steel vat, 85 

Still tank, 15, 83, 102, 164 

Still tank zinc plating, 189 

Stone, blue, 25 

Stoneware dipping basket, 132 

Stoneware jars, 161 

Stoneware vat, 83 

Stop-cock, 30-31 

Storage, 41, 194 

Store room. 41, 69 

Stove, 50, 227 

Strike, 185 

Strike, silver, 185 

Striking, 152 

Striking, copper, 152, 170 

Strip, 57 

Strip copper, 108 

Stripping, 157 

Strontium, 20 

Stubless buff, 218 



Student, 16 

Sublimate, corrosive, 25 

Suboxide, lead, 23 

Substance, 17, 20, 32 

Sugar, 22 

Sugar of lead, 25 

Sulphate, ammonium, 190-191 

Sulphate, copper, 24, 25, 28, 168 

Sulphate, ferric, 22 

Sulphate, ferrous ammonium,. 

175 
Sulphate, nickel, 178-179 
Sulphate, nickel ammonium, 

178-179 
Sulphate, potassium, 171 
Sulphate, sodium, 25 
Sulphate, zinc, 23, 179, 189, 191 
Sulphide, ammonium, 171 
Sulphide, antimony, 165-166 
Sulphide, silver, 184 
Sulphite, potassium, 171 
Sulpho-cvanide of soda, 179 
Sulphur,' 20, 22, 184 
Sulphur dioxide, 24 
Sulphuric acid, 21, 83, 158, 160, 

189, 191 
Sulphuric acid, antidote for, 244 
Supply wires, 80 
Surface grinder, 202 
Switch, 30, 75, 80 
Symbol, 21-23 
Svmbols, chemical, 18 
Svstem, 21, 31 



Table salt, 21, 160 
Tableware, 13, 163 
Tabulation of elements, 18 
Tallow, 212-213, 218 
Tank, 83, 88, 93. 104 
Tank, acid, 111 
Tank capacity, 82 
Tank circuit, 92 
Tank, cold picklo, 111 
Tank construction, 86 
Tank, copper, 42 
Tank, dipping, 112 



274 



Index 



Tank, earthenware, 83 

Tank, enamelled iron, 85 

Tank, jacketed, 113 

Tank location, 49 

Tank, mechanical plating, 109 

Tank, nickel, 42 

Tank, pickling, 46, 112 

Tank, plating, 42, 94 

Tank rheostat, 78, 80 

Tank, rinsing, 113-114 

Tank rods, 44, 94 

Tank, rotary plating, 100 

Tank, rotating plating, 100 

Tank, scouring, 113 

Tank, steel, 83 

Tank, welded, 85 

Tank, wooden, 85 

Tank, wooden plating, 88-89 

Tank, zinc, 42 

Tantalum, 20 

Tarnish, 111, 128, 1G0, 163 

Tartar salts, 25 

Tellurium, 20 

Temperature, 29, 91, 111, 134, 

183, 226 
Terbium, 20 
Terminal, 58 
Terminal voltage, 31, 72 
Thallium, 20 
Tharium, 20 
Thermometer, 134, 247 
Thermometers, comparison of, 

247 
Three-wire system, 80 
Thulium, 20 " 
Thumb piece, 121 
Tie bolt, 89 
Tie rod, 88 
Time, 120 

Tin, 12, 18, 21, 167, 181, 187 
Tin chloride, 25, 166, 187 
Tin plates, 121 
Tin plating, 187 
Tin plating solutions, 187 
Tin anode, 187 
Tire rims, 110 
Titanium, 20 
Trade, 42 
Transmission of power, 238 






50 
194 



Trioxide, arsenic. 164 

Tripoli, 218 

Trough, 215 

Trough, emery, 215 

Troy weight, 253 

Trucking, 41 

Tube, brass, 95 

Tube, copper, 95 

Tubing, metal, 110 

Tumbler, 97 

Tumbler, horizontal, 140 

Tumbler, oblique, 140 

Tumbling, 110, 140. 143, 1 

Tumbling barrel, 140, 148, 

Tungsten, 20 

Turpentine, 174 

Two wire system, 79-80 

Type, 13 



u 

Unbleached muslin, 217 
Uni-direction current, 62 
Unit, driving, 39, 69 
Unit, electrical, 7 
Unit, heating, 50 
Unit length, 33 
Unit of work, 37 
Units, 21, 34, 35-36 
Units, of quantity, 30 
Uranium, 20 

U. S. Bureau of Standards, 14, 
169 



Valency, 29 

Valve, adjusting, 92 

Valve, air, 146 

Valve, regulating, 92, 94 

Vanadium, 20 

Vapors, 47, 112 

Vapors, acid, 50 

Vapors, poisonous, 242 

Varnish, 12 



Index 



27.5 



Varnish, electrotypers', 159 
Vat, dipping, 48 
Vat, rinsing, 112 
Vat, stoneware, 83 
Vats, 83 

Velocity, belt, 241 
Ventilating devices, 203 
Ventilating ducts, 63 
Ventilating equipment, 133 
Ventilating fan, 47, 205 
Ventilating hood, 42, 112, 176, 

229 
Ventilating system, 47, 50 
Ventilation, natural, 47 
Ventilator, 226 
Ventilator, roof. 42, 204 
Vitriol, blue, 25 
Vitriol, oil of, 25 
Vitriol, white, 25 
Voltage, 44. 58, 65, 72, 94, 102, 

171 
Voltage, constant. 65 
Voltage regulation, 59, 169, 173, 

180, 191 
Voltage, terminal, 31, 72 
Voltmeter, 31. 36, 61, 74, 79, 

236 
Voltmeter pointer, 61 
Volts, 30, 37, 71 
Volume, 255 



w 

Walking surface, 45 
Wall, 46 

Wall, acid proof, 45 
Wall support, 48 
Warm solutions, 91 
War work. 14 
Washers, 42 
Waste, of metal, 76 
Waste, of power, 70 
Water, 17. 21, 23, 28, 42 
Water bath. 117 
Water pipe, 30, 46 
Water stains, 45 
Water supply, 42, 113 
Watt, 37, 38, 71 



Watt-hour, 38 
Weight, absolute, 21 
Weight, atomic, 21, 24-29 
Weight, combining, 22 
Weight, equivalent. 29 
Weight, metric, 253 
Weight, relative, 21 
Weight, Trov, 253 
Weights, 253-255 
Welded tank, 85 
Welding, 84 
Wheel, buffing, 215 
Wheel, buff leather, 218 
Wheel, bullneck polishing, 209 
Wheel, canvas, 207, 213 
Wheel, compress, 209 
Wheel, cotton wick buff, 217- 

218 
Wheel, disc, 206 
Wheel, emery, 140 
Wheel, grinding. 201, 204 
Wheel, leather, 216 
Wheel, paper, 207 
Wheel, polishing, 204, 215 
Wheel rims, automobile, 109 
Wheel, sheepskin polishing, 207 
Wheel, wooden polishing, 205- 

206 
White lead, 25 
White vitriol, 25 
Winding, armature. 232 
Winding, bobbin, 73 
Winding, field, 58, 236 
Winding, shunt, 58 
Windings, 44, 58, 65, 236 
Window, 47, 49, 204 
Wire, 57, 59, 61, 62, 108 
Wire, armature, 61 
Wire basket, 132 
Wire hooks, 161 
Wire mesh, 108 
Wire, round, 32 
Wire, slinging, 126, 173 
Wood, 47 

Wooden plating tank. 88-89 
Wooden polishing wheel, 206- 

207 
Wooden tank, 85 
Woolen cloth buffs, 216-217 



276 



Index 



Work, commercial, 40 

Working plane, 49 

Workman, 41, 49, 69, 72, 203, 

207 
Woven wire brush, 68 



Xenon, 20 



Ytterbium, 20 
Yttrium, 20 



Zinc, 12, 17, 20, 160, 167, 181, 

247 
Zinc anodes, 191 
Zinc cyanide, 24, 164, 190 
Zinc deposition, 163, 191 
Zinc plating, 13, 193 
Zinc plating solutions, 189 
Zinc plating, steel tank,, 189 
Zinc sulphate, 23, 179, 189, 191 
Zinc tank, 42 
Zirconium, 20 



1920 

REVISED 

CATALOGUE 

of LATEST and BEST 

Practical 
and Mechanical Books 

Including Automobile and Aviation Books 




PRACTICAL BOOKS FOR PRACTICAL MEN 



Any of these books will be sent prepaid 
to any part of the world, on receipt of 
price. Remit by Draft, Postal Order, 
Express Order or Registered Letter. 



Published and for Sale by 
The JNorman W . Henley .Publishing Co. 
2 West 45th Street N ew York, U. S. A. 



INDEX TO SUBJECTS 



Accidents 27 

Air Brake 25, 26 

Arithmetic 15, 29, 38 

Automobiles ....3, 4, 5, 6, 7 
Automobile Charts .... 7 

Aviation 8 

Batteries 18 

Bevel Gears 22 

Brazing and Soldering. 9 

Cams 22 

Charts 7, 8, 9 

Chemistry 21 

Civil Engineering 29 

Coke 10 

Compressed Air 10 

Concrete 10, 11, 12, 13 

Cosmetics 34 

Dictionaries 14 

Dies— Metal Work ..13, 14 
D r a w in g — Sketching 

Paper 14, 15 

Electric Bells 16 

Electricity.. 15, 16. 17, 18,19 

Encyclopedia 29 

Factory Management, 

etc 19 

Ford Automobile 6 

Fuel 20 

Flying Machines 8 

Gas Engines and Gas, 

20, 21, 22 

Gearing and Cams .... 22 

Hydraulics 22 

Ice and Refrigeration.. 22 

Inventions — Patents ... 23 

Knots 23 

Lathe Work 23, 24 

Link Motion 25 

Liquid Air 24 



Locomotive Engineering, 

24, 25, 26, 27 
Machine Shop Practice, 

27, 29, 30, 31 

Manual Training 32 

Marine Engineering ... 32 

Mechanical Magazine . . 28 

Mechanical Movements. 30 

Metal Turning 23 

Metal Work Dies ....13, 14 

Mining 33 

Moton Cycles 6, 7 

Patents and Inventions. 23 

Pattern Making 33 

Perfumery 34 

Plumbing 34 

Receipt Book 35, 40 

Refrigeration and Ice.. 22 

Repairing Automobiles.. 6 

Rubber 36 

Saws 36 

Screw Cutting 36 

Sheet Metal Work ...13, 14 

Smoke Prevention 20 

Soldering 9 

Starting Systems 5 

Steam Engineering. 36, 37, 38 
Stea-i Heating and Ven- 
tilation 38 

Steel 38, 39 

Storage Batteries 18 

Switch Boards 17, 19 

Tractor 22, 39 

Turbines 39 

Ventilation 38 

Waterproofing 13 

Welding 5 

Wiring 17, 18 

Wireless Telephones .. 19 



pi^Any of these books will be sent prepaid to any 
part of the world, on receipt of price. 

REMIT by Draft, Postal Money Order, Express Money 
Order, or by Registered Mail. 

2 



GOOD, USEFUL BOOKS 



AUTOMOBILES— MOTORCYCLES 



The Modern Gasoline Automobile, Its Design, 
Construction, Operation. 

By Victor W. Page, M.S.A.E. This is the most complete, 
practical, and up-to-date treatise on gasoline automobiles and 
their component parts ever published. In the new revised 
and enlarged 1920 edition, all phases of automobile construc- 
tion, operation and maintenance are fully and completely 
described and in language anyone can understand. Every 
part of all types of automobiles, from light cyclecars to 
heavy motor trucks and tractors, are described in a thorough 
manner; not only the automobile, but every item of its 
equipment, accessories, tools needed, supplies and spare parts 
necessary for its upkeep, are fully discussed. It is clearly 
and concisely written by an expert familiar with every 
branch of the automobile industry and the originator of the 
practical system of self-education on technical subjects; it 
is a liberal education in the automobile art, useful to all who 
motor for either business or pleasure. Anyone reading the 
incomparable treatise is in touch with all improvements that 
have been made in motor car construction. All latest de- 
velopments, such as high speed aluminum motors and mul- 
tiple valve and sleeve valve engines, are considered in 
detail. The latest ignition, carburetor and lubrication prac- 
tice is outlined. New forms of change speed gears, and 
final power transmission systems, and all latest chassis im- 
provements, are shown and described. This book is used 
as a text in all leading automobile schools, and is conceded 
to be the standard treatise. The chapter on Starting ancl 
Lighting Systems has been greatly enlarged, and many 
automobile engineering features that have long puzzled lay- 
men are explained so clearly that the underlying principles 
can be understood by anyone. This book was first pub- 
lished six years ago, and so much new matter has been 
added to the book that it is nearly twice its original size. 
The only treatise covering various forms of war automobiles 
and recent developments in motor truck design, as well as 
pleasure cars. This book is not too technical for the layman 
nor too elementary for the more expert. It is an incom- 
parable work of reference for home or school. 6x9. Cloth, 
1,000 pages, nearly 1,000 illustrations, 12 folding plates. 

* ° Price, $4.00 



Questions and Answers Relating to Modern Auto- 
mobile Construction, Driving and Repair. 

By Victor W. Page. A. self -educator on automobiling with- 
out an equal. This practical treatise consists of a series of 
thirty-seven lessons, covering' with over 2,000 questions and 
their answers — the automobile, its construction, operation 
and repair. The subject matter is absolutely correct and 
explained in simple language. If you can't answer all of 
the following questions, you need this work. The answers 
to these and 2,000 more are to be found in its pages. 

Give the name of all important parts of an automobile 
and describe their functions. Describe action of latest types 
of kerosene carburetors. What is the difference between a 
"double" ignition system and a "dual" ignition system? 
Name parts of an induction coil. How are valves timed? 
What is an electric motor starter and how does it work? 
What are advantages of worm drive gearing? Name all 
important types of ball and roller bearings. What is a 
"three-quarter" floating axle? What is a two-speed axle? 
What is the Vulcan electric gear shift? Name the causes 
of lost power in automobiles. Describe all noises due to 
deranged mechanism and give causes. How can you adjust 
a carburetor by the color of the exhaust gases? What causes 
"popping" in the carburetor? What tools and supplies are 
needed to equip a car? How do you drive various makes 
of cars? What is a differential lock and where is it used? 
Name different systems of wire wheel construction. What 
is a "positive" drive differential? etc., etc. Answers every 
question a'sked relating to the modern automobile. A popu- 
lar work at a popular price. 5 1 Ax7 1 / 2 . Cloth, 650 pages, 
392 illustrations, 3 folding plates. 1920 Edition just pub- 
lished. Price, $2.50 

How to Run an Automobile. 

By Victor W. Page. This treatise gives concise instruc- 
tions for starting and running all makes of gasoline auto- 
mobiles, how to care for them, and gives distinctive features 
of control. Describes every step for shifting gears, con- 
trolling engine, etc. Among the chapters contained are: 
I. Automobile Parts and Their Functions. II. General 
Starting and Driving Instructions. III. Typical 1919 Con- 
trol Systems — Care of Automobiles. Thoroughly illustrated. 
178 pages, 72 illustrations. Price, $1.50 

The Automobilist's Pocket Companion and Ex- 
pense Record. 

By Victor W. Page. This book is not only valuable as a 
convenient cost record, but contains much information of 
value to motorists. Includes a condensed digest of auto laws 
of all States, a lubrication schedule, hints for care of storage 
battery and care of tires, location of road troubles, anti- 
freezing solutions, horsepower table, driving hints and many 
useful tables and recipes of interest to all motorists. Not a 
technical book in any sense of the word, just a collection of 
practical facts in simple language for the everyday motorist. 
Convenient pocket size. Price, $1.25 

4 



Gasoline and Kerosene Carburetors, Construction, 
Installation and Adjustment. 

By Capt. V. W. Page. All leading types of carburetors are 
described in detail, special attention being given to the forms 
devised to use the cheaper fuels such as kerosene. Carburetion 
troubles, fuel system troubles, carburetor repairs and instal- 
lation, electric primers and economizers, hot spot manifolds 
and all modern carburetor developments are considered in a 
thorough manner. Methods of adjusting all types of car- 
buretors are fully discussed as well as suggestions for secur- 
ing maximum fuel economy and obtaining highest engine 
power. 250 pages, 89 illustrations. Price, $2.00 



Starting, Lighting and Ignition Systems. 

By Victor W. Page. A practical treatise on latest auto- 
mobile starting, lighting and ignition system practice. This 
practical volume has been written with special reference to 
the requirements of the reader desiring easily understood 
explanatory matter relating to all types of automobile elec- 
trical systems. It can be understood by anyone, even with- 
out electrical knowledge, because elementary electrical prin- 
ciples are considered before any attempt is made to discuss 
features of the various systems. These basic principles are 
clearly stated and illustrated with simple diagrams. All the 
leading systems of starting, lighting and ignition have been" 
described and illustrated with the cooperation of the experts 
employed by the manufacturers. Over 200 wiring diagrams 
are shown in both technical and nontechnical forms. Com- 
plete data is given for locating troubles in all systems, the 
various steps being considered in a logical way for those 
without expert electrical knowledge. All ignition systems 
receive full consideration, starting with the simplest battery 
and coil forms found on early cars to the modern short- 
contact timer and magneto methods used with the latest eight 
and twelve-cylinder motors. Full directions are given for 
making all repairs and complete instructions for locating 
troubles with meters. _ This book is unusually complete, as 
it also includes descriptions of various accessories operated 
by electric current, such as electrical gear shifts, brake actua- 
tion, signaling devices, vulcanizers, etc. _ Over 700 pages. 
425 specially made engravings. 1920 Edition, Revised and 
Enlarged. Price, $3.00 



Automobile Welding with the Oxy-Acetylene 
Flame. 

By M. Keith Dunham. Explains in a simple manner ap- 
paratus to be used, its care, and how to construct necessary 
shop equipment. Proceeds then to the actual welding of all 
automobile parts, in a manner understandable by everyone. 
Gives principles never to be forgotten. This book is of ut- 
most value, since the perplexing problems arising when metal 
is heated to a melting point are fully explained and the 
proper methods to overcome them shown. 167 pages, fully 
illustrated. Price, $1.50 



Automobile Repairing Made Easy. 

By Victor W. Page. A thoroughly practical book contain- 
ing complete directions for making repairs to all parts of the 
motor car mechanism. Written in a thorough but non- 
technical manner. Gives plans for workshop construction, 
suggestions for equipment, power needed, machinery and 
tools necessary to carry on business successfully. Tells how 
to overhaul and repair all parts of all automobiles. The 
information given is founded on practical experience, every- 
thing is explained so simply that motorists and students can 
acquire a full working knowh dge of automobile repairing. 
Other works dealing with repairing cover only certain parts 
of the car — this work starts with the engine, then considers 
carburetion, ignition, cooling and lubrication systems. The 
clutch, change speed gearing and transmission system are 
considered in detail. Contains instructions for repairing 
all types of axles, steering gears and other chassis parts. 
Many tables, short cuts in figuring and rules of practice 
are given for the mechanic. Explains fully valve and mag- 
neto timing, "tuning" engines, systematic location of trouble, 
repair of ball and roller bearing, shop kinks, first aid to 
injured and a multitude of subjects of interest to all in the 
garage and repair business. All illustrations are especially 
made for this book, and are actual photographs or reproduc- 
tions of engineering drawings. This book also contains 
Special Instructions on Electric Starting, Lighting and Igni- 
tion Systems, Tire Repairing and Rebuilding, Autogenous 
Welding, Brazing and Soldering, Heat Treatment of Steel, 
Latest Timing Practice, Eight and Twelve-Cylinder Motors, 
etc., etc. You will never "Get Stuck" on a Job if you own 
this book. 1,000 specially made engravings on 500 plates. 
1,056 pages (5j<£x8). 1920 Edition. Price, $4.00 

The Model T Ford Car, Its Construction, Opera- 
tion and Repair, Including the Fordson Farm 
Tractor, F. A. Lighting and Starting System, 
Ford Motor Truck. 

By Victor W. Page. This is the most complete and prac- 
tical instruction book ever published on the Ford car and 
Fordson tractor. A high grade, cloth bound book, printed 
on the best paper, illustrated by specially made drawings and 
photographs. All parts of the Ford Model T car and Ford- 
son tractor are described and illustrated in a comprehensive 
manner. The construction is fully treated _ and operating 
principle made clear to everyone. Complete instructions for 
driving and repairing are given. To the 1920 Revised Edition 
matter has been added on the Ford Truck and Tractor Con- 
version Sets and Genuine Fordson Tractor. All parts are 
described. All repair processes illustrated and fully explained. 
Written so all can understand — no theory, no guesswork. 
New Edition. 153 illustrations, 410 pages, 2 large folding 
plates. Price, $2.00 

Motorcycles, Side Cars and Cyclecars, Their 
Construction, Management and Repair. 

By Victor W. Page. Describes fully all leading types of 
machines, their design, construction, maintenance, operation 
and repair. 550 pages. 350 specially made illustrations. 5 
folding plates. New Edition. Price, $2.50 



Automobile Charts 

By VICTOR W. PAGE, M.S.A.E. 

THE POPULAR AUTOMOBILE SERIES 
UNIFORM SIZE— 24" x 38"— PRICE 35 CENTS EACH 



Location of Gasoline Engine Troubles Made Easy. 

This chart shows clearly all parts of a typical four-cylinder 
gasoline engine of the four-cycle type. It simplifies location of all 
engine troubles. No details omitted. Price, 35 cents 

Location of Carburetion Troubles Made Easy. 

It shows clearly how to find carburetion troubles and names 
all defects liable to exist in the various parts. Instructions are 
given for carburetor adjustment. Price, 35 cents' 

Location of Ignition System Troubles Made Easy. 

In this chart all parts of a typical double ignition system using 
battery and magneto current are shown, and suggestions are given 
for readily finding ignition troubles and eliminating them when 
found. Price, 35 cents 

Location of Cooling and Lubricating Troubles. 

This is a combination chart showing all components of the ap- 
proved form of water cooling group as well as a modern engine 
lubrication system. It shows all points where defects exist that 
may result in engine overheating, both in cooling and oiling systems. 

Price, 35 cents 
Lubrication of the Motor Car Chassis. 

This chart presents the plan view of a typical six-cylinder chassis 
of standard design and outlines all important bearing points re- 
quiring lubrication, and is a valuable guide to the correct lubrication 
of any modern car. A practical chart for all interested in motor 
car maintenance. Price, 35 cents 

While each chart is complete in itself, the set covers all maintenance 
instructions for the entire automobile. Sold singly. Securely wrapped. 

Location of Starting and Lighting System Faults. 

The most complete chart yet devised, showing all parts of the 
modern automobile starting, lig ting and ignition systems, giving in- 
structions for systematic location of all faults in wiring, lamps, 
motor or generator, switches and all other units. Invaluable to 
motorists, chauffeurs and repairmen. Size 24 x 38 inches 

Price, 35 cents 

Location of Ford Engine Troubles Made Easy. 

Chart showing clear sectional views depicting all portions of 
the Ford power plant and auxiliary groups. It outlines clearly 
all parts of the engine, fuel supply systems, ignition group and 
cooling system, that are apt to give trouble, detailing all derange- 
ments that are liable to make an engine lose power, start hard, or 
work irregularly. This chart simplifies location of all engine faults. 
Size 25 x 38 inches. Price, 35 cents 

Location of Motorcycle Troubles Made Easy. 

This chart simplifies location of all power-plant troubles and 
will prove of value to all who have to do with the operation, repair 
or sale of motorcycles. No details omitted. Size 30 x 20 inches. 

Price, 35 cents 



AVIATION 
A B C of Aviation. 

By Capt. V. W. Page. This book describes the basic prin- 
ciples of aviation, tells how a balloon or dirigible is made 
and why it floats in the air. Describes how an airplane flies. 
It shows in detail the different parts of an airplane, what 
they are and what they do. Describes all types of airplanes 
and how they differ in construction; as well as detailing the 
advantages and disadvantages of "different types of aircraft. 
It includes a complete dictionary of aviation terms and clear 
drawings of leading airplanes. The reader will find simple 
instructions for unpacking, setting up and rigging airplanes. 
A full description of airplane control principles is given and 
methods of flying are discussed at length. 

This Book answers every question one can ask about mod- 
ern aircraft, their construction and operation. A self educa- 
tor on aviation without an equal. 275 pages, 130 specially 
made illustrations with 7 plates. Price, $2.50 

Aviation Engines — Design; Construction; Repair. 

By Lieut.^ Victor W. Page, Aviation Section, S.C.U.S.R. 
This treatise, written by a recognized authorit3 r on all of 
the practical aspects, of internal combustion engine construc- 
tion, maintenance and repair, fills the need as no other book 
does. The matter is logically arranged; all descriptive mat- 
ter is simply expressed and copiously illustrated, so that any- 
one can understand airplane engine operation and repair # even 
if without previous mechanical training. This work is in- 
valuable for anyone desiring to become an aviator or aviation 
mechanician. 

The latest rotary types, such as the Gnome Monosoupape, 
and LeRhone, are fully explained, as well as the recently 
developed Vee and radial types. The subjects of carburetion, 
ignition, cooling and lubrication also are covered in a thorough 
manner. The chapters on repair and maintenance are dis- 
tinctive and found in no other book on this subject. Not a 
technical book, but a practical, easily understood work of 
reference for all interested in aeronautical science. 576 
pages, 253 illustrations. Price, Net, $3.00 

Glossary of Aviation Terms — English-French; 
French-English. 

A complete glossary of practically all terms used in aviation, 
having lists in both French and English with equivalents in 
either language compiled by Lieuts. Victor W. Page, A.S., 
S.C.U.S.R., and Paul Montariol, of the French Flying 
Corps. Price, Net, $1.0O 

Aviation Chart — Location of Airplane Power 
Plant Troubles Made Easy. 

By Lieut. Victor W. Page, A.S., S.C.U.S.R. A large chart 
outlining all parts of a typical airplane power plant, showing 
the points where trouble is apt to occur and suggesting 
remedies for the common defects. Intended especially for 
aviators and aviation mechanics on school and field duty. 

Price. 35 cents 



BR AZING AND SOLDERING 

c - " • 

Brazing and Soldering. 

By Tames F. Hobart. The only book that shows you just 
how to handle any job of brazing or soldering that comes 
along; it tells you what mixture to use, how to make a 
furnace if you need one. Full of valuable kinks. The fifth 
edition of this book has just been published, and to it much 
new matter and a large number of tested formulas for aU 
kinds of solders and fluxes have been added. Price, 35c. 

CHARTS 



Aviation Chart — Location of Airplane Power 
Plant Troubles Made Easy. 

Bv Lieut. Victor W. Page, A.S., S.C.U.S.R. A large chart 
outlining all parts of a typical airplane power plant, showing 
the points where trouble is apt to occur and suggesting 
remedies for the common defects. Intended especially for 
aviators and aviation mechanics on school and field duty. 

Price, 35 cents 

Modern Submarine Chart— With 200 Parts Num- 
bered and Named. 

A cross-section view, showing clearly and distinctly all the 
interior of a submarine of the latest type. No details omitted— 
everything is accurate and to scale. This chart is really an 
encyclopedia of a submarine. Price, 25 cent* 

Box Car Chart. 

A chart showing the anatomy of a box car, having every part 
of the car numbered and its proper name given m a reference 
j.g t Price, 25 cents 

Gondola Car Chart. 

A chart showing the anatomy of a gondola car, having every 
cart of the car numbered and its proper reference name given 
in a reference list. Pnce « 25 cent » 

Passenger Car Chart. 

A chart showing the anatomy of a passenger car, haying 
every part of the car numbered and its proper name given 
in a reference list. Price, 25 cent* 

Steel Hopper Bottom Coal Car. 

A chart showing the anatomy of a steel hopper bottom coal 
car, having every part of the car numbered and its proper 
name given in a reference list. Price, 2o cents 

Tractive Powsr Chart. 

A chart whereby you can find the tractive power or drawbar 
pull of any locomotive without making a figure. Shows what 
cylinders are equal, how driving wheels and steam pressure 
affect the power. What sized engine you need to exert a 
given drawbar pull or anything you desire in this line. 



Horse-power Chart. 

Shows the horse-power of any stationary engine without 
calculation. No matter what the cylinder diameter of stroke, 
the steam pressure or cut-off, the revolutions, or whether 
condensing or non-condensing, it's all there. Easy to use, 
accurate and saves time and calculations. Especially useful 
to engineers and designers. Price, 50 cents 

Boiler Room Chart. 

By George L. Fowler. A chart — size 14 x 28 inches — showing 
in isometric perspective the mechanisms belonging in a modern 
boiler room. This chart is really a dictionary of the boiler 
room — the names of more than 200 parti, being given. 

Price, 25 cents 

COKE 

Coke — Modern Coking Practice, Including An- 
alysis of Materials and Products. 

By J. E. Christopher and T. H. Byrom. This, the standard 
work on the subject, has just been revised and is now 
issued in two volumes. It is a practical work for those en- 
gaged in Coke manufacture and the recovery of By-products. 
Fully illustrated with folding plates. It has been the aim 
of the authors, in preparing this book, to produce one which 
shall be of use and benefit to those who are associated with, 
or interested in, the modern developments of the industry. 
Among the chapters contained in Volume I are: Introduc- 
tion; Classification of Fuels; Impurities of Coals; Coal 
Washing; Sampling and Valuation of Coals, etc.; Chlorific 
Power of Fuels; History of Coke Manufacture; Develop- 
ments in Coke Oven Design; Recent Types of Coke Ovens; 
Mechanical Appliances at Coke Ovens; Chemical and Physi- 
cal Examination of Coke. Volume II covers By-products. 
Each volume is fully illustrated, with folding plates. 

Price, $3.00 per volume 

COMPRESSED AIR 



Compressed Air in all Its Applications. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. This is the most complete book on 
the subject of air that has ever been issued, and its thirty-five 
chapters include about every phase of the subject one can 
think of. It may be called an encyclopedia of compressed 
air. It_ is written by an expert, who, in its 665 pages, has 
dealt with the subject in a comprehensive manner, no phase 
of it being omitted. Over 500 illustrations. Fifth Edition, 
revised and enlarged. Cloth bound, $6.00. Half Morocco, 
revised and enlarged. Cloth bound. Price, $6.00 

CONCRETE 



Concrete Wall Forms. 

By A. A. Houghton. A new automatic wall clamp, is illus- 
trated with working drawings. Other types of wall forms, 
clamps, separators, etc., are also illustrated and explained. 

Price, 75 cents 

10 



Concrete Floors and Sidewalks. 

By A. A. Houghton. The molds for molding squares, hex- 
agonal and many other styles of mosaic floor and sidewalk 
blocks are fully illustrated and explained. Price, 75 cents 

Practical Concrete Silo Construction. 

By A. A. Houghton. Complete working drawings and speci- 
fications are given for several styles of concrete silos, with 
illustrations of molds for monolithic and block silos. The 
tables, data, and information presented in this book are 
of the utmost value in planning and constructing all forms 
of concrete silos. Price, 75 cents 

Molding Concrete Bath Tubs, Aquariums and 
Natatoriums. 

By A. A. Houghton. Simple molds and instruction are given 
for molding different styles of concrete bath tubs, swimming 
pools, etc. Price, 75 cents 

Molding Concrete Chimneys, Slate and Roof Tiles. 

By A. A. Houghton. . The manufacture of all types of con- 
crete slate and roof tile is fully treated. Valuable data on 
all forms of reinforced concrete roofs are contained within 
its pages. The construction of concrete chimneys by block 
and monolithic systems is fully illustrated and described. 
A number of ornamental designs of chimney construction with 
molds are shown in this valuable treatise. 75 cents 

Molding and Curing Ornamental Concrete. 

By A. A. Houghton. The proper proportions of cement 
and aggregates for various finishes, also the methods of thor- 
oughly mixing and placing in the molds, are fully treated. 
An exhaustive treatise on this subject that every concrete 
worker will find of daily use and value. Price, 75 cents 

Concrete Monuments, Mausoleums and Burial 
Vaults. 

By A. A. Houghton. The molding of concrete monuments 
to imitate the most expensive cut stone is explained in this 
treatise, with working drawings of easily built molds. Cutting 
inscriptions and designs is also fully treated. 75 cents 

Concrete Bridges, Culverts and Sewers. 

By A. A. Houghton. A number of ornamental concrete 
bridges with illustrations of molds are given. A collapsible 
center of core for bridges, culverts and sewers is fully illus- 
trated with detailed instructions for building. 75 cents 

Constructing Concrete Porches. 

By A. A. Houghton. A number of designs with working 
drawings of molds are fully explained so any one can easily 
construct different styles of ornamental concrete porches 
without the- purchase* of expensive molds. Price, 75 cents 

11 



Molding Concrete Flower Pots, Boxes, Jardi- 
nieres, Etc. 

By A. A. Houghton. The molds for producing many original 
designs of flower pots, urns, flower boxes, jardinieres, etc, 
are fully illustrated and explained, so the worker can easily 
construct and operate same. Price, 75 cents 

Molding Concrete Fountains and Lawn Orna- 
ments. 

By A. A. Houghton. The molding of a number of designs 
of lawn seats, curbing, hitching posts, pergolas, sun dials and 
other forms of ornamental concrete, for the ornamentation 
of lawns and gardens, is fully illustrated and described. 75c. 

Concrete on the Farm and in the Shop. 

By H. Colvin Campbell. This is a new book from cover 
to cover, illustrating and describing in plain, simple language 
many of the numerous appliances of concrete within the 
range of the home worker. Among the subjects treated are: 
Principles of reinforcing; methods of protecting concrete so 
as to insure proper hardening; home-made mixers; mixing 
by hand and machine; form construction, described and 
illustrated by drawings and photographs; construction of 
concrete walls and fences; concrete fence posts; concrete 
gate posts; corner posts; clothes line posts; grape arbor 
posts; tanks; troughs; cisterns: hog wallows; feeding floors 
and barnyard pavements; foundations; well curbs and plat- 
forms; indoor floors; sidewalks; steps; concrete hotbeds and 
cold frames; concrete slab roofs; walls for buildings; repairing 
leaks in tanks and cisterns; and all topics associated with 
these subjects as bearing upon securing the best results from 
concrete are dwelt upon at sufficient length in plain every-day 
English so that the inexperienced person desiring to under- 
take a piece of concrete construction can, by following the 
directions set forth in this book, secure 100 per cent success 
every time._ A number of convenient and practical tables 
for estimating quantities, and some practical examples, are 
also given. 150 pages, 51 illustrations. Price, $1.00 

Concrete From Sand Molds. 

By A. A. Houghton. A practical work treating on a process 
whicfti has heretofore been held as a trade secret by the 
few who possessed it, and which will successfully mold every 
and any class of ornamental concrete work. The process 
of molding concrete with sand molds is of the utmost practical 
value, possessing the manifold advantages of a low cost of 
molds, the ease and rapidity of operation, perfect details 
to all ornamental designs, density and increased strength 
of the concrete, perfect curing of the work without attention 
and the easy removal of the molds regardless of any under- 
cutting the desiga may have. 192 pages. Fully illustrated. 
Cloth. Price, $2.00 

Ornamental Concrete Without Molds. 

By A. A. Houghton. The process for making ornamental 
concrete without molds has long been held as a secret, and 
now, for the first time, this process is given to the public. 
The book reveals the secret and is the only book published 

12 



which explains a simple, practical method whereby the con- 
crete worker is enabled, by employing wood and metal tem- 
plates of different designs, to mold or model in concrete 
any cornice, archivolt, column, pedestal, base cap, urn or 
pier in a monolithic form — right upon the job. These may 
be molded in units or blocks, and then built up to suit the 
specifications demanded. This work is fully illustrated, with 
detailed engravings. Cloth. Price, $2.00 

Popular Handbook for Cement and Concrete 
Users. 

By Myron H. Lewis. Everything of value to the concrete 
user is contained, including kinds of cement employed in 
construction, concrete architecture, inspection and testing, 
waterproofing, coloring and painting, rules tables, working 
and cost data.^ The book comprises thirty-three chapters. A 
valuable addition to the library of every cement and concrete 
user. Cloth, 430 pages, 126 illustrations. Price, $3.00 

Waterproofing Concrete. 

By Myron H. Lewis. Modern methods of waterproofing 
concrete and other structures. _ A condensed statement of the 
principles, rules and precautions to be observed in water- 
proofing and damp-proofing structures and structural materials. 
Paper binding. Illustrated. Second Edition. 75 cents 



DIES— METAL WORK 



Dies; Their Construction and Use for the Modern 
Working of Sheet Metals. 

By J. V. Woodworth. A new book by a practical man, for 
those who wish to know the latest practice in the working 
of sheet metals. It shows how dies are designed, made and 
used, and those who are engaged in this line of work can 
secure many valuable suggestions. Sixth revised edition. 525 
illustrations, 394 pages. Cloth. ' !Price, $3.50 

Punches, Dies and Tools for Manufacturing in 
Presses. 

By J. V. Woodworth. An encyclopedia of die-making, 
punch-making, die-sinking, sheet-metal working, and making 
of special tools, subpresses, devices and mechanical combina- 
tions for punching, cutting, bending, forming, piercing, draw- 
ing, compressing, and assembling sheet-metal parts and also 
articles of other materials in machine tools. This is a dis- 
tinct work from the author's book entitled "Dies; Their 
Construction and Use." 500 pages, 700 engravings. Second 
edition. Cloth. Price, $4.50 

Drop Forging, Die-Sinking and Machine-Form- 
ing of Steel. 

By J. V. Woodworth. The processes of die-sinking and 
force-making, which are thoroughly described and illustrated 
in this admirable work, are rarely to be found explained in 
such a clear and concise manner as is here set forth. The 
process of die-sinking i elates to the engraving or sinking 

13 



of the female or lower dies, such as are used for drop 
forgings, hot and cold machine forging, swedging and the 
press working of metals. The process of force-making relates 
to the engraving or raising of the male or upper dies used 
in producing the lower dies for the press-forming and 
machine-forging of duplicate parts of metal. The book con- 
tains eleven chapters, and the information contained in these 
chapters is just what will prove most valuable to the forged- 
metal worker. 304 detailed illustrations. 341 pages, cloth. 

Price, $3.00 

DICTIONARIES 

Aviation Terms — English- French; French-Eng- 
lish. 

A complete glossary of practically all terms used in aviation, 
having lists in both French and English with equivalents in 
either language. A very valuable book compiled by Lieuts. 
Victor W. Page and Paul Montariol. Price, $1.00 

Standard Electrical Dictionary. 

By Prof. T. O'Conor Sloane. Just issued an entirely 
new edition brought up to date and greatly enlarged — as a 
reference book this work is beyond comparison as it contains 
over 700 pages, nearly 500 illustrations, and definitions of 
about 6,000 distinct words, terms and phrases. The defini- 
tions are terse and concise and includes every term used 
in electrical science. 

In its arrangement and typography the book is very con- 
venient. The word or term defined is printed in black faced 
type which readily catches the eye, while the body of the 
page is in smaller but distinct type. The definitions are well 
worded, and so as to be understood by the non-technical 
reader. The general plan is to give an exact, concise defini- 
tion, and then amplify and explain in a more popular way. 
Synonyms are also given, and references to other words 
and phrases are made. This work is absolutely indispensable 
to all in any way interested in electrical science, from the 
higher electrical expert to the everyday electrical workman. 
In fact, it should be in the possession of all who desire to 
keep abreast with the progress of this branch of science. 
1920 enlarged edition. Nearly 800 pages and nearly 400 
illustrations. Price, $5.00 



DRAWING— SKETCHING PAPER 

Linear Perspective Self- Taught. 

By Herman T. C. Kraus. This work gives the theory and 
practice of linear perspective, as used in architectural, engi- 
neering and mechanical drawings. The arrangement of 
the book is good; the plate is on the left-hand, while the de- 
scriptive text follows on the opposite page, so as to be readily 
referred to. A self-explanatory linear perspective chart is 
included in the second revised edition. Cloth. Price, $3.00 

14 



Self-Taught Mechanical Drawing and Elementary 
Machine Design. 

By F. L. Sylvester, M.E., Draftsman, with additions by Erik 
Oberg, associate editor of "Machinery." A practical ele- 
mentary treatise on Mechanical Drawing and Machine De- 
sign, comprising the first principles of geometric and mechan- 
ical drawing, workshop mathematics, mechanics, strength of 
materials and the calculation and design of machine details, 
compiled for the use of practical mechanics and young drafts- 
men. 330 pages, 215 engravings, cloth. Price, $2.50 

A New Sketching Paper. 

A new specially ruled paper to enable you to make sketches 
or drawings in isometric perspective without any figuring or 
fussing. It is being used for shop details as well as for 
assembly drawings, as it makes one sketch do the work of 
three, and no workman can help seeing just what is wanted. 
Pads of 40 sheets, 6x9 inches, Price, 25c.; 9x12 inches, 
Price, 50c; 12 x 18 inches, Price, $1.00. 



Practical Perspective. 

By Richards and Colvin. Shows just how to make all kinds 
of mechanical drawings in the only practical perspective 
isometric. Makes everything plain so that any mechanic can 
understand a sketch or drawing in this way. Saves time in 
the drawing room and mistakes in the shops. Contains prac- 
tical examples of various classes of work. Third edition. 
Limp cloth. Price, 75 cents 

ELECTRICITY 



Arithmetic of Electricity. 

By Prof. T. O'Conor Sloane. A practical treatise on elec- 
trical calculations of all kinds reduced to a series of rules, 
all of the simplest forms, and involving only ordinary arith- 
metic; each rule illustrated by one or more practical problems 
with detailed solution of each one. This book is classed 
among the most useful works published on the science of 
electricity, covering as it does the mathematics of electricity 
in a manner that will attract the attention of those who are 
not familiar with algebraical formulas. 200 pages. 1920 
Revised arid Enlarged edition. Price, $1.50 

Dynamo Building for Amateurs^ or How to Con- 
struct a Fifty Watt Dynamo. 

By Arthur J. Weed. A practical treatise showing in detail 
the construction of a small dynamo or motor, the entire 
machine work of which can be done on a small foot lathe. 
Dimensioned working drawings are given for each piece of 
machine work, and each operation is clearly described. This 
machine, when used as a dynamo, has an output of fifty 
watts; when used as a motor it will drive a small drill press 
or lathe. It can be used to drive a sewing machine on any 
and all ordinary work. The book is illustrated with more 
than sixty original engravings showing the actual construction 
of the different parts. Price, Cloth, $1.00 

15 



Electric Bells. 

By M. B. Sleeper. A complete treatise for the practical 
worker in installing, operating and testing bell circuits, 
burglar alarms, thermostats and other apparatus used with 
electric bells. Both the electrician and the experimenter will 
find in this book new material which is essential in their 
work. Tools, bells, batteries, unusual circuits, burglar alarms, 
annunciators, systems, thermostats, circuit breakers, time 
alarms, and other apparatus used in bell circuits are de- 
scribed from the standpoints of their application, construc- 
tion, and repair. The detailed instructions for building the 
apparatus will appeal to the experimenter particularly. The 
practical worker will find the chapters on Wiring Calculation 
of Wire Sizes and Magnet Windings, Upkeep of Systems 
and the Location of Faults of the greatest value in their 
work. 124 pages. Fully illustrated. Price, 75 cents. 

Commutator Construction 

By Wm. Baxter, Jr. The business end of dynamo or motor 
of the direct current type is the commutator. This book goes 
into the designing, building and maintenance of commutators, 
shows how to locate troubles and how to remedy, them; 
everyone who fusses with dynamos needs this. Fourth edi- 
tion. Price, 35 cents. 

Dynamos and Electric Motors and All About 
Them. 

By Edward Trevert. This volume gives practical directions 
for building a two H. P. Dynamo of the Edison type capable 
of lighting about fifty mazda lamps of the 20 watt size. In 
addition, it gives directions for building two small electric 
motors suitable for running sewing machines. The concluding 
chapter describes the construction of a simple bichromate 
battery adapted for running electric motors. 96 pages. Fully 
illustrated with detail drawings. Cloth.. Price, $1.00. 

Construction of a Transatlantic Wireless Receiv- 
ing Set. 

By L. G. Pacent and T. S. Curtis. A work for the Radio 
student who desires to construct and operate apparatus that 
will permit of the reception of messages from the large 
stations in Europe with an aerial of amateur proportions. 36 
pages. 23 illustrations, cloth. Price, 35 cents. 

Electric Toy Making, Dynamo Building and 
Electric Motor Construction. 

This work treats of the making at home of electrical toy*, 
electrical apparatus, motors, dynamos and instruments in 
general and is designed to bring within the reach of young 
and old the manufacture of genuine and useful electrical 
appliances. 210 pages, cloth. Fully illustrated. Twentieth 
edition, enlarged. Price, $1.50 

Experimental High Frequency Apparatus, How 
to Make and Use It. 

By Thomas Stanley Curtis. 69 pages, illustrated. 

Price, 50 cents. 

16 



Electrician's Handy Book. 

By Prof. T. O'Conor Sloane. This work has just been 
revised and much enlarged. It is intended for the practical 
electrician who has to make things go. The entire field of 
electricity is covered within its pages. It is a work of the 
most modern practice, written in a clear, comprehensive 
manner, and covers the subject thoroughly, beginning at the 
A B C of the subject, and gradually takes you to the more 
advanced branches of the science. It teaches you just what 
you should know about electricity. A practical work for the 
practical man. Contains forty-eight chapters. 

The publishers consider themselves fortunate in having 
secured the services of such a well and favorably known 
writer as Prof. Sloane, who has with the greatest care com- 
pleted a master work in concise form on this all important 
subject. 600 engravings, 840 pages, handsomely bound in 
cloth. 1920 Edition. Price, $4.00 

Electricity Simplified. 

By Prof. T. O'Conor Sloane. The object of 'Electricity 
Simplified" is to make the subject as plain as possible and 
to show what the modern conception of electricity is; to 
show how two plates of different metals immersed in acid 
can send a message around the globe; to explain how a 
bundle of copper wire rotated by a steam engine can be the 
agent in lighting our streets, to tell what the volt, ohm and 
ampere are, and what high and low tension mean; and to 
answer the questions that perpetually arise in the mind in 
this age of electricity. 172 pages. Illustrated. Thirteenth 
edition. Cloth. Price. $1.50 

Electric Wiring, Diagrams and Switchboards. 

By Newton Harrison, with additions by Thomas Poppe. 
This is the only complete work issued showing and telling 
you what you should know about direct and alternating cur- 
rent wiring. The work is free from advanced technicalities 
and mathematics, arithmetic being used throughout. It is in 
every respect a handy, well-written, instructive, comprehen- 
sive volume on wiring, for the wireman, foreman, contractor 
or electrician. Third revised edition. 303 pages, 130 illus- 
trations. Cloth. Price, $2.50 

House Wiring. 

By Thomas W. Poppe. Describing and illustrating up-to-date 
methods of installing electric light wiring. Contains just the 
information needed for successful wiring of a building. 
Fully illustrated with diagrams and plans. It solves all wiring 
problems and contains nothing that conflicts with the ruling? 
of the National Board of Fire Underwriters. Third edition 
revised and enlarged. 125 pages, fully illustrated, flexible 
cloth. Price, 75 cents 

High Frequency Apparatus, Its Construction and 
Practical Application. 

By Thomas Stanley Curtis. The most comprehensive and 
thorough work on. this interesting subject ever produced. 
The book is essentially practical in its treatment and it con- 
stitutes an accurate record of the researches of its author 
over a period of several years, during which time dozens of 
coils were built and experimented with. New revised and 
enlarged 1920 edition. 275 pages. Price, $3.00 

17 



How to Become a Successful Electrician. 

By Frof. T. O'Conor Sloane. An interesting book from 
cover to cover. Telling in simplest language the surest and 
easiest way to become a successful electrician. The studies 
to be followed, methods of work, field of operation and the 
requirements of the successful electrician are pointed out and 
fully explained. 202 pages. Illustrated. Eighteenth revised 
edition. Cloth. Price, $1.50 

Standard Electrical Dictionary. 

By Prof. T. O'Conor Sloane. Just issued an entirely new 
edition brought up to date and greatly enlarged — as a refer- 
ence book this work is beyond comparison as it contains over 
700 pages, nearly 500 illustrations, and definitions of about 
6,000 distinct words, terms and phrases. The definitions are 
terse and concise and includes every term used in electrical 
science. 

In its arrangement and typography the book is very con- 
venient. The word or term defined is printed in black faced 
type which readily catches the eye, while the body of the 
page is in smaller but distinct type. The definitions are well 
worded, and so as to be understood by the non-technical 
reader. The general plan is to give an exact, concise defini- 
tion, and then amplify and explain in a more popular way. 
Synonyms are also given, and references to other words and 
phrases are made. This work is absolutely indispensable to 
all in any way interested in electrical science, from the 
higher electrical expert to the everyday electrical workman. 
[n fact, it should be in the possession of all who desire to keen 
abreast with the progress of this branch of science. 1920 
enlarged edition. Nearly 800 pages. 400 illustrations. 

Price, $5.00 

Storage Batteries Simplified. 

By Victor W. Page. M.S.A.E. This is the most thorough 
and authoritative treatise ever published on this subject. It 
is written in easily understandable, non-technical language so 
that any one may grasp the basic principles of storage bat- 
tery action as well as their practical industrial applications. 
All electric and gasoline automobiles use storage batteries. 
Every automobile repairman, dealer or salesman should have 
a good knowledge of maintenance and repair of these im- 
portant elements of the motor car mechanism. This book 
not only tells how to charge,, care for and rebuild storage 
batteries but also outlines all the industrial uses. Learn 
how they run street cars, locomotives arid factory trucks. 
Get an understanding of the important functions they per- 
form in submarine boats, isolated lighting plants, railway 
switch and signal systems, marine applications, etc. This 
book tells how they are used in central station standby ser- 
vice, for starting automobile motors and in ignition systems. 
Every practical use of the modern storage battery is out- 
lined in this treatise. 208 pages, fully illustrated. 

Price, $2.00 

Wiring a House. 

By Herbert Pratt. Shows a house already built; tells just 
how to start about wiring it; where to begin; what wire to 
use; how to run it according to insurance rules; in fact, just 
the information you need. Directions apply equally to a 
shop. Fourth edition. Price, 35 cents 

18 



Switchboards. 

By William Baxter, Jr. This book appeals to every engi- 
neer and electrician who wants to know the practical side 
of things. All sorts and conditions of dynamos, connections 
and circuits are shown by diagram and illustrate just how 
the switchboard should be connected. Includes direct and 
alternating current boards, also those for arc lighting, incan- 
descent and power circuits. Special treatment on high voltage 
boards for power transmission. Second edition. 190 pages. 
Illustrated. Price, $2.00 

Telephone Construction, Installation, Wiring, 
Operation and Maintenance. 

By W. H. Rabcliffe and H. C. Cushing. This book gives 
the principles of construction and operation of both the 
Bell and Independent instruments; approved methods of 
installing and wiring them; the means of _ protecting them 
from lightning and abnormal currents; their connection to- 
gether for operation as series or bridging stations; and rules 
for their inspection and maintenance. Line wiring and the 
wiring and operation of special telephone systems are also 
treated. 224 pages, 132 illustrations. Second revised edition. 

Price, $1.50 

Wireless Telegraphy and Telephony Simply Ex- 
plained. 

By Alfred P. Morgan. This is undoubtedly one of the 
most complete and comprehensive treatises on the subject 
ever published, and a close study of its pages will enable 
one to master all the details of the wireless transmission of 
messages. The author has filled a long-felt want and has 
succeeded in furnishing a lucid, comprehensible explanation 
in simple language of the theory and practise of wireless 
telegraphy and telephony. Third edition. 154 pages, 156 
engravings. Price, $1.50 

Radio Time Signal Receiver. 

By Austin C. Lescarboura. This new book, "A Radio Time 
Signal Receiver," tells you how to build a simple outfit de- 
signed expressly for the beginner. You can build the out- 
fits in your own workshop and install them for jewelers 
either on a one-payment or a rental basis. The apparatus 
is of such simple design that it may be made by the average 
amateur mechanic possessing a few ordinary tools. 42 pages. 
Paper. Price, 35 cents 

Experimental Wireless Stations. 

By P. E. Edelman. The theory, design, construction and 
operation is fully treated including Wireless Telephony, 
Vacuum Tube, and quenched spark systems. The new en- 
larged 1920 edition is just issued and is strictly up to dale, 
correct and complete. This book tells how to make apparatus 
to not only hear all telephoned radio messages, but also how 
to make simple equipment that works for transmission over 
reasonably long distances. Then there is a host of new in- 
formation included. The first and only book to give you 
all the recent important radio improvements, some of which 
have never before been published. 24 chapters. 167 illustra- 
tions. Price, $2.50 

19 



FUEL 



Combustion of Coal and the Prevention of Smoke. 

By Wm, M. Barr. This book has been prepared with special 
reference to the generation of heat by the combustion of 
♦he common fuels found in the United States, and deals 
particularly with the conditions necessary to the economic 
and smokeless combustion of bituminous coals in stationary 
and locomotive steam boilers. The presentation of this 
important subject is systematic and progressive. The arrange- 
ment of the book is in a series of practical questions, to 
which are appended accurate answers, which describe in 
language, free from technicalities, the several processes in- 
volved in the furnace _ combustion of American fuels; it 
clearly states the essential requisites for perfect combustion, 
and points out the best methods for furnace construction for 
obtaining the greatest quantity of heat from any given quality 
of coal. Nearly 350 pages, fully illustrated. Fifth edition. 

Price, $1.50 

Smoke Prevention and Fuel Economy. 

By Booth and Kershaw. As the title indicates, this book 
of 197 pages and 75 illustrations deals with the problem of 
complete combustion, which it treats from the chemical and 
mechanical standpoints,, besides pointing out the economical 
and humanitarian aspects of the question. Price, $3.00 

GAS ENGINES AND GAS 



Gas, Gasoline and Oil Engines. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. Revised by Victor W. Pag£. Just 
issued new, revised and enlarged edition. Every user of a 
gas engine needs this book. Simple, instructive and right 
vp-to-date. The only complete work on the subject. Tells all 
about internal combustion engineering, treating exhaustively 
on the design, construction and practical application of all 
forms of gas, gasoline, kerosene and crude petroleum-oil 
engines. Describes minutely _ all auxiliary systems, such as 
lubrication, carburetion and ignition. Considers the theory 
and management of all forms of _ explosive motors for sta- 
tionary and marine work, automobiles, aeroplanes and motor- 
cycles. Includes also Producer Gas and Its Production. 
Invaluable instructions for all students, gas-engine owners, 
gas-engineers, patent experts, designers, mechanics, drafts- 
men and all having to do with the modern power. Illustrated 
by over 400 engravings, many specially made from engineer- 
ing drawings, all in correct proportion. Nearly 700 octavo 
pages and 500 engravings. Price, net, $3.00 

Gasoline Engines: Their Operation, Use and Care. 

By A. Hyatt Verrill. A comprehensive, simple and prac- 
tical work, treating of gasoline engines for stationary, marine 
or vehicle use; their construction, design, management, care, 
operation, repair, installation and troubles. A complete glos- 
sary of technical terms and an alphabetically arranged table 
of troubles and symptoms form a most valuable and unique 
feature of the book. 5% x 7y 2 . Cloth. 275 pages, 152 illus- 
trations. Price, $2.00 

20 



Gas Engine Construction. 

Or How to Build a Half-Horse-power Gas Engine. By 
Parsell and Weed. A practical treatise describing the theory 
and principles of the action of gas engines of various types, 
and the design and construction of a half-horse-power gas 
engine, with illustrations of the work in actual progress, 
together with dimensioned working drawings giving clearly 
the sizes of the various details. 300 pages. Third edition. 
Cloth. Price, $3.00 

Chemistry of Gas Manufacture. 

By H. M. Royles. This book covers points likely to arise in 
the ordinary course of the duties of the engineer or manager 
of a gas works not large enough to necessitate the employment 
of a separate chemical staff. It treats of the testing of the 
raw materials employed in the manufacture of illuminating 
coal gas and of the gas produced. The preparation of 
standard solutions is given as well as the chemical and physi- 
cal examination of gas coal. 5^4x8^4. Cloth. 328 naees, 
82 illustrations, 1 colored plate. Price, $5.00 

Modern Gas Engines and Producer Gas Plants. 

By R. E. Mathot, M.E. A practical treatise of 320 pages, 
fully illustrated by 175 detailed illustrations, _ setting forth 
the principles of gas engines and producer design, the selec- 
tion and installation of an engine, conditions of perfect 
operation, producer-gas engines and their possibilities, the 
care of gas engines and producer-gas plants, with a chapter 
on volatile hydrocarbon and oil engines. This book has been 
endorsed by Dugal Clerk as a most useful work for all inter- 
ested in gas engine installation and producer gas. $3.00 

The Gasoline Engine on the Farm: Its Operation, 
Repair and Uses. 

By Xeno /W. Putnam. A useful and practical treatise on 
the modern gasoline and kerosene engine, its construction, 
management, repair and the many uses to which it can be 
applied in present-day farm life. It considers all the various 
household, shop and field uses of this up-to-date motor and 
includes chapters on engine installation, power transmission 
and the best arrangement of the power plant in reference 
to the work. 5j4 x 7^. Cloth. 527 pages, 179 illustra- 
tions. Price, $3.00 

How to Run and Install Two- and Four-Cycle 
Marine, Gasoline Engines. 

By C. Von Culin. New revised and enlarged edition just 
issued. The object of this little book is to furnish a pocket 
instructor for the beginner, the busy man who uses an engine 
for pleasure or profit, but who does not have the time or 
inclination for a technical book, but simply to thoroughly 
understand how to properly operate, install and care for his 
own engine. . The index refers to each trouble, remedy and 
subject alphabetically. Being a quick reference to find the 
cause, remedy and prevention for troubles, and to become 
an expert with his own engine. Pocket size. Paper binding. 

Price, 25 cents 

21 



Modern Gas Tractor, Its Construction, Utility, 
Operation and Repair. 

By Victor W. Page. Treats exhaustively on the design and 
construction of farm tractors and tractor power-plants, and 
gives complete instructions on their care, operation and re- 
pair. All types and sizes of gasoline, kerosene and oil 
tractory are described, and every phase of traction engineer- 
ing practice fully covered. Invaluable to all desiring re- 
liable information on gas motor propelled traction engines 
and their use. Second edition revised by much additional 
matter. 5%x7y 2 . Cloth, 504 pages, 228 illustrations. 3 
folding plates. Price, $3.00 

GEARING AND CAMS 



Bevel Gear Tables. 

By D. Ag. Engstrom. No one who has to do with bevel 
gears in any way should be without this book. The designer 
and draftsman will find it a great convenience, while to 
the machinist who turns up the blanks or cuts the teeth it 
is invaluable, as all needed dimensions are given and no 
fancy figuring need be done. Third edition. Cloth. $1.50 

Change Gear Devices. 

By Oscar E. Perrigo. A book for every designer, draftsman 
and mechanic who is interested in feed changes for any kind 
of machines. This shows what has been done and how. 
Gives plans, patents and all information that you need. Saves 
hunting through patent records and reinventing old ideas. 
A standard work of reference. Third edition. $1.50 

Drafting of Cams. 

By Louis Rouillion. The laying out of cams is a serious 
problem unless you know how to go at it right. This puts 
you on the right road for practically any kind of cam you 
are likely to run up against. Third edition. 35 cents 

HYDRAULICS 



Hydraulic Engineering. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. A treatise on the properties, power, 
and resources of water for all purposes. Including the meas- 
urements of streams; the flow of water in pipes or conduits; 
the horse-power of falling water; turbine and impact water- 
wheels; wave-motors, centrifugal, reciprocating and air-lift 
pumps. With 300 figures and diagrams and 36 practical 
tables. 320 pages. Price, $4.50 

ICE AND REFRIGERATION 



Pocketbook of Refrigeration and Ice Making. 

By A. J. Wallis-Tavlor. This is one of the latest and 
most comprehensive reference books published on the subject 
of refrigeration and cold storage. It explains the properties 

22 



and refrigerating effect of the different fluids in use, the 
management of refrigerating machinery and the contsruction 
and insulation of cold rooms with their required pipe surface 
for different degrees of cold; freezing mixtures and non- 
freezing brines, temperatures of cold rooms for all kinds of 
provisions, cold storage charges for all classes of goods, ice 
making and storage of ice, data and memoranda for constant 
reference by refrigerating engineers, with nearly one hundred 
tables containing valuable references to every fact and con- 
dition required in the installment and operation of a refriger- 
ating plant. New edition just published. Price, $2.00 

INVENTIONS— PATENTS 



Inventor's Manual, How to Make a Patent Pay. 

This is a book designed as a guide to inventors in perfecting 
their inventions, taking out their patents, and disposing of 
them. It is not in any sense a Patent Solicitor's circular nor 
a Patent Broker's advertisement. No advertisements of any 
description appear in the work. It is a book containing a 
quarter of a century's experience of a successful inventor, 
together with notes based upon the experience of many other 
inventors. Revised and enlarged second edition. Nearly 150 
pages. Illustrated. Price $1.25 

KNOTS 



Knots, Splices and Rope Work. 

By A. Hyatt Verrill. This is a practical book giving com- 
plete and simple directions for making all the most useful and 
ornamental knots in common use, with chapters on Splicing, 
Pointing, Seizing, Serving, etc. This book is fully illustrated 
with 154 original engravings, which show how each knot, 
tie or splice is formed, and its appearance when finished. 
The book will be found of the greatest value to campers, 
yachtsmen, travelers or Boy Scouts, in fact, to anyone having 
occasion to use or handle rope or knots for any purpose. 
The book^ is thoroughly reliable and practical, and is not 
only a guide but a teacher. It is the standard work on the 
subject. Second edition revised. 12S pages, 154 original 
engravings. Price, $1.00 

LATHE WORK 



Complete Practical Machinist. 

By Joshua Rose. The new, twentieth revised and enlarged 
edition is now ready. This is one of the best-known books 
on machine-shop work, and written for the practical work- 
man in the language of the workshop. It gives full, practi- 
cal intsructions on the use of all kinds of metal-working tools, 
both hand and machine, and tells how the work should be 
properly done. It covers lathe work, vise work, drills and 
drilling, taps and dies, hardening and tempering, the making 
and use of tools, tool grinding, marking out work, machine 
tools, etc. No machinist's library is complete without this 
volume. 547 pages, 432 illustrations. (1920.) Price $3.00 

23 



The Lathe — Its Design, Construction and Opera, 
t tion, With Practical Examples of Lathe Work. 

By Oscar E. Perrigo. A new revised edition, and the only 
complete American work on the subject, written by a man 
who knows not only how work ought to be done, but who 
also knows how to do it, and how to convey this knowledge 
to others. It is strictly up-to-date in its descriptions and 
illustrations. Lathe history and the relations of the lathe 
to manufacturing are given; also a description of the various 
devices for feeds and thread cutting mechanisms from early 
efforts in this direction to the present time. Lathe design is 
thoroughly discussed, including back gearing, driving cones, 
thread-cutting gears, and all the essential element of the 
modern lathe. The classification of lathes is taken up, giving 
the essential differences of the several types of lathes includ- 
ing, as is usually understood, engine lathes, bench lathes, 
speed lathes, forge lathes, gap lathes, pulley lathes, forming 
lathes, multiple-spindle lathes, rapid-reduction lathes, precision 
lathes, turret lathes, special lathes, electrically-driven lathes, 
etc. In addition to the complete exposition on construction 
and design, much practical matter on lathe installation, care 
and operation has been incorporated in the enlarged new edi- 
tion. All kinds of lathe attachments for drilling, milling, 
etc., are described and complete instructions are given to 
enable the novice machinist to grasp the art of lathe oper- 
ation as well as the principles involved in design. A number 
of difficult machining operations are described at length and 
illustrated. The new edition has nearly 500 pages and 350 
illustrations. Price, $3.00 

Turning and Boring Tapers. 

By Fred H. Colvin. There are two ways to turn tapers; 
the right way and one other. This treatise has to do with 
the right way; it tells you how to start the work properly, 
how to set the lathe, what tools to use and how to use them, 
and forty and one other little things that you should follow. 
Fourth edition. Price, 35 cents 

LIQUID AIR 

Liquid Air and the Liquefaction of Gases. 

By T. O'Conor Sloane. The third revised edition of this 
book has just been issued. Much new material is added 
to it; and the all important uses of liquid air and gas pro- 
cesses in modern industry, in the production especially of 
nitrogen compounds, are described. The book gives the his- 
tory of the theory, discovery, and manufacture of Liquid 
Air, and contains an illustrated description of all the ex- 
periments that have excited the wonder of audiences all over 
the country. It shows how liquid air, like water, is car- 
ried hundreds of miles and is handled in open buckets. It 
tells what may be expected from it in the near future. A 
book that renders simple one of the most perplexng chemical 
problems of the century. Startling developments illustrated 
by actual experiments. It is not only a work of scientific 
interest and authority, but is intended for the general read- 
er, being written in a popular style — easily understood by 
everyone. 400 pages fully illustrated. (1920.) Price, $3.00 

24 



LOCOMOTIVE ENGINEERING 
Air-Brake Catechism. 

By Robert H. Blackall. This book is a standard text book. 
It is the only practical and complete work published. Treats 
on the equipment manufactured by the Westinghouse Air 
Brake Company, including the E-T Locomotive Brake Equip- 
ment, the K (Quick-Service) Triple Valve for freight ser- 
vice; the L High Speed Triple Valve; the P-C Passenger 
Brake Equipment, and the Cross Compound Pump. The 
operation of all parts of the apparatuses explained in detail 
and a practical way of locating their peculiarities and rem- 
edying their defects is given. Endorsed and used by air- 
brake instructors and examiners on nearly every railroad 
in the United States. Twenty-sixth edition. 411 pages, fully 
illustrated with folding! plates and diagrams. New edition. 

Price, $2.50 

Application of Highly Superheated Steam to 
Locomotives. 

By Robert Garbe. A practical book which cannot be recom- 
mended too highly to those motive-power men who are 
anxious to maintain the highest efficiency in their locomo- 
tives. Contains special chapters on Generation of Highly 
Superheated Steam; Superheated Steam and the Two-Cylinder 
Simple Engine; Compounding and Superheating; Designs of 
Locomotive Superheaters;' Constructive Details of Locomo- 
tives Using Highly Superheated Steam. Experimental and 
Working Results. Illustrated with folding plates and tables. 
Cloth. Price, $3.00 

Combustion of Coal and the Prevention of Smoke. 

By Wm. M. Barr. To be a success a fireman must be "Light 
on Coal." He must keep his fire in good condition, and 
prevent, as far as possible, the smoke nuisance. To do this, 
be should know how coal burns, how smoke is formed and 
the proper burning of fuel to obtain the best results. He 
can learn this, and more too, from Barr's "Combustion of 
Coal." •"lit is an absolute authority on all questions relating 
to the firing of a locomotive. Fifth edition. Nearlv 350 
pages, fully* illustrated. Price, $1.50 

Diary of a Round-House Foreman. 

By T. S. Reilly. This is the greatest book of railroad experi- 
ences ever published. Containing a fund of information and 
suggestions along the line of handling men, organizing, etc., 
that one cannot afford to miss. 176 pages. Price, $1.25 

Link Motions, Valves and Valve Setting. 

Bv Fred H. Colvin, Associate Editor of "American Machin- 
ist " A handv book that clears up the mysteries of valve 
setting. Shows the different valve gears in use, how they 
work, and why. Piston and slide valves of different types 
are illustrated and explained. A book that every railroad 
man in the motive-power department ought to have. Fully 
illustrated. New revised and enlarged edition just published. 

Price, 75 cents 

25 



Train Rule Examinations Made Easy. 

By G. E. Colling wood. This is the only practical work on 
train rules in print. Every detail is covered, and puzzling 
points are explained in simple, comprehensive language, mak- 
ing it a practical treatise for the train dispatcher, engine- 
man, trainman and all others who have to do with the move- 
ments of trains. Contains complete and* reliable information 
of the Standard Code of Train Rules for'single track. Shows 
signals in colors, as used on the different roads. Explains 
fully the practical application of train orders, giving a clear 
and definite understanding of all orders which may be used. 
Second edition revised. 256 pages. Fully illustrated with 
train signals in colors. Price, $1.50 

Locomotive Boiler Construction. 

By Frank A. Kleinhans. The only book showing how loco- 
motive boilers are built in modern shops. Shows all types of 
boilers used; gives details of construction; practical facts, 
such as life of riveting punches and dies, work done per 
day, allowance for bending and flanging sheets and other 
data that means dollars to any railroad man. Second edition* 
451 pages, 334 illustrations. Six folding plates. Cloth. 

Price, $3.50 

Locomotive Breakdowns and Their Remedies. 

By Geo. L. Fowler. Revised by Wm. W. Wood, Air-Brake 
Instructor. Pocket edition. It is out of the question to try 
and tell you about every subject that is covered in this 
pocket edition of Locomotive Breakdowns. Just imagine 
all the common troubles that an engineer may expect to 
happen some time, and then add all of the unexpected ones, 
troubles that could occur, but that you had never thought 
about, and you will find that they are all treated with the 
very best methods of repair. Walschaert Locomotive Valve 
Gear Troubles, Electric Headlight Troubles, as well as Ques- 
tions and Answers on the Air Brake, are all included. Eighth 
edition. 294 pages. Fully illustrated. Price, $1.50 

Locomotive Catechism. 

By Robert Grimshaw. Twenty-eighth revised and enlarged 
edition. This may well be called an encyclopedia of the 
locomotive. Contains over 4,000 examination questions with 
their answers, including among them those asked at the first, 
second and third year's examinations. 825 pages, 437 illus- 
trations and 3 folding plates. Price, $2.50 

Westinghouse E. T. Air-Brake Instruction Pocket- 
book Catechism. 

By Wm. W. Wood, Air-Brake Instructor. A practical work 
containing examination questions and answers on the E. T. 
Equipment. Covering what the E. T. Brake is. How it 
should be operated. What to do when defective. Not a 
question can be asked of the engineman up for promotion 
on either the No. 5 or the No. 6 E. T. equipment that is not 
asked and answered in the book. If you want to thoroughly 
understand the E. T. equipment get a copy of this book. It 
covers every detail. Makes air-brake troubles and examina- 
tions easy. Fully illustrated with colored plates, showing 
various pressures. Cloth. (1920.) Price, $3.50 

26 



Practical Instructor and Reference Book for 
Locomotive Firemen and Engineers. 

By Chas. F. Lockhart. An entirely new book on the loco- 
motive. It appeals to every railroad man, as it tells him how 
things are done and the right way to do them. Written by 
a man who has had years of practical experience in locomotive 
shops and on the road firing and running. The information 
given in this book cannot be found in any other similar 
treatise. Eight hundred and fifty-one questions with their 
answers are _ included, which will prove specially helpful to 
those preparing for examination. 368 pages, 88 illustrations. 
Cloth. Price, $2.00 

Prevention of Railroad Accidents, or Safety in 
Railroading. 

By George Bradshaw. This book is a heart-to-heart talk 
with railroad employees, dealing with facts, not theories, and 
showing the men in the ranks, from every-day experience, 
how accidents occur and how they may be avoided. The 
book is illustrated with seventy original photographs and 
drawings showing the safe and unsafe methods of work. No 
visionary schemes, no ideal pictures. Just plain facts and 
practical suggestions are given. Every railroad employee 
who reads the book is a better and safer man to have in 
railroad service. It gives just the information which will be 
the means of preventing many injuries and deaths. All 
railroad employees should procure a copy; read it, and do 
their part in preventing accidents. 169 pages. Pocket size. 
Fully illustrated. Price, 50 cents 

Walschaert Locomotive Valve Gear. 

By Wm, W. Wood. If you would thoroughly understand 
the Walschaert Valve Gear, you should possess a copy of 
this book. The author divides the subject into four divisions, 
as follows: I. Analysis of the gear. II. Designing and 
erection of the gear. III. Advantages of the gear. IV. Ques- 
tions and answers relating to the Walschaert Valve Gear. 
This book is specially valuable to those preparing for pro- 
motion. Third edition. 245 pages. Fully illustrated. Cloth. 

Price, $2.59 

MACHINE SHOP PRACTICE 



Modern Machine Shop Construction, Equipment 
and Management. 

By Oscar E. Perrigo. The only work published that describes 
the Modern Machine Shop or Manufacturing Plant from the 
time the grass is growing on the site intended for it until the 
finished product is shipped. Just the book needed by those 
contemplating the erection of modern shop buildings, the 
rebuilding and reorganization of old ones or the introduction 
of Modern Shop Methods, Time and Cost Systems. It is a 
book _ written and illustrated by a practical shop man for 
practical shop men who are too busy to read theories and 
want facts. It is the most complete all-around book of its 
kind ever published. Second edition. 384 pages, 219 original 
and specially-made illustrations. Price, $5.00 

27 



EVERY PRACTICAL MAN NEEDS 

A MAGAZINE WHICH WILL TELL HIM 
HOW TO MAKE AND DO THINGS 



HAVE US ENTER YOUR SUBSCRIPTION 

to the best mechanical magazine on the market. 
Only Two Dollars a year for twelve numbers. Sub- 
scribe to-day to 



EVERYDAY ENGINEERING 



A monthly magazine devoted to practical mechanics for 
everyday men. Its aim is to popularize engineering as a 
science, teaching the elements of applied mechanics and 
electricity in a straightforward and understandable manner. 
The magazine maintains its own experimental laboratory, 
where the devices described in articles submitted to the 
Editor are first tried out and tested before they are pub- 
lished. This important innovation places the standard of 
the published material very high, and it insures accuracy 
and dependability.^ 

_ The magazine is the only _one in this country that spe- 
cializes in practical model building. Articles in past issues 
have given comprehensive designs for many model boats, 
including submarines and chasers, model steam and gasoline 
engines, electric motors and generators, etc., etc. This 
feature is a permanent one in the magazine. 

Another popular department is that devoted to automobiles 
and airplanes. Care, maintenance, and operation receive 
full and authoritative treatment. Every article is written 
from the practical, everyday man standpoint, rather than 
from that of the professional. 

The magazine entertains while it instructs. It is a journal 
of practical, dependable information, given in a style that 
it may be readily _ assimilated and applied by the man with 
little or no technical training. The aim is to place before 
the man who leans toward practical mechanics a series of 
concise, crisp, readable talks on what is going on and how 
it is done. These articles are profusely illustrated with, 
clear, snappy photographs, specially posed to illustrate the 
subject in the magazine's own studio by its own staff of 
technically-trained illustrators and editors. 

The subscription price of the magazine is two dollars per 
year in U. S., two dollars and twenty-five cents in Canada 
and three dollars in foreign countries. Sample copy sent on 
receipt of twenty cents. 

28 



Machine Shop Arithmetic. 

By Colvin-Cheney. Most popular book for shop men. 
Shows how all shop problems are worked out and "why." 
Includes change gears for cutting any threads; drills, taps, 
shink and force fits; metric system of measurements and 
threads. Used by all classes of mechanics and for instruction 
in Y. M. C. A. and other schools. Seventh edition. 131 
pages. Price, 75 cents. 

Abrasives and Abrasive Wheels. 

By Fred B. Jacobs. A new book for everyone interested in 
abrasives or grinding. A careful reading of the book will 
not only make mechanics better able to use abrasives intel- 
ligently, bu* It will also_ tell the shop superintendent of 
many shor'^ cuts and efficiency-increasing kinks. The econ- 
omic advantage in using large grinding wheels are fully 
explained, together with many other things that will tend to 
give the superintendent or workman a keen insight into 
abrasive engineering. 340 pages, 200 illustrations. This is 
an indispensable book for every machinist. Price, $3.00 

American Tool Making and Interchangeable 
Manufacturing. 

By J. V. Woodworth. In its 500-odd pages the one subject 
only, Tool Making, and whatever relates thereto, is dealt with. 
The work stands without a rival. It is a complete practical 
treatise on the art of American Tool Making and system of 
interchangeable manufacturing as carried on to-day in the 
United States. In it are described and illustrated all of the 
different types—and classes of small tools, fixtures, devices 
and special, appliances which are in general use in all ma- 
chine-manufacturing and metal-working establishments where 
economy, capacity and interchangeability in the production 
of machined metal parts are imperative. The science of jig 
making is exhaustively discussed, and particular attention 
is paid to drill jigs, boring, profiling and milling^ fixtures 
and other devices in which the parts to be machined are 
located and fastened within the contrivances. All of the 
tools, fixtures and devices illustrated and described have 
been or are used for the actual production of work, such 
as parts of drill presses, lathes, patented machinery, type- 
writers, electrical apparatus, mechanical appliances, brass 
goods, composition parts, mould products, sheet metal arti- 
cles, drop forgings, jewelry, watches, medals, coins, etc. 
Second edition. 531 pages. Price, $4.50 

Henley's Encyclopedia of Practical Engineering 
and Allied Trades. 

Edited by Joseph G. Horner, A.M.I.Mech.E. This book 
covers the entire practice of Civil and Mechanical Engineer- 
ing. The best known experts in all branches of engineering 
have contributed to these volumes. The Cyclopedia is admir- 
ably well adapted to the needs of the beginner and the self- 
taught practical man, as well as the mechanical engineer,, 
designer, draftsman, shop superintendent, foreman and 
machinist. ^ 

It is a modern treatise in five volumes. Handsomely bound 
in half morocco, each volume containing nearly 500'pages, 
with thousands of illustrations, including diagrammatic and 
sectional drawings with full explanatory details. 
Price, $30.00. For the complete set of five volumes. 

29 



THE WHOLE FIELD OF MECHANICAL 

MOVEMENTS COVERED BY MR. 

HISCOX'S TWO BOOKS 



We publish two books by Gardner D. Hiscox that will 
keep you from "inventing" things that have been done be- 
fore, and suggest ways of doing things that you have not 
thought of before. Many a man spends time and money, 
pondering over some mechanical problem, only to learn, after 
he has solved the problem, that the same thing has been 
accomplished and put in practice by others long before. Time 
and money spent in an effort to accomplish what has al- 
ready been accomplished are time and money lost. The 
whole field of mechanics, every known mechanical movement, 
and practically every device is covered by these two books. 
If the thing you want has been invented, it is illustrated in 
them. If it hasn't been invented, then you'll find in them 
the nearest things to what you want, some movement or 
device that will apply in your case, perhaos; or which will 
give you a key from which to work. No book or set of 
books ever published is of more real value to the inventor, 
draftsman or practical mechanic than the two volumes de- 
scribed below. 

Mechanical Movements, Powers and Devices. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. This is a collection of 1,890 
engravings of different mechanical motions and appliances, 
accompanied by appropriate text, making it a book of great 
value to the inventor, the draftsman, and to all readers 
with mechanical tastes. The book is divided into eighteen 
sections or chapters, in which the subject-matter is classified 
under the following heads: Mechanical Powers; Transmis- 
sion of Power; Measurement of Power; Steam Power; Air 
Power Appliances; Electric Power and Construction; Navi- 
gation and Roads; Gearing; Motion and Devices; Control- 
ling Motion; Horological; Mining; Mill and Factory Appli- 
ances; Construction and Devices; Drafting Devices; Miscel- 
laneous Devices, etc. Fifteenth edition. 400 octavo pages. 

Price, $4.00 

Mechanical Appliances, Mechanical Movements 
and Novelties of Construction. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. This is a supplementary volume 
to the one upon mechanical movements. Unlike the first 
volume, which is more elementary in character, this volume 
contains illustrations and descriptions of many combina- 
tions of motiens and of mechanical devices and appliances 
found in different lines of machinery, each device being 
shown by a line drawing with a description showing it9 
working parts and the method of operation. From the 
multitude of devices described and illustrated might be men- 
tioned, in passing, such items as conveyors and elevators, 
Prony brakes, thermometers, various types of boilers, solar 
engines, oil-fuel burners, condensers, evaporators, Corliss 
and other valve gears, governors, gas engines, water motors 
of various descriptions, air ships, # motors and_ dynamos, 
automobiles and motor bicycles, railway lock signals, car 
couplers, link and gear motions, ball bearings, breech block 
mechanism for heavv guns, and a large accumulation of 
Others of equal importance. 1,000 specially made engravinsrs. 
396 octavo pages. Fourth revised edition. Price, $4.00 
30 



"Shop Kinks." 

By Robert Grimshaw. This shows special methods of doing 
work of various kinds, and releasing cost of production. Has 
hints and kinks from some of the largest shops in this 
country and Europe. You are almost suire to find some that 
apply to your work, and in such a way as to save time and 
trouble. 400 pages. Fifth edition. Cloth. Price, $3.00 



Machine Shop Tools and Shop Practice. 

By W. H. Vandervoort. A woik of 555 pages and 673 illus* 
trations, describing in every detail the construction, opera- 
tion, and manipulation of both hand and machine tools. 
Includes chapters on filing, fitting, and scraping surfaces; 
on drills, reamers, taps, and dies; the lathe and its tools; 
planers, shapers, and their tools; milling machines and cut- 
ters; gear cutters and gear cutting; drilling machines and 
drill work; grinding machines and their work; hardening and 
tempering; gearing, belting, and transmission machinery; 
useful data- and tables. Sixth, edition. Cloth. Price, $4.50 



Model Making. 

By Raymond Francis Yates. A new book for the mechanic 
and model maker. This is the first book of its kind to be 
published in this country and all those interested in model 
engineering should have a copy. The first eight chapters are 
devoted to such subjects as Silver Soldering, Heat Treatment 
of Steel, Lathe Work, Pattern Making, Grinding, etc. The 
remaining twenty-four chapters describe the construction of 
various models such as rapid fire naval guns, speed boats, 
model steam engines, turbines, etc. 

This book must not be confused with those describing the 
construction of toys now on the market. It is a practical 
treatise on model engineering and construction. 400 pages. 
301 illustrations. Price, $3.00 



The Modern Machinist. 

By John T. Usher. This book might be called a compen- 
dium of shop methods, showing a variety of special tools and 
appliances which will give new ideas to many mechanics from 
the superintendent down to the man at the bench. It will 
be found a valuable addition to any machinist's library^ and 
should be consulted whenever a new or difficult job is to 
be done, whether it is boring, milling, turning, or planing, 
as they are all treated in a practical manner. Fifth edition. 
320 pages, 250 illustrations. Cloth. Price, $2.50 



Threads and Thread Cutting. 

By Colvin and Stabel. This clears up many of the mysteries 
of thread cutting, such as double and triple threads, internal 
threads, catching threads, use of hobs, etc. Contains a lot 
of useful hints and several tables. Third edition. 35 cents 

31 



marine engineering 

^he Naval Architect's and Shipbuilder's Pocket- 
book 

of Formulae, Rules, and Tables and Marine Engineer's and 
Surveyor's Handy Book of Reference. By Clement Mack- 
*ow and > Lloyd Woollard. The eleventh revised and en- 
larged edition of this most comprehensive work has just been 
issued. _ It is absolutely indispensable to all engaged in the 
Shipbuilding Industry, as it condenses into a compact form 
all data and formulas that are ordinarily required. The book 
is completely up to date, including among other subjects a 
section on Aeronautics. 750 pages, limp leather binding. 

Price, $6.00 net 

Marine Engines and Boilers, Their Design and 
Construction. The Standard Book. 

By Dr. G. Bauer, Leslie S. Robertson and S. Bryan Don- 
ki_n._ In the words of Dr. Bauer, the present work owes its 
origin to an oft felt want of a condensed treatise embodying 
the theoretical and practical rules used in designing marine 
engines and boilers. The need of such a work has been 
felt by most engineers engaged in the construction and work- 
ing of marine engines, not only by the younger men, but also 
by those of greater experience. The fact that the original 
German work was written by the chief engineer of the 
famous Vulcan Works, Stettin, is in itself a guarantee that 
this book is in all respects thoroughly up-to-date, and that 
it embodies all the information which is necessary for the 
design and construction of the highest types of marine en- 
gines and boilers. It may be said that the motive power 
which Dr. Bauer has placed in the fast German liners that 
lave been turned out of late years from the Stettin Works 
represent the very best practice in marine engineering of 
the present day. The work is clearly written, thoroughly 
systematic, theoretically sound; while the character of the 
plans, drawings, tables, and statistics is without reproach. 
The illustrations are careful reproductions from actual work- 
ing drawings, with some well-executed photographic views of 
completed engines and boilers. 744 pages, 550 illustrations, 
and numerous tables. Cloth. Price, $10.00 net 

MANUAL TRAINING 



Economics of Manual Training. 

By Louis Rouillion. The only book that gives just the in- 
formation needed by all interested in manual training, re- 
garding buildings, equipment and supplies. Shows exactly 
what is needed for all grades of the work from the Kinder- 
garten to the High and Normal School. Gives itemized lists 
of everything needed and tells Just what it ought to cost. 
Also shows where to buy supplies. Illustrated. Second 
edition. Cloth, Price, $2.00- 

32 



MINING 



Prospector's Field-Book and Guide. 

By H. S. Osborn. 1920 edition, revised and enlarged by 
M. W. von Bernewitz. The last edition of this volume was 
published in 1910. It and the previous seven editions were 
suitable for those times. The new ninth (1920) edition will 
be found suitable for the present time. While the old-time 
prospector will always be an important factor, the knowledge 
of and search for the common and rarer minerals is bringing 
out men who are trained to some degree. In the field they 
need a handy and suggestive pocket-book containing hints on 
prospecting— where to search and how to test — couched in 
simple terms. The chapter on preliminary instructions covers 
the fundamentals of a study of the earth's crust. Then fol- 
low discussions on practical mineralogy, crystallography, the 
value _ of the blowpipe in prospecting, surveying, and chemical 
tests in the field. Separate chapters are given to the precious 
and base metals, also to the non-metallic minerals. The 
chapter on the non-ferrous or alloy group of minerals is en- 
tirely new, while the section on oil has been expanded. Sur- 
ficial indications for copper receive full attention. The 
chapter on gems has been rewritten and matters concerning 
gemstones used for industrial purposes, such as abrasives, 
included. A general chapter covers many useful minerals 
and salts. An important guide and suggestive aid throughout 
the new book are the many brief descriptions of ore deposits 
of all minerals occurring in scattered parts of the world. 
No other prospector's book contains this class of information. 
In the appendix will be found numbers of useful tables, and 
a complete glossary of mining and mineralogical terms. The 
ninth edition of Osborn's "Prospector's Field Book and 
Guide" will be found up to date, worth while, and full value 
for the money asked. Flexible fabrikoid. 375 pages. 57 
illustrations. 1920 edition. Price, $3.00 



PATTERN MAKING 



Practical Pattern Making. 

By F. W. Barrows. This book, now in its second edition, 
is a comprehensive and entirely practical treatise on the 
subject of pattern making, illustrating pattern work in both 
wood and metal, and with definite instructions on the use 
of plaster of paris in the trade. It gives specific and detailed 
descriptions of the materials used by pattern makers and 
describes the tools; both those for the bench and the more 
interesting machine tools; having complete chapters on the 
lathe, the circular saw and the band saw. It gives many 
examples of pattern work, each one fully illustrated and 
explained with much detail. These examples, in their great 
rariety, offer much that will be found of interest to all 
pattern makers, and especially to the younger ones, who are 
seeking information on the more advanced branches of their 
trade. Containing nearly 350 pages and 170 illustrations. 
Second edition, revised and enlarged. Price, $2.50 

33 



PERFUMERY 



Henley's Twentieth Century Book of Receipts, 
Formulas and Processes. 

Edited by G. D. Hiscox. The most valuable techno-chemical 
receipt book published. Contains over 10,000 practical re- 
ceipts, many of which will prove of special value to the 
perfumer. Price, $4.00 

Perfumes and Cosmetics, Their Preparation and 
Manufacture. 

By G. W. Askinson, Perfumer. A comprehensive treatise, 
in which there has been nothing omitted that could be of 
value to the perfumer or manufacturer of toilet preparations. 
Complete directions for making handkerchief perfumes, 
smelling-salts, sachets, fumigating pastiles; preparations for 
the care of the skin, the mouth, the hair, cosmetics, hair 
dyes and other toilet articles are given, also a detailed 
description of aromatic substances; their nature, tests of 
purity, and wholesale manufacture, including a chapter on 
synthetic products, with formulas, for their use. A book of 
general, as well as professional interest, meeting the wants 
not only of the druggist and perfume manufacturer, but also 
of the general public. Fourth edition much enlarged and 
brought up-to-date. Nearly 400 pages, illustrated, $5.00 



PLUMBING 



Standard Practical Plumbing. 

By R. M. Starbuck. This is a complete treatise and covers 
the subject of modern plumbing in all its branches. It 
treats exhaustively on the skilled work of the plumber and 
the theory underlying plumbing devices and operations, and 
commends itself at once to anyone working in any branch 
of the plumbing trade. A large amount of space is devoted 
to a very complete and practical treatment of the subjects of 
hot water supply, circulation and range boiler work. Another 
valuable feature is the special chapter on drawing for 
plumbers. The illustrations, of which there are three hun- 
dred and forty-seven, one hundred being full-page plates, 
were drawn expressly for this book and show the most 
modern and best American practice in plumbing construction. 
6 l / 2 yL9 l A. Cloth, 406 pages, 347 illustrations. Price, $3.50 

Mechanical Drawing for Plumbers. 

By R. M. Starbuck. A concise, comprehensive and practical 
treatise on the subject of mechanical drawing in its various 
modern applications to the work of all who are in any way 
connected with the plumbing trade. Nothing will so help 
the plumber in estimating and in explaining work to cus- 
tomers and workmen as a knowledge of drawing, and to the 
workman it is of inestimable value if he is to rise above his 
position to positions of greater responsibility. 150 illus- 
trations. Price, $2.00 

34 



Modern Plumbing Illustrated. 

By R. M. Starbuck. The author of this book, Mr. R. M. 
Starbuck, is one of the leading authorities on plumbing in 
the United States. The book represents the highest standard 
of plumbing work. A very comprehensive work, illustrating 
and - describing the drainage and ventilation of dwellings, 
apartments and public buildings. The very latest and most 
approved methods in all branches of sanitary installation are 
given. The standard book for master plumbers, architects, 
builders, plumbing inspectors, boards of health, boards of 
plumbing examiners and for the property owner, as well 
as the workman and apprentice. It contains fifty-seven en- 
tirely new and large full pages of illustrations with descrip- 
tive text, all of which have been made specially for this 
work. These plates show all kinds of modern plumbing work. 
Each plate is accompanied by several pages of text, giving 
notes and practical suggestions, sizes of pipe, proper measure- 
ments for setting up work, etc. Suggestions on estimating 
plumbing construction are also included. 407 octavo pages, 
fully illustrated by 57 full-page engravings. Price, $5.00 



RECIPE BOOK 



Henley's Twentieth Century Book of Recipes, 
Formulas and Processes. 

Edited by Gardner D. Hiscox. The most valuable techno* 
chemical formulae book published, including over 10,000 se- 
lected scientific, chemical, technological and practical recipes 
and processes. This book of 800 pages is the most complete 
book of recipes ever published, 'giving thousands of recipes 
for the manufacture of valuable articles for everyday use. 
Hints, helps, practical ideas and secret processes are revealed 
within its pages. It covers every branch of the useful arts 
and tells thousands of ways of making money and is just the 
book everyone should have at his command. The pages are 
filled with matters of intense interest and immeasurable prac- 
tical value to the photographer, the perfumer, the painter, 
the manufacturer of glues, pastes, cements and mucilages, 
the physician, the druggist, the electrician, the dentist, the 
engineer, the foundryman, the machinist, the potter, the 
tanner, the confectioner, the chiropodist, the manufacturer 
of chemical novelties and toilet preparations, the dyer, the 
electroplater, the enameler, the engraver, the provisioner, the 
glass worker, the goldbeater, the watchmaker and jeweler, 
the ink manufacturer, the optician, the farmer, the dairyman, 
the paper maker, the metal worker, the soap maker, the 
"veterinary surgeon, and the technologist in general. A book 
to which you may turn with confidence that you will find 
■what you are looking for. A mine of information up-to-date 
in every respect. Contains an immense number of formulas 
that every one ought to have that are not found in any other 
work. 1920 edition. Cloth binding. Price, $4.00 



35 



RUBBER 

Henley's Twentieth Century Book of Receipts, 
Formulas and Processes. 

Edited by Gardner D. Hiscox. Contains upward of 10,000 
practical receipts, including among them formulas on arti- 
ficial rubber. , Price, $4.00 

Rubber Hand Stamps and the Manipulation of 
India Rubber. 

By T. O'Conor Sloane. This book gives full details of all 
points, treating in a concise and simple manner the elements 
of nearly everything it is necessary to understand for a 
commencement in any branch of the India rubber manu- 
facture. The making of all kinds of rubber hand stamps, 
small articles of India rubber, U. S. Government composi- 
tion, dating hand stamps, the manipulation of sheet rubber, 
toy balloons, India rubber solutions, cements, blackings, 
renovating varnish, and treatment for India rubber shoes, 
etc.; the hektograph stamp inks, and miscellaneous r ces, 
with a short account of the discovery, collection and manu- 
facture of India rubber are set forth in a manner designed 
to be readily understood, the explanation being plain and 
simple. Third edition. 175 pages, illustrated. Price, $1.25 

SAWS 
Saw Filing and Management of Saws. 

By Robert Grimshaw. A practical hand book on filing, 
gumming, swaging, hammering and the brazing of band saws, 
the speed, work, and power to run circular saws, etc. A 
handy book for those who have charge of saws, or for those 
mechanics who do their own filing, as it deals with the proper 
shape and pitches of saw teeth of all kinds and gives many 
useful hints and rules for gumming, setting, and filing, and is 
a practical aid to those who use saws for any purpose. Third 
edition, revised and enlarged. Illustrated. Price, $1.50 

SCREW CUTTING 

Threads and Thread Cutting. 

By Colvin and Stable. This clears up many of the mysteries 
of thread cutting, such as double and triple threads, internal 
threads, catching threads, use of hobs, etc. Contains a lot of 
useful hints and several tables. Third edition. 35 cents 

STEAM ENGINEERING 



Horse-power Chart. 

Shows the horse-power of any stationary engine without 
calculation. No matter what the cylinder diameter or stroke; 
the steam pressure or cut-off; the revolutions, or whether 
condensing or non-condensing, it's all there. Easy to use, 
accurate, and saves time and calculations. Especially useful 
to engineers and designers. Price, 50 cents 

36 



Steam Engine Troubles. 

By H. Ham kens. It is safe to- say that no book has ever 
been published which gives the practical engineer snch valua- 
ble and comprehensive information on steam engine design 
and troubles. There are descriptions of cylinders, valves, 
pistons, frames, pillow blocks and other bearings, connect- 
ing rods, wristplates, dashpots, reachrods, valve gears, gov- 
ernors, piping, throttle and emergency valves, safety stops, 
flywheels, oilers, etc. If there is any trouble with these 
parts, the book gives you the reasons and tells how to remedy 
them. 350 pages, 276 illustrations. Price, $2.50 

American Stationary Engineering. 

By W. E.. Crane. A new book by a well-known author. 
Begins at the boiler room and takes in the whole power plant. 
Contains the result of years of practical experience in all 
sorts of engine rooms and gives exact information that cannot 
be found elsewhere. It's plain enough for practical men and 
yet of value to those high in the profession. Has a complete 
examination for a license. Third edition revised and en- 
larged. 345 pages. 131 illustrations. Cloth. Price, $2.50 

Steam Engine Catechism. 

By Robert Grimshaw. This volume of 413 pages is not 
only a catechism on the question and answer principle, but 
it contains formulas and worked-out answers for all the steam 
problems that appertain to the operation and management of 
the steam engine. Sixteenth edition. Price, $2.00 

Boiler Room Chart. 

ByGEo. L. Fowler. A chart — size 14 x 28 inches — showing 
in isometric perspective the mechanism belonging in a modern 
boiler room. The various parts are shown broken or re- 
moved, so that the internal construction is fully illustrated. 
Each part is given a reference number, and these, with the 
corresponding name, are given in a glossary printed at the 
sides. Price, 25 cents 

Engine Runner's Catechism. 

By Robert Grimshaw. Tells how to erect, adjust and run 
the principal steam engines in use in the United States. The 
work is of a handy size for the pocket. To young engineers 
this catechism will be of great value, especially to those who 
may be preparing to go forward to be examined for certifi- 
cates of competency; and to engineers _ generally it will be 
of no little service, as they will find in this volume more 
really practical and useful information than is to be found 
anywhere else within a like compass. 387 pages. Seventh 
edition. Price, $2.00 

Modern Steam Engineering in Theory and Prac- 
tice. 

By Gardner D. Hiscox. This is a complete and practical 
work issued for stationary engineers and firemen dealing 
with the care and management of boilers, engines, pumps, 
superheated steam, refrigerating machinery, dynamos, motors, 
elevators, air compressors, and all other branches with which 
the modern engineer must be familiar. # Nearly 200 questions 
with their answers on steam and electrical engineering, likely 
to be asked by the examining board, are included. Third 
edition. 487 pages, 405 engravings. Cloth. Price, $3.50 

37 



Steam Engineer's Arithmetic. 

By Colvin-Cheney. A practical pocket book for the steam 
engineer. Shows how to work the problems of the engine 
room and shows "why." Tells how to figure horse-power 
of engines and boilers; area of boilers; has tables of areas and 
circumferences; steam tables; has a dictionary of engineering 
terms. Puts you onto all of the little kinks in figuring what- 
ever there is to figure around a power plant. Tells you about 
the heat unit; absolute zero; adiabatic expansion; duty of 
engines; factor of safety; and 1,001 other things; and every- 
thing is plain and simple — not the hardest way to figure, 
but the easiest. Second edition. Price, 75 cents 

STEAM HEATING and VENTILATING 



Practical Steam, Hot-Water Heating and Ven- 
tilation. 

By A. G. King. This book has been prepared for the use 
of all engaged in the 1 business of steam, hot-water heating 
and ventilation. Tells how to get heating contracts, how to 
install heating and ventilating apparatus, the best business 
methods to be used, with "Tricks of the Trade" for shop 
use. Rules and data for estimating radiation and cost and 
such tables and information as make it an indispensable 
work for everyone interested in steam, hot-water heating and 
ventilation. It describes all the principal systems of steam, 
hot-water, vacuum, vapor and vacuum-vapor heating, together 
with the new accelerated systems of hot-water circulation, 
including chapters on up-to-date methods of ventilation and 
the fan or blower system of heating and ventilation. Second 
edition. 367 pages, 300 detailed engravings. Cloth. $3.50 

500 Plain Answers to Direct Questions on Steam, 
Hot-Water, Vapor and Vacuum Heating Prac- 
tice. 

By Alfred G. King. This work, just off the press, is ar- 
ranged in question and answer form; it is intended as a 
guide and text-book for the younger inexperienced fitter 
and as a reference book for all fitters. All long and tedious 
discussions and descriptions formerly considered so important 
have been eliminated, and the theory and laws of heat and 
the various old and modern methods and appliances used 
for heating and ventilating are treated in a concise manner. 
This is the standard Question and Answer examination book 
on Steam and Hot Water Heating, etc. 200 pages, 127 illus- 
trations. Octavo. Cloth. Price, $2.00 



STEEL 



Hardening, Tempering, Annealing and Forging 
of Steel. 

By J. V. Woodworth. A book containing special directions 
for the successful hardening and tempering of all steel tools. 
Milling cutters, taps, thread dies, reamers, both solid and 
shell, hollow mills, punches and dies, and all kinds of sheet- 

38 



metal working tools, shear blades, saws, fine cutlery and 
metal-cutting tools of all descriptions, as well as for all 
implements of steel, both large and small, the simplest, and 
most satisfactory hardening and tempering processes are 
presented. 320 pages, 250 illustrations. Fourth edition. 
Cloth. Price, $3.00 

Steel: Its Selection, Annealing, Hardening and 
Tempering. 

By E. R. Markham. This work was formerly known as 
"The American Steel Worker," but on the publication of the 
new, revised edition, the publishers deemed it advisable to 
change its title to a more suitable one. This is the standard 
work on hardening, tempering, and annealing steel of all 
kinds. This book tells how to select, and how to work, 
temper, harden, and anneal steel for everything on earth. 
It is the standard book on selecting, hardening, and tem- 
pering all grades of steel. 400 pages. Very fully illustrated. 
Fourth edition. Price, $3.00 

TRACTORS 

The Modern Gas Tractor. 

By Victor W. Page. A complete treatise describing all 
types and sizes of gasoline, kerosene, and oil tractors. Con- 
siders design and construction exhaustively, gives complete 
instruction for care, operation ard repair, outlines all prac- 
tical applications on the road and in the field. The best 
and latest work on farm tractors and tractor power plants. 
A work needed by farmers, students, blacksmiths, mechanics, 
salesmen, implement dealers, designers, and engineers. Second 
edition revised and much enlarged. 504 pages. Nearly 300 
illustrations and folding plates. Price, $3.0O 

TURBINES 



Marine Steam Turbines. 

By Dr. G. Bauer and O. Lasche. Assisted by E. Ludwig 
and H. Vogel. Translated from the German and edited 
by M. G. S. Swallow. The book is essentially practical and 
discusses turbines in which the full expansion of steam 
passes through a number of separate turbines arranged for 
driving two or more shafts, as in the Parsons system, and 
turbines in which the complete expansion of steam from inlet 
to exhaust pressure occurs in a turbine on one shaft, as in 
the case of the Curtis machines. It will enable a designer 
to carry out all the ordinary calculation necessary for the 
construction of steam turbines, hence it_ fills a want which. 
is hardly met by larger and more theoretical works. Numer- 
ous tables, curves and diagrams will be found, which explain 
with remarkable lucidity the reason why turbine blades are 
designed as they are, the course which steam takes through 
turbines of various types, the thermodynamics of steam tur- 
bine calculation, the influence of vacuum on steam consump- 
tion of steam turbines, etc. In a word, the very information 
which a designer and builder of steam turbines most requires. 
Large octavo, 214 pages. Fully illustrated and containing 
18 tables, including an entropy chart. Price, $4.00 net 

39 



The Most Valuable Techno-Chemical Recipe 
Book Ever Offered to the Public ! 

Henley's Twentieth Century Book of 

RECIPES, FORMULAS 
AND PROCESSES 

Price $4.00 

This book of 800 pages is the most complete Book of Recipes 
ever published, giving thousands of recipes for the manu- 
facture of valuable articles for every-day use. Hints, Helps, 
Practical Ideas and Secret 
Processes are revealed within 
its pages. It covers every 
branch of the useful arts and 
tells thousands of ways of mak- 
ing money and is just the book 
everyone should have at his 
command. 

The pages are ^ filled with 
matters of intense interest and 
immeasurable practical value to 
the Photographer, the Perfumer, 
the Painter, the Manufacturer 
of Glues, Pastes, Cements and 
Mucilages, the Physician, the 
Druggist, the Electrician, the 
Dentist, the Engineer, the 
Foundryman, the Machinist, the 
Potter, the Tanner, the Con- 
fectioner, the Chiropodist, the 
Manufacturer of Chemical Nov- 
elties and Toilet Preparations, 
the Dyer, the Electroplater, the 
Enameler, the Engraver, the Provisioner, the Glass Worker, 
the Goldbeater, the Watchmaker and Jeweler, the Ink Manu- 
facturer, the Optician, the Farmer, the Dairyman, the Paper 
Maker, the Metal Worker, the Soap Maker, the Veterinary 
Surgeon and the Technologist in general. 

A book to which you may turn with confidence that you 
will find what you are looking for. _ A mine of information, 
up-to-date in every respect. Contains an immense number 
of formulas that every one ought to have that are not found 
in any other work. 

WAAA Practical Formulas and Processes 
,UUU The Best Way to Make Everything 

ONE USEFUL RECIPE WILL BE WORTH MORE 
THAN TEN TIMES THE PRICE OF THE BOOK 

(See page 35 for further description of the book.) 
40 




